Lunar DPX1

I l
, .-1"
,,'
'\ ,
.
Excellence I n Imaging
DPX-IQ
Bone Densitometer
"
Service Manual
t I
-------
Part #3939
Rev.E
3/98
Sales: 1'~800-445-8627
/. . " .. ',~
" Service: 1-800-334~5831 '
',. Fax: 608-274.;.8210
...http://www.lunarcorp.com
COrpOtate Headquarter's' LUNAR Europe LUNAR Germany LUNAR Asia! Pacific
313 W Beltline Hwy. . Sterrebeekses1eenweg 101 Homelier SIr. 33 - 54 Taylor Street .
Madsion WI 53713 3078 Everberg 0-50858 Kotn W~ Pennant Hills. NSW 2125
800-334-5831 Belgium ' Germany Australia
r ';"
608-274-2663 32 2 759.73.73' (49) 615 2234 954 590 61 29873 1091 ;...
608-274-8210 AX 3227S9.57.58 AX 49 615 2234273 153 FAX 61 2 9 871 3753 AX
<
DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
'\ READ THIS FIRST
Using This Manual
A person who will be performing service work on the DPX-IQ should use this manual in the
following manner:
Read the Introduction, General Electronic Descriptions, and Mechanical Descriptions to

familiarize yourself with the scanner as a whole and with the general function of the circuit
boards.
Chapter 4 contains technical deSCriptions of the circuit boards. These should b~(ead and
understood for the best understanding of how the scanner works, but can be use~r
troubleshooting as the need arises. . "~;, :i!~~~Ji;< ;
':f~~~ '.;t~~~. ~~~ !:'
.~ 'l'''~'~)~.. ",;r.
Section 5.1 should be understood completely as it explains the Diag~\~tTOOLS) Diskette.
'111;., B~;l~;:\~ 'r~'
The remainder of Chapter 5, all of Chapter 6 and Chapte~l . ". ," tead as needed, but are
good sources of information. .~. ~~:
~.
When a problem ~rises, ref~1;~i: ~heck

Chapter 8. should b.e the table of contents for.
Chapter 8 to see If the problem being expeF!etTc~.'!§ described. If so, refer to the appropriate
page. If not, try to generalize the prob4:lm ~~ he Detector is repeatedly running into the front
of the scanner and reversing and .' iii·g' back into the front of the scanner. This is a
.mechanical problem in with Transverse Mechanics to be a little more
specific, so start with Tra Failure, section 8.7).
other Sections and pages of the manual as needed, so often

rOT&:>rr""nto as ways to solve problems described in Chapter 8.
.,.
Infonnation Request 0-1

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3i98)
Information Requested By LUNAR
When requesting assistance from Lunar, please provide the following information:
System Number
Institution or Doctor's name
Location
Complete list of symptoms
Names and part numbers of parts needed for service
In addition to the information above, a Quality Assurance History printout listing the following
parameters will also help to improve the accuracy of our diagnosis:
Date (DATE) '"i'.

';:1
p~~:'t;,
,'" t ':!t.t:"
A Ji~~~~~
High Channe l Air Counts (AIR_HIGH)
Low Channel Air Counts (AIR_LOW)
Spillover (SPILLOVER)
Peak (PEAK)
t:f. \~. w~~p
Tissue Value (TISS_LOW and TISS_HIGH) ~, ~ ..."",
,~,~ ~~~,
Large BM (0 BS_L_MASS) '1i~~:&
Large Width (OBS_L_WDTH) ~~\\-" ;> .
If time allows, send Lunar the file namE!.d D''"')~~
'"''' ' ' '"' '",... BF from the subdirectory C:\LUNAR\ANC\ })0< l)\':.1
, This file is a complete QA History al e above data and more.
'---"" It is highly recommended of the Air Counts and Spillover be viewed using the
Lunar software. Any parameters will be apparent from the graphs. For more
information on see "Viewing Quality Assurance Trends", section 8.1Q_
~~ ) I
For proble patient scans, it is recommended that you copy the scan files to
diskette, a description of the problem, to the Applications Department at Lunar.
.-..
.
', '
0-3
Information Request
LUNAR<!9 DPX-IQ Service Manual Table of Contents
Ta Ie of Contents
Chapter 1
Safety
1.1 General Safety ..................... ... ..... ..... ................... .. ....... ...... .............. ..... ....... .. ....... .. 1-1
1.2 Emergency Stop Button .... .. ................. ...... .................. ............ ........... .................. ... 1-1
1.3 Laser Exposure ...... ... ... ... .. ..... ... ..... .. ........ .. ... .. ........ ............. ... ...... ........... ..... ...... .... 1-2
1 .4 X-Ray Shutter Open Symbol ..... ..... ....... ... ......... ........... ... ......... .. ........... .. ........ .... ... .. 1-2
1.5 Cautions, Warnings, and Notes ..... .. .. ....... .... ...... ... ..... ...... .... ..........:.... ...... ... ........... 1-3
1.5.1 Caution Statements .. .......... .. .............. ..... ... .. ..... .... ... ... ....... ........ .. .... ............ ..... 1-3
1.5.2 WARNING Statements ..... ..... ... .. .... ..... ... ... ...... ....... .... .. .... ....... .. ...... .. .. .... ....... ... 1-3
1.5.3 Note Statements .... ..... ...... ......... .... ...... .. ... .... ....... ... ..... ........................ ... ..... ..... 1-3
1.6 Safety Concerns and Labels ..... .... .... ...... .... .... ...... ~ .. ......... ........ .. .. ... ...... .. ... ..... .. ...... 1-3
1.7 Keys .... ......... ................................ ........ ..................... ............ ... .............. ........ .. ...... . 1-5
1.8 Leakage Radiation .... .. ....... ......... .. ...... ..... ............. .... ......... ........... ........................... 1-5
1.9 Controlling Computer and Accessories .......... ..... .... .. .. .... .................. ............ .. ......... 1-5
.
Chapter 2
System Overview
2 System Overview ................... ....... .. ............... ......................... ....... ... ..... ............ ......... 2-1
2.1 Electronics .... .............. ......... .......................... ... ........ ........ ........ ... ..... ....... .... ............2-1
2.2 Single Board Controller (SBC-03) .. ..... .... ....... .. ...... .. ..... .. ......... .. ..... ..... ...... ...... ....... .2-1
2.3 High Voltage Power Supplies .......... .. ......... .......................... ...................................2-2
2.4 Tube Head and MAX Board ..... ............................................................. ...... .. ...........2-2
. 2.5 Transient Protection ...... ..... ... ........ .. ... ... ... .. .... ................ .. ....... ..... ... ........ .. ...... ... .... ..2-2
2.6 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal ........ .. ...... ... ...... ............................. .. .. ........ .. .............. ....2-2
2.7 X-Ray Collimator Subsystem ............,.............. ..... .. ......... ......... ..... ..........................2-3
2.8 System Detector Circuit ... ...... .... .......... .. ....... .. ............ ..... ................ ... .... .. .............. .2-3
2.9 Motion Control ... ....... ....... ................................... ........ .. ..... ......................................2-3
'. '2.10 Control Panel ............................. ..... ................................. ........................................ 2-4
',· 2.11 External Covers ... ..... ... ......... ........ .... .... ... .... .. ....... .... ...... ..... ................... .. .. .... .... .... ..2-4
2.12 DPX-IQ Fusing .... .............................. ....... ................. ........... ....... ·............................ 2-5
Chapter 3
Technical Specifications
3.1.1 X-Ray Generation:" LUNAR Part Number 2288 ........ .. ....... ................ ........ ... .....3-1
3.1.2 X-Ray Tube Head ............ ... .... ...................... ... '" .. ...... .......................... ............ 3-5
3.1.3 High Voltage Power Supplies .... .. ..... ......... .. .......... ....................... ..................... 3-7
3.2 Collimator Subsystem ............. .......... ....................................................................... 3-8
LUNAR~ DPX-IQ SeNice Manuai Table of Contents
4.6.2 Address Selection .. ... ......... .... .. .. .. .... ..... .. ... ... ...... .. .... .. ... .... ..: ..... .. .... ...... .. .... .. .4-23
4.6.3 RS-232-C Interface (U7 & U8) ..... .. ........... ....... ..... .... ... ... ..... ,.. .... .. ... ... .. ........ .. .4-24
4.6.4 System Reset (U8, SWi) ..... ... ... ....... ...... ... .. .... ... ..... .... .. .... ..... .... ..... .. .. .. .. .... .. .4-25
4.6.5 System Clocks (Xi , X2, U15) ...... .... ... ... .... ..... .. ... ... ..... ..... ... .. .... .. ..... .... ...... .... .4-25
4.6.6 Event Counting (U13, Ui4, U17, U18, Ui9, U20, J1 , J2) ..... .... ...... .. ..... ..... .....4-27
4 .6.7 Stepper Motor Control (U9, U10, U3i , U32) ..... .......... ............. ..... .. .. ..... ... ... ... .4-27
4 .6.8 Limit Switch Sensing (U27, U31) ... ...... ... ... ... .... ..... ... .. .... ... .. .... .. ... .. ..... ... .... .... .4-27
4 .6.9 1/0 Ports (U23, U41) ... ... ....... ... .. .... ...... .. ......... ... ... ... ......... ..... ........ .. ... ..... ...... ..4-28
4.6.10 Watch Dog Timer (U48) ... .. .... ... ... ... .. ....... .... .... .... ... .. .. .... ...... ..... .. ........ ... .. ..... .4-31
4.6.11 D/A (Remote Detector Amplifier High Voltage) Control (U44, U45) .. .. ... .... ... .. .4-31
4.6.12 DIA (Remote X-ray High Voltage and Current) Control (U36, U37) .. ....... .. .... ..4-31
4.6.13 AID (Remote X-ray High Voltage, Current and Amplifier High Voltage Feedback
Sense) (U35, U40, U42, AND U43) .... ... ... .... .... .. ....... ... .... .. .... ..... ... .. .... .... ...... .. .. ... ... .. .4-31
4.6.14 Thermocouple Sense (U38, U39) .... ... ... ....................... ..... ... .... ...... .. .. .... .........4-32
4.7 The OINK Board ... .. ... ... ..... ........ .. ... .. ... ...... .... .... .. ... .... .. .. ... ........ ...... .. .... ... ...... .... ...4-35
4.7.1 Motion System ... .... ... ....... ...... .. .. ... ..... .... ... ... ... .. .... ............ ...... .. ........ ... ..... .. ... .4-35
4.7.2 Patient locator Light .... .......... ....... ... ..... ... ........... .... ......... ..... ..... .. ... .... .... ....... .4-36
4.7.3 Collimator Control ...... ...... ... ... ... ... .. .... ...... .. .... .:... ... ... ... ...... .... ........... .. .... ... ... ..4-37
4.7.4 Fans ...... .... ...... .. ... ...... ....... .... ....... .... ... .... .. ...... ..... ..... .. ... ..... .... ....... ... .... .... ...... 4-37
4.7.5 Indicators ... ...... .... .... .... .... ... ..... .. ...... .. .. ... .... ... ..... ........ ... ...... ...... ... ..... ............. 4-37
4.7.6 Emergency Stop ...... .... ..... ...... ... ... ...... .. .. .......:..... ..... .. .... .. ... .... .... ............ .... ... .4-38
4.7.7 OP/CAl ..... .... .. ........ ....... ... ......... .. ....... ........ .. .... ...... .. ...... .............. ............. ..... 4-38
4.7.8 Error Detection .......... ............... ...... .... ........ .... .... ..... .. .. .... .... ...... .... ... .. .......... ...4-38
4.8 Optical Motion Interrupt (OMI) Board ........ .... .. ... ..... ... .. .. .. .. ..... ............... ... .. .... ..... ..4-41
4.9 The Laser Board .... ... .... ....... ... ... .... ....... ..... ...... ....................... ....... ..... .. .. .... ..... .. .. ..4-43
4.10 DPX-IQ Mechanics .... ... ... ..... .... ...... .... .... ... .. ... .. ... ... .. .................. .. ........ .... .... ....... ..4-45
Appendix 4.A
AMP Board Schematics
Appendix 4.8
AGS Board Schematics
Appendix 4.C
DCA Board Schematics
, Appendix 4.D
MAX Board Schematics
Appendix 4.E
XORB Board Schematics
Appendix 4.F
SBC Board Schematics
iii
D:-')'.. -,'e;; Service Mar.ual TaDle ot (;ontem~
8.7.3 Limit Switch Tripped During Scan ...... .. .. ..... ..... ... .. ........... .... .. .. ... .. .. ....... .... ...... 8-39
8.8 Imaging Problems .. .... .... ... ..... ...... ............... ... .......... .. ... ........ .... .... .... ....... .. ........ ... .8-41
8.9 Femur Scan Problems ..... .. .. .... ..... .... ........ ..... .. ..... ... ....... .. .... ...... ..... ...... .. ... ..... ... .. .8-47
8.10 Failing Air Matrix Results ... .... .. .... ... ..... ...... .. ... ... .. ....... ... ... ...... .... .. ... .... .... .... .. ...... ..8-49
8.11 Indicator Failures ... :.. .... ................ ................. ........ ................... .. ........................ 8-51
8.12 Communications Failures .... .. .. .. .... .. ... ... ... ..... .... .. .. ..... .. .. .... .. .... .. ... ... ...... .... .... ... ... .8-55
8.13 Start Up Software .... ..... .... ... ..... ... ... ... .......... .. ............... .... .. ...... ... ... ..... .. .. ........ ...... 8-57
8.14 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends .............. .......... .... .......... ...... ...... ..... ..... .... ..... ... 8-61
Appendix B.A
AGS Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.B
AMP Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.C
DCA Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.D
MAX Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.lE
OINK Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.F
'OMI Board TroubJeshooting
Appendix B.G
SBC Board Troubleshooting
Appendix B.H
XORB Board Troubleshooting
',.
vii
Safety
This chapter highlights safety devices and features one should know before using the DPX-IQ
system.
1.1 General Safety ........................................................................

........................................................................:, :, ....,,.............................. 1-1
1.2 Emergency Stop Button ............................................................... ;........................... 1-1
1.3 Laser Exposure .............................................................:.. ::....; .... ;.................................... 1-2
1.4 X-Ray Shutter Open Symbol ...................................:....... :........................................ 1-2
1.5 Cautions, Warnings, and Notes .....................;•.•.:;·.... :;·.... : ....:: .............................................. 1-3
1.5.1 Caution Statements ............................ ~.; .... ;....................................................... 1-3
1.5.2 WARNING Statements ..... ..... .. .......................................................
.......................................................1-3 1-3
1.5.3 Note Statements ...................... ~."".• ~ ..................................................................
..................................................................1-3 1-3
1.6 Safety Concerns and Lab~J?· Lab~I?·...... >............................................................................. 1-3
1.7 Keys .................
................. ::.........
......... ;:"t3:.;~:: ..................................................................................
;:,,;;S;::;~:: .................................................................................. 1-5
1.8 Leakage Radlatlon_j·;."'.·:.;:~:, ...."..·.:;·:·................................................................................1-5
"..·.:;·:·................................................................................ 1-5
1.9 Controlling COlllJ?ujer.,a~dJf\ccessories .................................................................... 1-5
",-#,.""'" • ',:,,-'" ,', '
"~_ ..'.'. ,:,;,r~,~ i~
->-",;'
-,
,/
Safety Chapter 1
BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Chapter 1 Safety
DPX-/O Service Manual
Manual Rev. E (3/98)
------------------~~~~~~
Lh.SAFETY
1.1 General Safety
• DO NOT attempt to service the DPX-/O without first reading this manual.
• DO NOT attempt any repairs without prior instructions from authorized LUNAR
personnel.
•• In order to maintain electrical safety and electromagnetic compatibility, the Lunar DPX-
DPX
10 is only to be connected to a computer, printer, and peripherals that are certified to be
compliant with IEC 950/EN 60950 Safety of information technology equipment, including
electrical business equipment and IEC 601-1-2 Medical electrical. equipment, Part 1:
General requirements for safety, 2. Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic compatibility-
compatibility
Requirements and tests.
1.2 Emergency Stop Button

The Emergency Stop Button is located on the fron~ of1he'scan arm of the DPX-/O scanner (see
Figure 1.1). When pressed, power is remo~ed fr,omthe X-ray tubehead, the laser, and the
shutter is closed. Power is also removed from tlie~scan arm motors, allowing the
. operator/patient to push the scan a~m ....out
out cif;the way.
.'
g
... LEFT RIGHT"
"-
BACK
FRONT
T i
DPX-IQ SeiVice Manual Rev. E (3/98)
i
\
1.3
,
Laser Exposure
The DPX-IQ is equipped with a Class \I Laser device. This laser is usee ~:Jr t=a:lent positioning.
A Class 11 rating indicates a low power visible laser that is not normally l,dZ"rdous to eyesight
but has the potential to be hazardous if viewed directly for an extended per .od of time. Because
of this potential hazard, DO NOT stare directly into the be'am while the !2':.er is in operation, and
DO NOT allow the beam to shine directly into the patients' eyes. No spedfic eye protection is
re:juired with a Class II laser.
A yellow laser-on indicator, located on the front of the scan arm, is lit wr ,en the laser is on. The
program activates the laser during positioning for an image acquisitior The program then turns
off the laser when you begin the scan. The emergency stop button will turn off the laser.
There is a caution label (Figure 1.2) on the top of the scan arm above the controtpanel.
This eQutpm9nt CMlPlfes with

21 CFR 1 04Q.lO'and 1040.11.
NOTE: DO NOT SJARE3IN::rCFTHE BEAM while the laser is operating.

.~"~,"oC, ~,_,~ ....:
..: _ '
1.4 X-RaY~$~4t"t~_t:'0pen Symbol
O ;,< This symbol is used to indicate an open-shutter condition in accordam;e with the
safety standards established by the International Electrotechnical Commission
(lEC).
This symbol appears near the Amber X-ray shutter-open indicator light. The X-ray shutter-open
indicator light is located on the control panel on the scan arm near the front.
/ .
When this symbol appears in literature associated with the DPX-IQ scanner, it will be used to
indicate that the procedure being described results in an open-shutter condition. During these
times personnel should exercise caution to avoid excessive exposure to the X-rays.
1-2 Safety
DPX-IQ Service Manual
Manual RE:v. E (3/98)
1.,5 Cautions, Warnings, and Notes

This manual contains warning and caution statements wherever appropriate for your safety.
The warnings and cautions used throughout the manual are based on the safety standards
established by the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). In addition, the manual
uses notes to attract t:-,e reader's attention to important information.
1.5.1 Caution Statements
CAUTION:
CAUTION: A caution statement reflects a condition that, if not avoided, could
cause equipment or property damage.
1.5.2 Warning Statements
WARNING:
WARNING: A warning statement reflects. a potentially hazardous condition that, if
not avoided, could result in serious injury.
1.5.3 Note Statements
NOTE:
NOTE: This symbol turns, th,~leader's attention to important information which may
otherwise be ol[ef/obked.
1.6 Safety Cp~c~~~ij~J"and

..r-...< '< "
.r-...<
~ .,,:
Labels
Because the DPX-IQ Densitometer contains moving parts, there are places on the SCclnner
where there is a danger of pinching. Operators should be aware of these pinch points to avoid
injury to the patient or themselves. Labels applied at the LUNAR factory indicate the location of
th~ pinch points. The pinch points and their labels are shown in the figure 1.2.
Safety 1-3
LLINARCB DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
Safety Concerns and Labels

The arm moving near th
table forms a pinch pOint
Lt.~
----;'9
Keys should be removed after·

installation is complete and
stored safely by the installer
. ..: \
The arm mOVin~

nea r the table
forms a pinch
£/~,
The arm forms a pinch pOint as it

approches the cannisters at either end
1-4 Safety
1.7 Keys
Keys are provided for the front and side panels on the DPX-JQ. These keys are used during
installation to secure those panels. After installation, all keys MUST be removed from the
scanner and safely stored by the installer. Electrical safety codes require that these keys be
removed from the DPX-JQ when scanning to prevent unauthorized access to hazardous internal
components.
1.8 Leakage Radiation

There is some leakage radiation from the DPX-IQ when it is running. Figure 1.3 shows the
radiation dosages while the scanner is running at .75 mA and 4.75 mA at certain distances.
These dosages are relatively insignificant as the allowed yearly dosage for a person working
with radiation emitting equipment is 5000 mRem. Radiation however should be avoided when
possible.
1.9 Controlling Computer and Accessories

The TUV GS mark requires the controlling computer and.accessories be placed at least 1.5
meters from the scanner.
Safety 1-5
21'
20'
mRlhr",,...... _ - -_ . . . 15"
I' "
0.1 mRlhr 0.2 mRlhr
/ \
\ 7-
7
\
Tub. He.d J_..............

J_ .............. Foot-End Vil~w
3S- 13- 0' 13- 3S

3S-
I I I I I
20' 10'
I
12" 20'
27'
o o
.... IS" c' 20' 44'
L -__~--------I~--.---~I----~--~I------_r---J
36' 10' 14- 38
38-
Front View
LEGEND
SCALE
Approximately
--- sg~n<fiteJ~~~vaf9'(ih:l~~'iid
-Scanner 4.75mA
1: 18
1-6 Safety
------------------------~~
Chapter 2
System Overview
This chapter provides an overview of the DPX-IQ system. In addition the chapt~~ntains a
brief discussion and illustrations of the DPX-IQ power system. ~. #~4t·~~
i> ~:I-i~ fi;',i'!;~ f~)
~~;.",~.~
2.1 Electronics ...........................................................................,~~'~5? .... .................. 2-1
2.2 Single Board Controller (SBC-03) ................................. ~.,'5'.~:~{:~~\ ..~ ........................... 2-1
High Voltage Power Supplies .................................~:~~~'i .....................................2-2
. • .r!;~~"tttit;
2.3
2.4 Tube Head and MAX Board ...........................~;~.~.~~.~;. ...........................................2-2
2.5 Transient Protection ...................................... ~~;~~~~;;..............................................2-2
2.6 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal ..................... ~J:~~~:.:................................................... 2-2
2.7 .
X-Ray Collimator Subsystem ........:.: ...~~.\,.;;~ ......... ~ ..... ............................................ 2- 3
. .it~· 'i,""
2.8 System Detector Circuit ... .......... t~F~~'?jt ...............................................................2-3

2.9 Motion Control .....................:,......~~.......................................................................2-3
2.10 Control Panel............. . ...................................................................................2-4
2. 11External Covers... . ...............................................................................2-4
2.12 DPX-IQ Fusi ......................................................................................2-5
System Overview Chapter 2

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. 1= (3/98)
1
\
' \,
Chapter 2 System Overview

2.1
I
Electronics.
The electronic components of the DPX-IQ are mounted on the grounded Electronics Mounting
Chassis which is horizontally fastened inside the frame. There are three low-voltage linear DC
power supplies (under 30VDC), and two very-high-voltage dc power supplies (to supply 76kV to
the x-ray tube) on the pan. One medium-high-voltage power supply (1000VDC) is located in the
upper arm near the X-ray detector and supplies power to the Photo-Multiplier Tube (PMT).
In addition to the power supplies, the electronics mounting chassis holds seven printed circuit
boards, a stepper motor controller, the audible alarm, an AC entrancelline filterlfuse holder, an
isolation transformer and a terminal strip for power distribution.
if"" .
'I';t)}
2.2 Single Board Controller (SBC-03) ~~,~$;'~~'
The microprocessor-based Single Board Controller (SSC) provides overta!t~~tion and control
of the scan table. I~ ha~dles r:notion control, pulse counting, and . i~1.i~crfsenSing, ~s w~1I as
... 1
RS-232-C communications with the host computer. The S032.:bas~tl't8c
\'!h(. .... .,....;.
has 56K of" available
~~~
memory (SK EPROM, SK EEPROM, 8K NVRAM, and 3~~~;~~~~

.4> ' 1·v, ;''';'''., ,
Industry standard line drivers and receivers provide ~~l'~~'_C interface to the SSC.
Communication takes place at 19.2 kSaud, usin~~~~its, 1 stop bit, and even parity. .
~
. . ~~ ~ ~.
(jff-~"" ~
All SSC circuitry resets when the micrqpro'~~r resets. This is done during power up, and can
also be done over the commun" rt (vi~fthe host) , through connections to other circuit
boards (as a fail-safe sh the reset button on the SSC, or by pressing the
Emergency Stop Sutton on
Event counting for kes place on the SSC, after pulses have been properly
am plified and . discriminated by other circuitry. The SSC also provides
independe trol of the two stepper motors, and senses limit switch actuation at
the limits
Two 12-bit converters are used to set high voltage and current for the X-ray source. A 12-
bit AID converter is used in the feedback path to sense the actual high voltage and current
settings.
',.
System Overview 2-1

2i3 High Voltage Power Supplies

DPX-IQ scanners use two high-voltage power supplies (±40kVDC). The:---.....; pOv'Ver supplies are
powered by the AC line voltage and have their own built in fusing. They die.' have a dedicated
isolation transformer which is mounted on the Electronics Mounting Chassi~.
2 ~4 Tube Head and MAX Board

The Tube Head consists of an oil-filled metal box which •.'" !..Jses a fixed-clnode X-ray Insert
(essentially a vacuum tube diode), lead-type shielding, collimating devices, a filament
transformer, and electrical connectors.
,~~,
Although the SSC sets the high voltage and current, the MAX board actuallYl!re , ,\)'lS current to
the filament transformer In the Tube Head. The X-ray Insert converts thl? ~., · .,~ .,. 1r1to x-rays by
accelerating the electrons with a high voltage from the cathode into a tu~t~ arget on the
anode. The tube current can range anywhere from 0.15 rnA to 4.75«)\'9epending on the
acquisition type. ,f!..'f'~~.~p'
The two high voltage power supplies provide the anod~p:ntial

to the insert. During
normal operation, 76kVp IS applied (+38kV at the a~~~a~~38kV at the cathode).
t-: ~~,iL
There is one dedicated DC power supply fo~e~~;b~ard,' supplying +28VDC. It can be
switched off (for fail-safe purposes) by~ s'~te relay. In certain cases (for example, loss of
arm motion) the relay will switch 0., ". prevent production of x-rays.
~ ~}~
2.5
The XORB printed rovides protection to various circuits from transients within the
system. There ionai static discharges within the Tube Head. The transients
caused by ='~ ="'--'1o"'=''''''''''':'charges (arcs) are shunted to ground through the 'array of transorbs
present on . Although there is no safety hazard to anyone, the electronics
could be da were no protection prOvided.
2.6 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal

During exposure, whenever x-ray production is halted or the Shutter is closed an audible signal
1
notifies the operator that there is a "safe" condition. The OINK board senses the closure of the
Shutter or the cessation of current through the X-ray Insert and switches on the audible signal if
/ either of these occur during an exposure.
',.
2-2 System Overview

LUNAR<E: DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
2j 7 X-Ray Collimator Subsystem

Both the Shutter and two-position Collimator are actuated by linear solenoids. These solenoids
are controlled by signals generated on the SSC, and fed through the OINK board . Two limit
switches sense actuation of each solenoid and report position information back to the SSC.
This assemoly is ioeated on top of the Tube Head.
2.8 System ~+-ector Circuit

A Detector, consisting of a photomultiplier tube (PMT) with a sodium iodide crystal scintillator, is
used to receive x-rays transmitted through the scanning media. Bias potential to the PMT is set
by the SSC, and supplied by a variable high-voltage power supply. Pulses from.#le detector are
fed to the AMP board, which consists of a preamp, amplifier, pulse shaper, anQJ.i~. driver. This
board is mouflted with the variable high voltage power supply next to the~e~ 'In the upper
arm. Signals pass from it to the Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS) board. $q: ~f,>q,~, .
..:,'_A·~\~~;;c
One of two Dual Channel Anal~'=~i (DCA) printed circuit boargp ~.:'~AGS in operation (AGS
DCA). The AGS output signal amplitude is proportional t~J~fi4y level of the photon. This
signal is fed to the other DCA which distinguishes anal~'Se£~rom the 38 keV and 70 keV
energy I~vels (of the incoming photons) and presen~~~ulses for these signals to the SSC
for counting ~, . ~<.. ~
#11 ~~. '\~
2.9 Motion Control .. ~~~~
Motor pulses, RUN/HOLD sig ction are controlled by the SSC. The RUN/HOLD
signals are optically isolated board before being sent to the Centent mot()r drivers.
The Centents supply StepPE~r motor windings. Both the transverse and
longitudinal drive lotted disks attached which pass through optical interrupters
for motion dete,CIJo motion stop during patient scanning, the system is reset and x-ray
production i5.c
Limit switche - ; ach end of the scanner and each end of the arm signal the SSC whenever
motion reaches either end or side of the scanner. If a limit switch is tripped during a patient
scan, the motor associated with the tripped limit switch is halted and the shutter is closed.
There is a dedicated DC power supply for the motion control circuitry, supplying +26VDC. The
+26VDC ground is isolated from the logic ground to reduce noise.
",'
System Overview 2-3

LIJNAR~ DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
2. ~ 0 Control Panel
The control panel of the DPX-IQ, located on the front face of the upper arm, is the main operator
interface outside the host computer. Four indicators display status. A green Light Emitting
Diode (LED) indicates a power-on condition; it lights when the +26VDC power supply comes
on. Another yellow LED indicates if the laser is on. An amber X-ray On LED indicates that x-
rays are being produced (current is flowing through the X-ray Insert), though exposure is not
necessarily taking place. Only when the amber Shutter Open LED comes on is the Shutter
open and exposure possible.
Rocker switches on the panel allow operator control of the beam position.
~~.
T.he s.quare. red button may be used for emergency stops, and is to be use~ ~\o~~mergency
situations; It resets the scanner and halts x-ray production. d~~~:~" '.
.,~,.;;:.~"~~-t-_''f.;:~
2.11 External Covers ~\ 1~~~11:t.:,'~+'·
. "':t.{ , !,:~-:-.fl.
The Internal components of the scanner are safely secure,$ ~Jlt~mber of panels and doors
including the scanner's table top. The Front and Side ~,~secured by locks, for which the
customer should have keys. The Front Door gives ~:~ . ',,;Jj'(a"'the electronics panel, but for
_
o S§.
component replacement of any kind it is recomm~at the tabletop be removed. Each

panel is grounded to the electronics pan. ,$t7!: ~Jf .
The tabletop is held in place by ·rackVbolted to the frame by eight hex socket head
screws, which can be acce g the side doors. Remove the door grounding wire
before door removal. The disconnected by removing the "faston" terminals from
the panel tabs. These n slide off their hinge pins (towards the front of the
scanner) for easy
It is not u to remove the front and back panels for most service needs.
However, needed to the Front and Rear Longitudinal Carriages, these can be
removed. panel is secured by hex socket head-head screws and must be slid out of
the way, for it IS between the Arm Column and the frame (see section 6.11 if the scanner has an
arm slot cover). The front panel is held by two hex socket head-head bolts and lifts off the
frame.
If access is needed to the detector, Transverse Limit Switches or the other components
mounted above in the arm, the covers of the arm must be removed (these covers are grounded
r to the arm). The bottom cover can be removed by loosening the eight screws holding it in
place. The top cover is held in place by four screws, two in the front and two in the back. The
top panel cannot be completely removed because the control panel is attached to it. Instead,
support the top panel with the shroud support brackets.
2-4 System Overview

2.12 DPX-IQ Fusing
Fuse 100/115 VAC 230/240 VAC Type*
F1 (+5, ±12VDC PS) 1.2SAL 0.63AL 5x20MM
F2 (+26VDC PS) 2.SAL 1.25AL 5x20MM
F3 (+5, ±12VDC PS) 1.25AL 0.63AL 5x20MM
F4 (+26VDC PS) 2.SAL 1.25AL 5x20MM
F5 (+28VDC PS) 0.63AL 0.63AL ~ ~?x20MM

. ~ #~~ ~,
~",' e,l'!!». D-5x20MM
F6 (+28VDC PS) 0.63AL 0.63AL i~\"~'" ,,~s~, 1~ .
MAX PCB F1 O.SAL
o·!~~t:;;~~ 1 04"x11 04
"
4~~ ~.~.i':0'!,.
*All Fuses are 2S0V, low breaking capacity (2SA min.)4t~f~}~~.0~

" .~\ ',*,
',.
System Overview 2-5

.(
nm
J3
AGS
J8 J7
J41---1
J
1DPX..,~
.-~
HIGH ENERGY
r-~~----------------------~
co ~
Q? PMT .~
£1 AMP AMP~IFY
~'':'i;;;''''!''iH' 1-
w
~
;>
Q)
HVPS
\JENUA"
iEl OMI,:('" 8:·!" R~·Nl~~:X);:
>'=.'
{:'.~"'~'},) :;~:·j :·i:"'· #: ~\
TRANSVERSE MECHANICS
g!
o
E
Q)
AGSDCA ~ sac .+oJ

U)
~
(f)
LONGITUDINAL MECHANICS
PMTI LASER
~~S~~E~.
ti'." . Ir---------~
Detector & J15 J17 J16 J21 J20 J1
LASER
. ALARM
BOARD
cu SCINTILATIO
:J
C N CRYSTAL
cu
~
~ ~%~ ";p"l1eNt ,,.,.'ic
a .::;:.>\,;.{t:< :'::~':;"'~
. ,;:";'" DP~V
A SERIES
.~
ill
. ,. . . . . ..., ';nrrL.r':·:{"~~BLE TOP BLOCK
.
CJ)
o li~~~~; DIAGRAM
~
gs '~~;':. ~
K-EDGE FIL TI
0.~;'O~:::~~~I~~C~~~:~S
Nt·
/1ft:\.
/ \\
HF~-c'CP:" 1 § ," ;·······. J \. \ ~ I ,
_
~;.
FILAMENT
TRANSFORMER
.. : ,
ry."': 1".1
.
.:;::': •....•.
_ NEGATIV
E HVPS
MJ
FILAMENT
CURRENT
CONTROL
J7 J2 J4
II
I
a..
.
/ _• -
' .._st:1..1-_
rvy'vcR X-RAY 3'"

'
0 Gill
,~;:; ;:,~ r+', FtI II
"''''
,~~~~ ~~ '". " ,
., nullC:I"i
.•
•
(
,-",,,,c:R ?v3. :;:;-i.i,Ci-i1::3 ~-~~~'

.o,v,
I..-- Jl
THE MO:';TA J271-,!.:..=-':":":":~'
T J10 a _ - ' -_ _
--~
'" " "
@
a:::
<{
z
~
-I
THfM~COUPL
~---------------------~I
XORBJ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~;~;~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~f~==iF~tJ
J5rRANSIENT J
PROTECT/O~4
J3
J15t=========~::~::::~~~llQ~
J21 -kV MONITOR
__________________________====:j=========== <0I
J13 N
L:_fPl~~K~' DP,)(-JQ Service ManL:a! Rev. E (3/98)
----------------------- - _. -_. __._ ---------'---.....:....
/':
/ /
~
)
~fAcI I MAIN I DPX-IQIIEC

~ BREAKER t------,
POWER BLOCK
DIAGRAM
OINK
FUSES
100/110 2301240
+26VDC FUSES
POWER F7 160mA
F22.5A 1.25A
SUPPLY F8 160mA
F42.5A 1.25A
I
i
fUSES +5VDC ! HV/AMP I
1001110 2301240 +1-12VDC : MODULE
,.-....
F1125A O.63A POWER
I i I
f31 .25A O.63A SUPPLY
I I I
+28VDC
POWER
~
~ I
I1 ~
SUPPLY 1 0
I :::0
i
MAX I
I
F1 O.SA
4
-+ 1...
I
I
-HV I
POWER
SUPPLY
XORS
+HV
POWER
SUPPLY
'"
System Overview 2-7

FT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
',.
1
2-8 System Overview

LlINAR~ DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
--------------------~~~~
Chapter 3
Technical Specifications
This chaprter includes specific technical information perstdddaining to the various corrWnents and
subsystems of the DPX-IQ System. ~ .~:t·~2:~~,
". ~ ..~;.;... '" ;fi...i-':"
3.1.1 X-Ray Generation - LUNAR Part Number 228B ............. ~~~.:~; ::': ~~ ....................3-1
3.1.2 X-Ray Tube Head .................................................. :~:~~t:~:~.·:~· ...........................
3-5
3.1.3 High Voltage Power Supplies ............................~:.~;-:.:;~~.~~~ .................................. 3~7
3.2 Collimator Subsystem ....................................._.:!A,•. ::~~~;~::: .. ............ ........ ................ 3-B
.~:~:~:~:!:~~~:;~I~;t;:;:::;:;;:;;;:;:;;;~~~(}~~~~~%~~7:;::;;;;;;: : : ;:; ;: : ; ;:;:;:; ;:;:;:; ; !~!

3.5 Power Requirements ........ : . .=~ ......~~~; ...•.•. .. ...........................................•. .............. 3-10
• ~lJ..
3.6 The Densitometer ....... ..t~ ................................................................................. 3-10
3.7 . I S pecif'lea.ti·~5~
M ech anlca . ifb.~~~." ............... ................................................. .............. 3 - 11
~~..~";-
3.PLnI~~~~t~ers7~:Y@~:~~::::::::::::::::::.: :::.:.::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::::.::::::~~l
3.B.1 I~' -:-: _ . . a (Long. x Trans.) ........... ... .................................... ........... ... .... .. .. .3-12
3.B.~~P~: - ... ' ··s(· ............................................................................................ ............ 3-12
3.9 ~~:.. ,'. ~frtal Specifications ..................... ............................................ ..... ........... 3-13
3.9.1 ..~bientSpace ...................................... .......................................................... 3-13
3.9.2 Dust, Fumes, and Airborne Debris .................................................................. 3-13
3.9.3 Humidity .. ,............................................ ..... ...................................................... 3-13
3.9.4 Static Electricity ........................................................................................ ....... 3-13
3.9.5 Temperature....................................................................................................3-13
3.9.6 Shock and Vibration ........................................................................................3-13
3.10 OPX.-tO F1JSeS ......... .. . .... .. ... ........... ...... ..... . ....... .......... . .. .......... .. ....... ......... .3-14
Technk;al Soecifications Chaoter 3

-----
Chaoter 3 Technical Soecifications

DPX-/O Serv.~e Manua! Rsv. E (3/98)
3.1.1 X-Ray Generation - LUNAR Part Number 2288

The DPX-IQ X-ray production system combines a constant potential generator (consisting of
two high voltage power supplies) and an X-ray tube. The high voltage power supplies (HVPS) ,
operating at a high frequency of 50 kHz, provide a continuous output of 38 kV each and up to 5
mA to the X-ray r...!~. -;-hE: anoae is comoosed of a tungsten alloy. The soecifications of the X-
ray generation subsystems are outlined next.
The foilO+.'ir;g tabiB wmams tr,e soedficaticns f~; trre lEe X-Ray generator for DPX-IQ devices.
Classification CLASS I EQUIPMENT IEC 601-2-75.1

Degree of protection against TYPE B EQUIPMENT lEG 601-2.?? 5.2
electric shock ~~~ ,
Protection against ingress of ordinary MEDICAL ELECTRICAL IEe':J)~~i-:'5.3
liquids EQUIPMENT ~·,\~t~'<;:~
Connection to supply mains Detachable power cord ",,-;:~ ~~E'&'1301-2-7 6.1 g)
Mode of operation :'Jl'iTINUOUS "". r:~ ~:'~ f;> fEG 601-2-7 6.1m)
Max. x-ray tube voltalle 76kV .
.... t.~~~.~~ct lEG 601-2-7 6.1 m)
Max. x-ray tube current SmA ~~~~.,. lEG 601-2-7 6.1m)
Rated mains voltage 1 00/115/2301240 v~'l%g~. '.;~~ lEG 601-2-7 6.1j)1)
Number of phases in mains 1 ,",,~1i~~i-~~' IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)2)
Mains freguency 50/60 Heftf'" ~~3 IEC 60'1-2-7 6.1j)3)
Max. apparent resistance of o~~8:0h
... '~
"'?~-. ..o--:i
~J,~.~ IEC 60'1-2-7 6.1j)4)
supply mains ~~~
Required over-current release~~~ ~P dedicated service is IEC 601-2-7 6.1j)5)
, ~~ '~1irred
Heat dissipative ~ .~ ':-x-ray tube head dissipates 30SW lEG 601-2-7 6.1t)
J. *:~~~~.~\~'i-
max. into surrounding air through
forced air convection. Flow rate:
~ ~6~' 36m3/h (approx.) Temp. rise of air
~ ~~"~ stream: 2S0C (approx.)
Allowable hj~ge power Spellman X21121X2113 rev. K and IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1 &
supplies higher 50.2.101-102
Bertan 2411 P & 2411 N rev. A and
higher
Allowable tube head assemblies Lunar model 2288 or equivalent IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1 &
50.2.101-102
Original language of English IEC 601-2-7 6.8.1
accompanying documents
Max. continuous kV,mA @ 76kV,4mA IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2 1)
nominal rated kV
Max. intermittent kV, mA @ 76kV, SmA IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2 1)
nominal rated kV
Max. continuous kV, rnA @ max. 61 kV, SmA IEC 601-2-7 6.8.22)
mA
Max. intermittent kV, mA @ max. 76kV, SmA lEG 601-2-7 6.8.22)
rnA
Continuous kV, mA for max. 76kV,4mA lEG 601-2-7 6.8.23)
electric output power
Technicat Soecifications 3-1

i
LUNAR~ DPX-IQ Service Manuai Rev. E (3/98)

------------------------~--~
Intermittent kV, rnA for max. 76kV,5mA IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2 3)

electric output power
Nominal electric power O.4kW lEe 601-2-7 6.8.2 4)
Reference current time product 7.89mAs IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2 5)
Parameters: 76kV, 2.63mA,
3 seconds
Nominal shortest irradiation time 3 seconds IEC 601-2-7 6.8.2 8)
I
Repetition rate for loadings during No specific wait period was IEC 601-2-750.104.4
tests imposed. Time between tests was
approx. 20 sec.
Method of X-Ray tube voltage Voltage divider in high voltage power IEC 601-2-750.106.1
measurement supply -
Method of X-Ray tube current Shunt resistor in high voltage supply IEC 601-~,50.1 06.2
measurement retum line 4" ~(~f~~
X-Ray tube assembly reference Line normal to the tube port, ~"OOtE2-7 50.107.1
axis centered on tube port c:. . ">6...;,,,~··
~~" ... - :;'
~S{
(see Figure 1.6) .r~·~
Quality Equivalent Filtration 41 mm ALI 76 kV ~ rfr, fj~~~~~1 IEC 522 I 1976
Filament Characteristics see FigiJre 1.8 ,~~~~:f;~:,g(, IEC 613 11989
Nominal X-Ray Tube Voltage 76 kV - Ano~tai~ode IEC 613 I 1989

38 kV -#lf~Earth
3.~kV - ~~tWode to Earth
~:~~~
Single Load Rating ~ '.;'~ (4.750 rnA, 76 kV) for up to 4 IEC 613 11989
I~
'".. :---:: ..
~and 59 sec
4<'>"'~"f'
~i-
Serial Load Rating 361 W (4.750 rnA, 76 kV) for up to 4 IEC 613 I 1989
i;,~";;;~<.,,
min and 59 sec with a 10 min cool
.
o@;~,:: ~~,. down time between scans.
Maximum V~SSembIY 260 kJoules IEC 613 I 1989

Heat Conten '~ -
X-Ray Tube Assembly Heating I see Figure 1.7 IEC 613 11989
Cooling Curves
Maximum Continuous Heat 361 Watts IEC 613 11989

Dissipation
Maximum Symmetrical Radiation diameter = 10 mm IEC 806 I 1984

Field
Dimensions 17emx19.4emx11 em IEC 601-2-28
Weight 8.6 kg IEC 601-2-28
Leakage Radiation was measured 750 DA, 76 kV and IEC 601-2-28

at the following Loading Factors 4.750 rnA, 76 kV
see Figures 1.11 and 1.12
Focal Spot to Image Receptor 58.1 cm IEC 601-1-3

\, ,
3-2 Technica I Soecifications

,r-"'o••_ ,' ,- -
OISlance
Attenuation Equivalence of Patient 0.7 mmAI IEC 601-1-3

Support Table
Reference Loading Conditions 1.09X106 Joules IEC 601-1-3

4 rnA, 76 kV for 1 hour
Table 3.1
Technt~ Soecifications 3-3

Reference
Longitudinal
---Axis
300.00
::;-
~
C
4.1 200 .0
C
0
0
iV
4.1
::I:
"0
!O
4.1
::I: 100.00
4.1
.0
76kV, 1 rnA (l6W)
::::l I
I-
50.00
0.00
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
Time (minutes)
", ..
k\ ..
3-4 Technical Soecifications

DP)(-!Q Service Manuel Rev. E (3/98)
2.4
. . . ..
~ {aJ<;(~ -'7'jc=-
!
,.,.. ~
~TtN5AZ
I - -' _. -
2.3 3
... ~
. G.O:/
Curren!. -
.' "/------- ---- -----
- _. - 1/)
2.2
'/
"";/
2.8 ~
$ Voltage .2:
C 41
e Cl
:; ~
:,"/
"0
() 2 .1
,/ 2.6 >
C C
41
E I 0 __
41
E
.!!! I
u:: 2
~~
".
:"/ I
-' ,
~:,..
/
1.9 2.2 sre fJ O. 02.
I
0/1 ~
i
I
1.8 .",,":'-. ':0:-:. 2
1000 4000 5000
3.1.2 X-Ray Tube Head

The X-ray tube gets its igh voltage power supplies which provide a constant
potential of up to 5 I~~~~~~dnd operate at a high frequency of 50 kHz_ This produces a
stream of electron and accelerates them towards the anode thus producing X-
Nominal 361 Watts for an equivalent IEC 613/1989

Anode input power of 361 W
Maximum Anode Heat Content 6000 Joules X ~'J6; 8 -i~6a IEC 613/1989
Anode Heating and Cooling Curves see Figure 1.9 IEC 613/1989
Anode Target Material Tungsten IEC 601-2-28
Reference Axis see Figure 1.10 IEC 601-2-28
Target Angle 78 deg (reference to normal) IEC 601-2-28

anode is cut at 20 deg rotated
54 deg resulting in 12 deg
normal to longitudinal
Nominal Focal Spot Value 0.5 IEC 336 11982

Table 3.2
Technical Soecifications 3-5

-::.
6000.00 T
76kV. SmA (380W)
5000.00
~ 7f)kV 4mA (::l()4W\

CQ) 4000 .00
C
0
0
3000.00
iV 76kV. 3mA (228W)
Q) ~ :(. '(T" :: . ~ ~'~
:I:
Q)
"8c: 2000 .00

c:(
1000 .00 7f) kV 1 rnA (7f)W)
0 .00
0 5 10 15 20 50 55 60
I Reference Axis

LUNAR® DPX-!Q Sei·..ice Manual Rev. E (3/98)
3.1.3 High Voltage Power Supplies

The high voltage power supplies (H'v'PS) get their power input dir-e~t!y f:-oiTI the 120 VAC input
iine. Tabie 3.3 below summarizes the operating characteristics of the high voltage power
supplies .
,.'
Specifications High Volta_ge Power Supply, '
Operating Voltage +38kV(norninal) (76 for both)

Operating Current 0.0-5.0 rnA
Output Power 0.0-190 Watts (380 for both)
~::;,
InQut Voltage 115VAC ± 10%, SO/60Hz "~~': ..
#~~.~~'
Switching Frequency High Frequency (50 kHz)" ,'~~0 .:;I~" ):·
Overcurrent Limit 5.5 mAt .2mA ~4~~'b'-::'f

I;~~%~.· ·'~~~' . ~"
OvervoltC!ge Protection 41 kV ± 1 k~:. 1t-;;:~*'
••~. ik~ ..~~~ , ' ,
Dimensions (WxLxD) 25.4Ct:~~X8.1cm
(1 O'~~ :., Xt3.187")
:J'!I" ~~"' ~~
Weight ~. , as.-S-kg
...
~t:. •
Table 3.3
';-;. ~

DPX-IQ Service Manu.:: Rev. E (3/98)
Goilimator 5uosystem
-:-he collimator subsystem contains a beam coliimator and a beam shutter.
3.2.'1 Collimator
The collimator consists of two circular openings; fine and mectium. The medium setting is used
as default.
3.2.2 Shutter
An X-ray shutter occludes the radiation beam during tube warm up and certain QA tests. The
shutter is a lead plug mounted to a linear solenoid on the collimator assembly. I~. opened
electronically by the system software during acquisitions and is closed aut'?T~pY- at all other
times. ~i;~\~"Wf
3.3 Detector ~. t~;·~~J' .'
. . 'i:.~,-~~;',1'
The DPX-IQ uses a Nal(TL) crystal photo-multiplier tu~~~~,.75" in diameter and 6.S25'!
long. It is connected to the AMP board by a lemo conJ1~~~{, The PMT uses a positive high
vo Itage .Input b etween 600-
800 VDC
. ;v..&~
~:'., ~~~. ,y,~,
",.
VO "'<

LUNAR® DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
3.4 Laser Locator Light

A low-power laser is used to help the operator properly position the patient during the exam.
The laser localizer light produces a small bright spot which corresponds to the center of th8
initial position of the X-ray beam. The laser is a Class II product with a maximum power
dissipation -of 1.0 mW and a Hfet+me -of 50,000 hours. Table 3.3 summarizes the DPX-IQ laser
specifications.
Specifications Laser Specifications Laser
LUNAR Part 1462 Aspect Ratio 4 to 1

Number
Output Power <1 mW
Wavelength 670 nm
Frequency Drift 0.25 nmfC
Laser Stmcture Gain guided 500 microns
Laser InGaAIP 2 rnrad

Composition
Spatial Mode Single

I~------------~--------~~~~
" 'J - ~current Draw 105 rnA
Longitudinal Voltage Input 4-6 VDC

Mode
Safety Rating Class II
.'
DPX-/Q Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
3.5 Power Requirements

Ii
Specification Range
100 VAC Range 90-110 VAC 50/60 Hz 10 A

115 VAC Range 103-127 VAC 50/60 Hz 10 A
230/240 VA C Range 207-264 VAC 50/60 Hz 7.5 A

Tab!e 3.5 - Power Specifications
.... ::.
3.6 The Densitometer ~<:, rE~:.-~~"

The DPX-IQ includes the patient table and frame, X-ray tube, X-ray geneJ.?~·~~ector, and
arm. Its physical specifications are summarized in table 3.8 below. ~t2{~~:\5>'
~ <~~~ ~~~v· ~
Specifications DPX-IQ240
Table Len th 180.98 cm
Table Depth 102.87 cm (40.5")
Table Hei ht
250 kg (550 Ib) 273 kg (600 Ib)

DPX-IQ Servie& iv·'~n_u_a_I___________
R__e_v_.=E~.~..:::...3':....:/9-=8L.)
3.7 Mechanical Specifications

The DPX·-.fQ has a mechanical design with two separate motion syste:Tl ' ~18t ae capable of
simultaneous operation. These are transverse, and longitudinal. Both i.J' In ~ystems are
driven by stepper motors.
37.1 Transverse
The tube head and detector assemblies are mounted (.~ r arriages whk ) move transversely on
the arm. This motion type is required for positioning, dally QA's, and ~I' image acquisitions.
3.7.2 Longitudinal ~.l'-

The DPX-IQ arm assembly is mounteci on a longitudinal track. This motioQ.\!y~~qUired for
positioning, daily OA's, and all image acquisitions. Transverse and long~~avel ranges
are shown in table 3.14 below. . ~~~~~:\':.,
DPX- 180
Nominal Transverse 54.0 em (21.3")

ical Limit
Transverse Software
Limit
197.5 em (77.8")
196.69 em (77.4")
. . *-~ .
Longltudl~~,..
Software LiffiW~
T-echnical 'Soeeifications 3-11

3.8 Functional Specifications
3.8.1 Imaging Area (Long. x Trans.)

Maximum Active Imaging Area: 62.25 cm (24.5 inches) x 197.5 cm (77.75 inches)
3.8.2 Programs
• AP Spine acquisition and analysis.
• Femur acquisition and analysis.
• Lateral Spine acquisition and analysis.
• Total Body acquisition and analysis .
• Forearm acquisition and analysis.
• Orthopedic acquisition and analysis.
• Pediatric acquisition and analysis.
• Small Animal acquisition and analysis. ,~~~"':i;. .
r'~()"%> .
~...."(,. stJ·
" $-

3.9 Environmental Specifications
3.9.1 Ambient Space

Proper operation and serviceabWty of the system require unobstructed space surrounding the
scan table. Allow a minimum clearance of 12" at the head and foot ends of the scan" table, at
least 6" for the arm side, and 18 for the operator Side.
fl
Do not block the cooling vents on the computer and scan table. Allow 6" between the console
table and the wall to ensure adeq'late clearance for the cables and pJugs at the back of the
computer.
.~&,"
• • ~~. ~er~1,~5>
3.9.2 Dust, Fumes, and Airborne Debns &';"1- %~ 41~>"
Install the system in a clean, well-ventilated area. The accumulation ~~.~"nd other airbome
contaminants can impair the diskette drive heads and other s~. ns~~~<;mponents. Lunar
recommends a "No Smoking" policy for the system area . .,. ~~.~:it ~
£"" ' ,. ·~;,. ·W
'i'(#.~' ~~~
3.9.3 Humidity
.:ft.h ,~· ~ .'
~~,~,
'!;'::o w"
The humidity level in the system area shoul~ee~fo, non-condensing.
. ~c:e:
~
3.9.4 Static Electricity .~~
The system should be in a st . ~. '~''-f~ ·ronment. This can be accomplished by using anti-
static mats and by not all<;> ..-~. tive humidity to drop below 20%.
}'§,r:if- .
3.9.5 Tempe~q .
The acceptable " t. . ..~:~Ture range for the system is 65DF to 81 OF (180C to 27DC).
'~".
\t~
3.9.6 Shoc({7and Vibration
Shock to the imaging table may not exceed 1 G for a period of more than 1 millisecond. Do
NOT subject the imaging table to vibration in excess of 0.25 G at 5 Hz.
NOTE: Whenever the system is turned off or there is a power failure~ it must be warmed
up f.or one hour before .acquiring images. again.
T-echntcaI Soecifications 3-13

3.10 DPX-IQ Fuses

The following table specifies the fuse values for all fuses in the DPX-IQ.
Fuse 100/11SV 230/240V

F1 1.2SA,2S0V .63A,2S0V
F2 2.SA,2S0V 1.2SA,2S0V
F3 1.2SA,2S0V .63A,2S0V
F4 2.SA,2S0V 1.2SA,2S0V
.,; ':
FS .63A,2S0V .63A,2S0V ~ ...
~
F6 .63A,2S0V .63A, 2S~Vi:~~.. ~

.. . . -, >
,~ ' ~>
F7 160mA,2S0V 160m~~~" "
F8 160mA,2S0V ~o:~J OO~~50V
.~ .~ ..; -";-
.... ~;" , .
~ ~- );.iI. ~".
MAX PCB F1 .SA,2S0V & :+: ~~~A, 2S0V
Table 3.8 "

DPX-1Q Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
Chapter 4
Technical Description
This chapter includes discussions of the various interface circuit boards of the D~-lQ.
" .~~' ~
: ~.1 ~he~i~:Ui~~::~;;ii~~ ••••••.•• • •: •••••: ••••• •• ••• ••••• •• •••• • •••• ••~~i\.~t.~·~ .. .. 1:i
.2 The AutomatIc Garn StabIlizer (AGS) ...... ... ..... ... .... .. ........,.,, ~ .~~: ..... ... ........ .... .. ..... ...4-5
".".~ '1"
:~j ~~:~~~~,~,~t,~ •••••• ••• ••• •••• ••••••• • •••••· • ii~~~~~

4.2.4 Operate/Calibrate (OP/CAL)........ .. .. . ~!,'5*:, ~
• • • •.•. •..:. . . . . . .
.. ........................... ............... .. .....
T:~ .4-6
llca fIon Stage .... .... ... .. ..... .. .. €';!;~.'
4 .2 .5 A mp IT ' ..,;... . .. . ..... . .. .. . . .... . ... ... .. .... ... ......... . .. . .... .4-6
~- -:;g~.,
4.2.6 Sign~1 Output ....... .. ...... ..::.. ..{!·f;~-.P... ................... ......... ... .. ...... .... .. ....... ........ .4-6
4.2.7 Amplify/Attenuate IndIcatIon :q~ .. .. .. . . . . . . .... . . • .. . ..... . •..... . .. . .. ... .. .. . . . .... ... . . .. ... . .. . . . . .4-6
4.2 .8 Performance and . n ... .. ..... ....... ... .. ..... .. .. .... ........ .... ..,'" .. ..... ........ ...... ....4-7
4.2.9 AGS Adjus ... ..... ... .... ...... ....... ... ... ........ .... ..... ... ..... .... ... ..... ...... ...4-7
4.2.10 Test . ..... ..... ...... ..... ... .... ... ..... .. ..... ... .. .. ... ... ....... ........... ... ...... ..4-9
4.3 The Dual (DCA) ... ... .. ..... ......... ...... ....... .... .. .. ............ .. .... ... .. .. ... .4-11
4.3.1 Fu n... .. ..... .... ... .......... ... .... ..... ... ..... .. ..... ....... ...... .... ...... .. ..... '" .4-11
4.3.2 IS and Operation ..... ..... ..... .. .... ... ..... .. ... .. .... ... ..... ..... ..... ... ..... ..... .4-11
4.3. Facts ... .... ... ...... .. .... ....... .. ... ...... ... ..... ..... ....... .. .... .... ....... .. .... .. .. ... .... .4-12
4.3. ended DCA Settings ... .. ....... ...... ...... .. ..... .. ... ... ..... ...... .... ....... .. ..... ..... .4-12
4.3.5 st Points ...... .......... ..... ... ..... .. ..... ...... .. .... ....... ......... ..... ... ........................ ......4-13
4 .4 The MAX Board ......... ...... ... ... ... ....... .. ...... ..... ....... .. ... .. ...... .. ..... ... ........ ....... .. .. ... .....4-15
4.5 The XORB Board ... .. ... .... .. ...... ... .. .... .... .... .. .. ... .......... ..... ... ..... ........... .... .. ... .......... ..4-21
4.5.1 Operations .. .. .... ... .... .... .... .... .. ............ ... ... .... ... ..... .... ... ... ........ .... ... .. .. .. .... ...... ..4-21
4 .5.2 Solid State Transient Voltage Suppressors ... .... ... ....... .. ....... .. .... .... .. ... ..... ... ... .4-21
4 .6 The Single Board Controller (SBC) ........ .... ...... .. ... ......... ..... .... ... ..... .... .... ...... .... .. .. .4-23
4.6.1 Microprocessor and Memory (U1, U2, U4, U21, AND U22) ... .... .. ....... ... ........ ..4-23
4.6.2 Address Selection ... ...... ... ........ ........ .. ..... ........... .. ...... ........ ..... .. .. .... ... ... .. .... ....4-23
4.6.3 RS-232-C Interface (U7 & U8) ... ...... .. ..... ... ..... ......... .............. ..... ...... .. ...... ...... .4-24
4.6.4 System Reset (U8 , SW1) ... ... ..... ..... ........ ... ........ .... ..... ... ... .. .. ....... ... ..... ...... .....4-25
4.6.5 System Clocks (X1, X2, U15) ......... .......... .. ...... ... .... ........... ..... ... .. .... .... ... .... .. .,4-26
4.6.6 Event Counting (U13, U14, U17, U18, U19, U20, J1, J2) ... .... ... ..... ... ... ..... .. ... .4-27
4.6.7 Stepper Motor Control (U9 , U10, U31, U32) .. ... .... ........ .... .. ....... .... ... ...... .. ... .. ..4-27
4.6.8 Limit Switch Sensing (U27, U31) ..... ... .... ....... .. ... ... ..... ..... .... .... ...... ...... ...... .... ..4-27
4.6.9 I/O Ports (U23 , U41) .......... ..... ... .. ..... ... .. ..... .. .. ... ........... ....... ........ ..... .............. .4-28
4.6.10 Watch Dog Timer (U48) ....... ...... ....... ...... .... ... ... .. ........ .. ... ........ ...... .... ........ .....4-30
4 .6.11 D/A (Remote Detector Amplifier High Voltage) Control (U44, U45) ... ...... ... ... ..4-30
Technical Description Chapter 4

4.6.12 DIA (Remote X-ray High Voltage and Current) Control (U36, U37) ... .... ....... .. .4-30
4.6.13 AID (Remote X-ray High Voltage, Current and Amplifier High Voltage Feedback
Sense) (U35, U40, U42, AND U43) ........... ...... ........ .. ...... ... ................ ... .... ...... ........... .4-31
4.6.14 Thermocouple Sense (U38, U39) ........ ..... ..... ... ....................... ........ .............. ..4-31
4 .7 The OINK Board .......... .................... .......... .. ... .. .... ..... .............. .......... .... .... ....... ... ..4-33
4.7.1 Motion System ....... ..................... ...... ..... ..... .... ... ... ............. .. ....... .. ... .... .......... .4-33
4.7.2 Patient locator Light .. .. .... ............ ..... ........... ... .. ............. .. ....... ............ .. .... ..... .4-34
4.7.3 Collimator Control ........................ ..... ... .. .................. .. .... ... ....... ........... .. .. ... .... .4-34
4.7.4 Fans .............. ... ... ......................... ... .. ... ... ........ ... ........... .............. .... ................4-34
4.7.5 Indicators ...... ..... ..... .......... .............. ...................... ................... .. ..... ..... ........... 4-35
4.7.6 Emergency Stop ... .................. ................. ............ ... .................. ..... .. ...... .. .. ..... .4-35
4.7.7 OP/CAl ........ .......... .... ... ....... .. .................. .... ..... .. .... .............. ........ ~ ...... ........ .4-35
4.7.8 Error Detection .............. ... .. ... .. ..... ......... ....... .. ..... ... ........... ..... .. .~;;,"t~~~ ........... .4-36
4.8 Optical Motion Interrupt (OMI) Board .......... ....... .. ........... .. ...... ... .'~:;.,..'~l~.~....... ..... .4-39
"i::",'C;.,
Chapter 4 Technical Description

4.1 The AMP Board
Circuit Functions
•. ..Amplify charge pulses from the PMT
• Shape the signal into a stable bipolar pulse
• Drive the pulse down a 50 Q coaxial cable to the AGS board
The input to the AMP-04 circuit is a PMT/i'Jal charge pulse and output of the circuit is a
700 nsec bipolar pulse (3 Vpp) into 50 n.
i ">
~t$i~~~~~_
4.1.1 Circuit Description . 'i~, 5~}:t "
':r.1!.:. ·k;·~, "" -'t.:!"
The AMP-04 amplifies charge pulses from the detector system opera~~~OO to +800 Volts ,
.-6.1...:.. -::J."e -
shapes the signal into a stable bipolar pulse, and drives the pulse_~wp'a 5.1 meter 50 Q
coaxial cable. Maintaining constant pulse shape at high coun ' ~s is a prime goal.
,,1'$- ¢~ \. "<,f••••
Pulses of charge from the PMT are passed through a 2 ~' · . · -'. voltage blocking capacitor
located in the PMT high voltage power supply. Th.~~fi3ulses go through the virtual ground of
the current to voltage ~on~erter formed from~.1 ,~'ti;scharges C5 ~hen the amplifier is in the
power-off state. The nse time of the pulse ~ s~-uythe 6 MHz bandwidth of the current to
voltage converter, and the fall time ~30 nsec decay of the Nal crystal. The
amplitude of the pulse is determ the 3K D value of R3 and the voltage of the PMT
(approximately 700 Volts for ignal with 100 KeV photons). The components of the
current to voltage conve , C12) were chosen to maximize the output signal while
retaining stability . These values provide a flat 6 MHz bandwidth for input
capacitances of u
The pulse rk composed of R6, R7 and C13 shortens the pulse. C13 and R7 set
the decay to 100 nsec. The addition of R6 to this circuit cancels the 230 nsec
decay of the crystal. The Signal is then amplified by U2 , an amplifier with a voltage gain of
16 and a bandwidth of 6 MHz.
C14 shapes the unipolar pulse into a bipolar pulse. This AC coupling also removes the effect of
after glow in the Nal crystal and DC drift problems in U4. The bipolar signal is amplified with a
voltage gain of 4.3 in U3, and passed to U4, a 50 Q line driver. Two voltage amplification
stages were used to provide low DC drift with good high counting rate performance. Capacitor
clamping prevents fluctuations in the power supply level when the output Signal is clipped .
AMP Board 4-1

~
.~ ~~:\.-
'<~ &.4y.~
5tl ~, .=
Figure 1 shows the unipolar output of the first stage of amplification CI~~'-Frgure 2 shows the
output after the second stage of amplification (TP5). The last fig~~iie output of the line
driver and the output of the board (TP6) . ., , ~ .\;;:::"
4:..... ~.
.vl\\,\ J"
".:\-=?
4-2 AMP Board

Test Points
Test Point
TP2
Second Amplifier Output
Third Amplifier Output
Output
+12 VDC
TP8 -12 VDC
TP9 Ground
Table 4 .11
AMP Board 4-3

'~~~.
,,:~.~
BLANK INTENTIONALLY
4-4 AMP Board

4.2 The Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS)
Circuit Functions
• Amplifies high channel pulses
• Attenuates low channel pulses
Operations
The analog section of the AGS-05 consists of an input divider, an input unity-gain buffer, a
variable gain stage through the use of an N-Channel JFET, an amplification stage followed by
an AC coupling network, and an output unity gain current driver. The digital section consists of
an "AMPLIFY" and "ATIENUATE" pulse qualifier, an "AMPLIFY/ATIENUATE#,..~~e indication
circuit, two 4-bit binary UP/DOWN counters, a "ROLLOVER/RELOAD" circbil ;<>:~ a D/A
converter to control the gate voltage to the JFET for gain control. _ ~:~i;·~>(?
+J!..~i'.~o
4.2.1 Signal Input ,t", 4~~~\ ":~

~
~"'~'=
~:~\:~
",:,,'
A signal entering the AGS (TP4) sees 50 0 of input im '. :j~nd is divided by 4.24 before it
passes through a unity-gain high-output current buffe _.~0002CN). The signal then passes
through two JFETs connected in series with their .~ ' . orted to their sources (Vgs=O). This
way they have a constant drain to source r~ ,3~, ~nd are the equivalent of series resistors.
The series JFET's (01 and 02) are uSE?d t~s"ie a thermally stable voltage divider with 03 .
.... ~:;~,.~
Gain control in the through the use of N-channel JFETs (01,02,03, -

2N4391). The two J are in series with a third JFET which has its gate voltage
modulated to rce resistance. These three JFETs form a voltage divider with
the output take r JFET which has its gate voltage varied to provide a variable
output. signal seen at 03's drain is a direct relationship to the variation of its
gate voltag use the thermal characteristics of the JFET's are similar, thermal stability is
enhanced by g three JFET's to form the voltage divider. Therefore, the effects of
temperature are canceled out and no ratio changes will result.
When an "AMPLIFY" pulse comes in from the AGSbCA it is qualified by U2 (74LSOO) and the
counter pair (U3 & U4 - 74LS193) is incremented 'or "CLOCKED" up . When an "ATIENUATE"
pulse comes in it is qualified and the counter pair is decremented or "CLOCKED" down. The
counter outputs 00-07 are connected to a D/A converter (U7 - AD558KN), the counter range is
from OOH to FFH with SOH being the center of the range. Two potentiometers (R20 & R1S) and
an op amp circuit (US - LF351 N) scales the DAC's output voltage and inverts it to drive the JFET
gate of 03. If "ATIENUATE" pulses continue to clock the counters, they will clock down to OOH.
There the JFET gate voltage will be maximum (-4 to -6 VDC) and the AGS will be at a minimum
gain of O.SO as set by R20. Unity gain of the AGS should be adjusted at a counter state of SOH
(center range) by R1S. If "AMPLIFY" pulses continue to clock the counters, they will clock up to
FFH where the JFET gate voltage will be minimum (OVDC) and the AGS will be at a maximum
gain of about 1.50; this is not adjustable and will vary slightly because of differences in forward
transfer characteristics between .JFETs.
AGS Board 4-5

,"
4.2.3 Rollover x..
When the input signal to the AGS increases or decreases until it is out of range the AGS
counters rollover, and the CARRY or BORROW outputs of the MSD counter are gated back into
the LOAD inputs of the counters . If the counter rolls over at either end of the count interval (OOH
or FFH), the counters will re-Ioad 80H and the AGS will be reset to unity gain.
4.2.4 Operate/Calibrate (OP/CAl)

Also gated into the LOAD input is the Operate/Calibrate (OP/CAL) signal (TP11). For detector
peaking, the bipolar signal rrn;~t be allowed to vary in order to find the optimum high voltage
setting for PMT bias. To perfonn this the OP/CAL signal is pulled LO for CAL and the AGS
counter is forced to output BOH which holds the AGS at unity gain. The AGS wil~~main at unity
gain as long as OP/CAL is held LOW. During normal stabilizer operation this ,W-iS HIGH for
OP mode and the AGS will perform gain control. :1:";;';';~~c{~;.!,~.
~~.4:~~Jt~r~·~~···
4.2.5 Amplification Stage ~_
. ~,:.'~. ~·
M.-f'i.Y .. ",
An op amp (U9 - EL2006) configured as a non-inverting aQ1P~~'plifies the signal by a factor
of 10 before it is AC coupled by an RC network. This R.;~:~~tk makes the low frequency
cutoff about 700 Hz, which blocks all DC offsets fron:l,~~ftlg the AGS output amplifier and no
DC offset adjustments are necessary. There is ~~~allocation for a DC offset adjustment
potentiometer (R31 - 10 kO) if the AC coup~ ~i'tor (C24 - 0.47uF) is opted to be shunted .
This amplification stage is needed to comp@msa,ie=for reductions in the system so that the
overall gain of the AGS at center - (in ~ mode where counter is at 80H) is unity. The
following is an equation of the gains at unity:
INPUT VOLTAGE - OUTPUT DIVISION

DIVIDER DUE TO DCA LOAD
10 x 0.75 = 1.00
4.2.6
The gain-adjusted signal is output driven by a unity gain current driver (U10-LH0002CN)
through a 10 n resister for short circuit protection. The current amplifier power pins are heavily
decoupled to ground to maintain clean power supply rails during peak driving conditions.
4.2.7 Amplify/Attenuate Indication

There are two LED indicators on the AGS that are driven by the same signals that increment
and decrement the counters. They visually indicate the gain adjustment occurring within the
AGS. Each time an "AMPLIFY" or "ATTENUATE" pulse comes in to the AGS, the
corresponding LED should flash. In the OPERATE mode the lamps should blink at a relatively
equal rate. If they are not qlillking evenly it means tha,t. the AGS has not found a quiescent
adjustment point or that there is a break in the system feedback.
4-6 AGS Board

4.2.8 Performance and Operation

The best operation of the AGS is dependent on many different system operating parameters.
The characteristics of the tube head, high voltage power supplies, detector and amplifier all
have an effect on the operation of the AGS. When the x-ray beam is "hardened" or attenuated
and the count rate is reduced, the AGS adjustment is not critical. However, at the high count
rates of an unattenuated beam the system may require fine tuning for best perfonnance.
4.2.9 AGS Adjustment

The need for an adjustment of the AGS is usually discovered during the acquisition of a fast
femur scan. White lines may appear in the image near the trochanter, or an area. of white may
appear ?utside the bone , or the trocha~ter area may be too small when analyz;~~f the nor:mal
bag of nce. (12 c~) placed along the thigh does not solve the problem, thel!-,t~~S operation
should be Investigated. ~,\_ f;,~. ;.';':/
~~~'~l:~"", ~!'.
Another symptom which indicates poor operation of the AGS i~ t~~~~nce of white pixels
around the outside of the body in a total body scan. The effe"" . ," ,,<,. 'ilar to a "halo" and so the
problem is referred to as a total body "halo" problem. If"", . ' .. " ~'m is benign, it will only be
seen during acquisition, but if the problem worsens !~J;ri~",~een in analysis as well.
'il";;,~"
NOTE: Unstable AGS operation du .- t~~i5d; scans manifests itself as miSSing bone
pixels near the extremitzes .~' Weleton.
T----------------------------------
-..-- 3S problems are usually ca ing detector. The first step in diagnosing this failure
should be to analyze the ce History to see if the detector is failing, and replace it
if necessary.
misadjusted DCA's (see section 4.3), start with the recommended
, DCA TEST POINT MEASUREMENTS IN VOLTS

. - -,'
I DPXDCA
I AGSDCA
I
•• • 0
jJf>'
TP4 1.200 2 .020
TP5 1.970 2.450
TP6 1,675 2.335
TP7 2.800 2.800

Table 4.2 .1
These voltages are the settings which are currently used in the Lunar factory.
Use the static counter from the diagnostics software to set the operating voltage to 76 kV and
the current to 1500A. This test may be perfonned with or without the table top in the x-ray
beam, but nothing else should be in the path of radiation. Open the shutter and observe the
~----AGS Board 4-7

LUNAR® OPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
counts. If the AGS is operating correctly, the low channel counts should be greater than the
high channel counts and both counts should be stable (approximately ±3000 counts from the
mean value). If the low channel counts are not stable or are lower than the high channel
counts, begin to adjust the AGSDCA (the DCA board in the rear of the scanner) .
If an oscilloscope is available, adjust DCA-T4 until AGS-TP12 does not rollover. An example of
a stable AGS signal as seen at TP12 is shown in figure 1.
~;~;
,~~~i;;.f~'/~~·
~~;
Use the aluminum wedge to perform the AGS Test (see section 6.2) and check the scanner's
ability to give reasonable counts.
4-8 AGS Board

4.2.10 Test Points and LED's

There are two LED's _Q.QJbMG.S board . The amber LED signifies an Amplify signal from the
AGS DCA -board . The green LED s.ignifies.anJ\lten..L(ate signal from the AGS DCA board.
These two LED's should flash quickly enough during a·scan as to appear to be on constantly. If
they are not, no counts are reaching the AGS board through the AGS DCA.
Test Point Signal
TP1 +12 VDC
TP2 GND
TP3
.'t"l.;;,
-12 VDC .~.':".
TP4
TP7
TP8
TP11
TP12
+5VDC
GND
Output
GND
AGS Board 4-9

4-10 AGS Board

4.3 The Dual Channel Analyzer (DCA)
Circuit Functions
• Discriminate energy levels
• Send TIL pulses to SBC board (DPX~)
• Send Amplify/Attenuate signal to the AGS board (AGSDCA)
4.3.1 Function Description

The input signal is first conditioned by the input diode clamp circuit. This limits t~, input signal
to a range of -0.7 VDC and +4.0 VDC thereby protecting the comparators f~o~Cessive input
differential voltage. The signal passes to the two pairs of comparators. ~~~r l~v.el
DjscdmlnatQc.(j,LOJ, triggers as the input rises past the threshold of ei~~.r,~ VDC (~_keV) or
2.00 VDC (for 70 keV). This produces no pulse at that channel's 9~~00 ns or OUT). If the
signal reaches and exceeds tl}§ Upper Level _ Qi~CILmiQ~~.0LJW:?-(~Y§nal level is set for
inhibiting output (OUT INH). If the signal does not rea . ~~en no inhibit level will be
set ': ~~) ~
. ~ \-"'' ,
When the input signal falls below the lower thr~~Lb), a 300 ns TIL level pulse is
generated and is gated with the output inhittfl~UT INH) which either enables or inhibits the
output pulse. Once the pulse is ~ output, it will not be prematurely inhibited by
any stray ULD level. The . is then sent to the SBC event counter via J3.
\
< \
'-. ' \
Input Circuit
The input i rement of the circuit is 90 D. This is achieved by R 1, a shunt to
signal input is current limited by R2 and clamped to a range from +4 VDC to -
0.7 VDC by R3 and R4, diodes CR 1 and CR2 and capacitor CO. (The differential input
voltage for the LM306 is ±7 VDC max.) The signal is then fed to the inverting input of each
comparator.
Precision Voltage Reference

In order to accurately discriminate between energy levels, a stable reference is required . The
reference is set to 5V by using an LT1 029ACZ (U 1).
Comparators
Each ULD comparator in the circuit has a 220 n resistor in series with the non-inverting input
and a 1Mn resistor (e.g . R26 and R36 for U2) in the feedback loop to provide the necessary
hysterisis. A 150 kD resistor and a 1N5817 diode provide the hysterisis for the LLD
comparators. A 0.11lF ceramic filter capacitor is attached from each reference divider to analog
ground to improve noise immunity when using potentiometers.
DCA Board 4-11

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/9B)
Lower Level Discriminator (LLD)

Each lower level discriminator drives a Schottkey NAND gate (both in t: .~ ts), thus inverting the
signal. The signal is then NANDed with the Retrigger Inhibit signal to avoid retriggering and
possibly extending the output pulse width . This pulse charges C14 or C15. The charge and
discharge time determines the pulse width of the DCA output. This pulse is available at the
output driver (U10) and is passed through if the ULD has not been reached.
Upper Level Discriminator (ULD)

If the ULD references are exceeded, the preset of a D-type flip-flop (UB) is asserted . The output
of the flip-flop is NANDed with the current inverted output so as not to prematurely terminate the
output once it has started. The positive going transition of the Retrigger Inhibit pulse, which
occurs at the end of the DCA event pulse, will clock the flip-flop. The flip-flop ou ut is set LOW
by this rising clock edge, and OUT INH will be inactive allowing subsequent ou
of- :
O utput Dn'ver #;P.
~~
. ~:'7.: -
The output driver selected was the DS75121 or NBT13 dual line driv~t1\,t"'~essentiaIlY a low
impedance line driver with a logic AND input. . .~,~!t-.,,_. -
,~ ~~,~:-~';.;/!:'
4.3.3 Technical Facts ~,~i:f$ :fJ5'
Power Supply: +12V@ 0.175A, -12V@ 0 .25A, ;;,.§;,'{~.200A
Input Impedance: 95 Q .'!§"!': ~~. 3', '
~. .;,:.."';~
Output Current: approximately 5 mA ~< :%- ~

Output pulse width 300 ns (±50 ',::;.'9
4.3.4
DPX DCA AGS DCA
1.200 2.020
TP5 1.970 2.450
TP6 1.675 2.335
TP7 2.BOO 2.BOO
These voltages are the settings which are currently used in the Lunar factory.
4-12 DCA Board

4.3.5 Test Points
Test Point DPX DCA AGS DCA
TP1 Ground Ground
TP3 Input Input
TP4 Channel 1 Lower Limit Channel 1 Lower Limit
TP5 Channel 2 Lower Limit Channel 2 Lower Limit

',;;;;.
TP6 Channel 1 Upper Limit Chan~el J41Pft~r Limit
TP7 Channel 2 Upper Limit
TP8 LLD Channel 1
TP9 LLD Channel 2
TP11 ULD Channel 1
TP12 ULD Channel 2
TP15 Digital Ground
TP16 Amplify
Attenuate
.1$'
DCA Board 4-13

LUNAR® OPX-fQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
".
EFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
4-14 "DCA Boar

LUNAR®
The MAX Board
Circuit Functions
.. Control tube current
.. current to
Operations
The MAX and the filament transformer in the Tube Head form a power supply that
current in the X-ray Insert by controlling the filament As the filament
temperature there are more electrons available to be accelerated to t~ anode.
The sends a control to the MAX board at J6 (which can be me 1).

voltage of this is proportional to the current through the A one volt
signal from the should yield a 1.0mA insert current. The Posi tage Power
Supply will put a 1.0VDC signal on the MA MaN ITOR output . uted to XORB and
finally MAX J2 rrp8). This is by U28 o the SBC at rrp9) as a
feedback monitor.
The board is divided into seven
1. Filament Transformer: transformer is in the Tube Head enclosure

and not actually on the "the transformer's output that the MAX controls.
The center-tapped is wound on a small ferrite core. Each end of the

primary is d two power FEr's (01 or The voltage at the
transform 13) is what determines the power output to the insert
filame
winding is made of high voltage cable wound on top of the primary

drives the filament, supplying up to about
MAX Board
2. Power FET's and Snubbing Network: The IRF 530 power FET's, 01 and 02, are
power switches driven by U4. They pull the filament transformer leads to ground, thus
driving the transformer. The snubbing network is connected across the drains of the two
power FET's. This network consists of R1 , C7, and the two MOV's , VR1 and VR2 . This
network is intended to absorb the transient spikes created by the rapid switching of
current in the primary of the filament transformer.
'>1-'••
. ~~.
dc·.
3. FET Driver: The FET driver consis~f (4:{~"rt SG3525 switch mode power supply
controller. However, on the MAX b$.'arcgiti S used as an oscillator providing two 180
degree phase shifted dri~~1 and 02. It has open collector totem-pole
outputs connected to a 1 urce that is separate from the rest of the board to keep
switching noise out . R15 and C16 set the operating frequency of
the MAX at 16-1 R3 set the symmetry (i.e. on versus off times) of the
set both outputs at about 49% on time, 51% off time, slightly
R16 sets the dead time between one output switching off and
This ." ime prevents 01 and 02 from tuming on simultaneously, shorting the positive
center ap of the filament transformer to ground. R10 and C3 provide some power
supply decoupling. R18 and R19 slow the charging/discharging time of the gate
capacitance of 01 and 02. This causes them to tum on and off more slowly and helps
reduce some of the switching noise a faster riselfall time would produce . The wave
forms at the gates of 01 and 02 are seen at TP1 and TP2.
4. Feedback Buffer AMP: The mA input buffer amp (U2B) receives its input from J2, the
mA feedback input connector when. This signal comes from the mA MONITOR output
of the Positive High Voltage Power Supply. It is in the form of an 0 to 5 VDC signal ,
corresponding to a 0 to 5 rnA current output. Op amp U2B buffers this signal. The
output goes to J5, the .mA feedback output conn~ctor, is inverted by U3A and then goes
to the input of the error amp. The output at this connector goes to the SBC to allow it to
monitor the tube current. C8 filters AC components in the mA FEEDBACK input signal.
~.
4-16 MAX Board

The mA input buffer amp receives its input from J2, the mA feedback input connector.
This signal comes from the mA MONITOR output of the Negative High Voltage Power
Supply. It is in the form of an 0 to 1 VDC signal, corresponding to a 0 to 1 mA current
output. U3A is used to buffer this signal. The output of the amp goes to the input of the
error amp and to J5, the mA feedback output connector. The output at this connector
goes to the SBC to allow it tq mOl1itor the tube current.
Error AMP: The other half of U3 (U3B), 03 and 04, comprise the error amp. In normal
operation Uumper JB2 in the normal position) a summing junction is applied to the
inverting input of the error amp. This voltage comes from the SBC via J6, the mA control
input. The mA CONTROL input voltage can be measured at TP11. The signal from the
output of U3A is applied to the summing junction of the error amp. The dWerence
between these two signals is amplified by U3B. The gain of this stage ...~at about 24
by R29 and R31 . The error signal and is fed to the base of 03 ~i~~'<;·the base of
emitter follower 04. It is 04 that controls the voltage on the cent~ap. the Filament
Transformer and therefore the insert current. ~~l.,::l(f/>
m
"''., t,-';lf '~, '<:J
o
J.A'~'7.,(
~. ~; . .J."~ -
<'2-. ~~,
~<-~~- ¥- ,~"
El
~"~;";'· -t;t~
r- ~1;i:~~
~~. ~

"{~*?:
MAX Board 4-17

As an example of loop operation , assume the insert current starts to drop from its 0.750
mA set point. The voltage at the input of U28 would start to drop. This would cause its
output to drop also. The error amp (U38) compares the mA feedback voltage with the
mA control voltage and generates an error signal. This signal would be the difference
between the two voltages amplified by the gain of the error amp. This voltage is fed to
the base of 03, causing it to start to tum off. As this happens, the base of 04 increases
causing it to tum on further and increase the voltage on the center tap of the filament
transformer. This in tum increases the filament current and therefore the insert current
until it returns to its set point.
As for the rest of the components ; R11 , C6, R13, R27, R28, C10, C17 and C26
decouple U3 and U2 from noise on the +12 volt power supply; R6 provid~ base current
to 04, turning it on unless 03 holds it off; R7 limits current through 03; .c~~d C14
filters ripple and noise on the Filament Transformer center tap. ..~~~~" ,,-,
. ~. :~r'~~
6. Logic and Driver Power Supplies: There are two +12V po~~l$"plies which consist
of two LM7812 volt~ge regulators . On~ power ~upplyg~,f~fbrthe logic circuitry,
and the other supplies power (TP6) stnctly to dnv~~~ FETs. They have
separate chassis and signal grounds in an effo~~switching noise out of the
control circuitry, and share a common groun~y~'fthe 28 volt input connector, J1
(TP10). ~ .",
p .:~ .
7. kV Lockout: This circuit preve[1ts ~~nt drive until the kV is high enough to assure a
stable start of control loop .' ' . ' .,,~~
,r""lm::>TPI\I 0 VDC and U2P3 is approximately 2.0VDC .
rail. This tums Q5 on through R35. When the +28VDC

, a brief spike at TP13 will be seen as the slow start circuit
stabilizes. The filament drive (TP13) will be held low until the
the comparator trip pOint of approximately 2.0VDC (40 kV applied to
the
As the trip point is reached, U2 changes state and the slow start circuit allows 05 to tum
off slowly (10-20 ms). As 05 tums off, control of the loop is transferred to U3B and 03.
During normal operation of the control loop, 05 is turned off and thus is out of the circuit.
Final Notes
1. There is a MAX board "test mode" which bypasses SBC control and external current
sensing. Then the insert current is controlled by adjustment of R4. To configure the
MAX board for the "test mode", set jumpers JB1, J82, and JB3 to short pins 1, 2, and 3.
2. There are two light-emitting-diode indicators on the board. If the red LED is lit and the
greell LED is out, the'filament power fuse (F1) is blown. If both the red and green
indicators are out, there is no +28 VDC power to the board.
4-18 MAX Board

Test Points
~
Test Point Signal
TP1 Output A from U4
TP2 Output B from U4
TP3 Ground
TP4 Output of Q1 (Filament Drive signal)
TP5
TP6 +12 VDC
TP8
TP9
TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13 Filament Drive signal
TP14 -12 VDC
Set Point
Emitter Follower Drive
Clamp Out
TP19 kV Sample
TP20 +12 VDC
MAX Board 4-19

4-20 MAX Board

4.5 The XORB Board
Circuit Functions
Provide protection to the system electronics from transients
4.5.1 Operations
The XORB board is designed to prevent high voltage transients, generated in the x-ray system ,
from entering the rest of the DPX-IQ system electronics. The transient energy is decoupled to
the local chassis ground by three types of solid-state devices, described below. Since the high
voltage power supplies are tightly coupled and in close proximity to the XORB bg&rd, the energy
does not find its way into the rest of the system. <4:;
~. ~~~~~~~>
The XORB board also functions as an terminal for the signals that contr~~1¥ra'nitor the High
Voltage Power Supplies. Test points for all of the important high vOI~,,~trol signals are
located on the XORB board . ~ :!,"'7t,,\,~ j
~~. ~~ff'
Normally, the XORB board has no effect on any of the ~~at pass through it. All of the
signals (including signal grounds) that pass through the~af<:j are connected to chassis ground
through one or more transient suppressors. _. ~r'\i}, ...
~. r~ .~.
If a high voltage transient appears on one lTlQrE: of the signal lines, and it exceeds the
threshold of the transient suppress, it ~e shunted to the chassis ground. Since the
source of the energy for the tran High Voltage Power Supplies) is tightly tied to the
chassis, the transient ene . retumed to these supplies. This shunted energy
never reaches the where it could cause damage.
XORB board are as follows:

•
•
• Head Thermostat and Filament Transformer drive.
• All control signals to or from the High Voltage Power Supplies.
4.5.2 Solid State Transient Voltage Suppressors

Solid State Transient Voltage Suppressors are essentiaJly just high power avalanche diodes.
They have a large die size, thus they can handle a large amount of power for a short time. They
have a specific voltage above which they begin to conduct, below which they appear as an open
circuit. There are two types on this board, 7.5 volt and 28 volt, depending on the circuit they are
protecting. The Solid State Transient Voltage Suppressors are used on almost all of the signal
lines that are not ground . The exception are the Filament Transformer drive signals which are
protected by Metal Oxide Varistors (MOV's).
MOV's are bipolar suppressors which will clamp at the same voltage above and below ground .
XORB Board 4-21

The 1N4004's are used in reverse - parallel combinations to clamp signal grounds to ± 0.7 volts
of chassis ground. They were chosen for their current handling ability.
Test Points
Test Point Signal
TP1 - OA Monitor
TP2 -kV Monitor
TP3 -kV Programming
TP4 -V Reference
.'\
TP5 + OA Monitor . ~~
.;);) ' :.-~
TP6 + kV M 0)~Olk.j
~'~ ,.
TP7 ~~1:f:'ii~~
+kV
TP8 ~~'ference
...Q~,
.~ .
~ >i'T
~:. c.: ;.'
.;;.t:;;;':: . I~,it:
Use the anode side of one of the solid stat~s\1srent
: "':~"W'~.
voltage suppressors for ground .
4-22 XORB Board

LUNAR!!> DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
4.6 The Single Board Controller (SBC)
Circuit Functions
• Count pulses from the DPXDCA
• Tube head high voltage and current control
• .. RS-232-C communications with host computer
• Motion control
• Limit switch and thermocouple sensing
~~.
· ~;.;;;~. ~:k
O perat Ions ,,,1> ~?;,~iS;.. " ,'
The LRC Single Board Controller VER-03 (SBC-03) consists of a single ~tib6ard that uses
the Intel 8032 microprocessor with a RS-232-C interface and up to 59!<-~~"i;'ory (8k EPROM,
8k EEPROM, 8k NVRAM, and 32k RAM) . The EEPROM is utiliz~~1ibw easy program
modification and the I\JVRAM is used to retain data during .po~t~.
~~+~. ··Y;ji .
....,."'''';;;,.~
~~, ~~" .
4.6.1 Microprocessor and Memory (U1, U2, ~ll2t, AND U22)

The memory decoding configuration is set to~ec#~~~ 8 blocks . The lower 56k is read/write
memory while the last 8k is used to decod~~heral components (8254's , 8255's, etc.).
The maximum allowable access ." 25~for any memory selected .
U21 is designated as the . ince the 8032 vectors to OOOOH upon reset. This must
be nonvolatile. U22 co re that operates the SBC. U1 and U2 may be used to
store data or expand
n
U6 (74LS1 ured as the memory and 110 address decoder. Outputs YO-Y6 are used
to access mory while output Y7 is used to select yet another series of decoders U11 and
U34(74LS138's) . U11 and U34 are arranged to operate as a 4-to-16 address decoder which
are used to access 110. The following are pertinent addresses:
SBC Board 4-23

ADDRESS CHIP SELECT SELECTED DEVICE
OOOOH - 1FFFH U6P15 U21 (EPROM)
2000H - 3FFFH U6P14 U22 (EEPROM)
U6P13 U1 (NVRAM)
4000H - 5FFFH
6000H - DFFFH U33P6 U2 (RAM)
110 DEVICES
EOXOH - EOX3H U11P15
E2XOH - E2X3H U11P14
E4XOH - E4X3H U11 P13
E6XOH - E6X3H U11P12
E8XOH - E8X3H U11 P11
EAXXH U11P10
FOXXH
F2XOH - F2X3H U35 (574 12-BIT AID)
U41 (8255 PORT D,E,F)
U38 (670 THERMO AID)
U36 (667 KV D/A)
U34P10 U37 (667 MA D/A)
"X" Represents a "Don't Care" condition; any hexadecimal character will yield a valid address to
select these devices.
4.6.3 RS-232-C Interface (U7 & US)

A MAX251 and MAX250 chip set provides the interface between the 25-pin D-connector and U4
(8032). The interface consists of a MAXIM MAX251 and MAX250 chip set, four (4) 6N136
optocouplers used for optical isolation, and a Schott Corp. isolation transformer (67129080)
providing power to the isolation source. This design supports a data transmission rate of up to
57.6 kBps (kSaud). It also provides a minimum of 1500 volts isolation for one minute between
the port and the SELV Circuitry.
4-24 sse Board

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98 )
Table 4.1.7 summarizes the signals routed between the acquisition computer and the serial
interface
Input Pin# Output Pin # Signal
U7P10 U8P9 DTR (Microprocessor Reset)

Data Terminal Ready
U7P9 U8P12 RXD (Receive Data)
U8P4 U7P12 TXD (Transmit Data)
U8P5 (RTS) U7P11 (CTS) RTS (Request to Send)

CTS (Clear to Send) ~;.
~t.~
~ .
Table 4.1.7 - Senal Interface Signals Ji,:t.:.t;J:1::>:"
SSC Communications .. '~" ''IS';
The Acquisition Computer and the EXPO-SBC board communicate..~~llindard RS-232 serial
communications link. Instructions toifrom the computer are se'Rt ~ffis link through the
optically isolated serial 1/0 interface, and fromlinto the 8~3£.. ~Pf6cessor chip located on the
EXP-Oaughter board . ~ '¥~ "<-'--
·~rj~ ~ .
The serial communications signals are summari~',.t!b~~

~ ;::,..
4.1.7. The baud rate and protocol
"I •• ~ .
are set using special registers within the 8~ ~~serial port is set as COM2 and the interface
serial communications parameters used ar~ollows :
9600 - 57.6 kBaud
8
1
Even
4.6.4 System Reset (U8, SW1)

The LRC SBC-03 may be reset by pressing the momentary switch (SW1) . This pulls U4P9 high
and "reboots" the 8032 causing it to vector to address OOOOH .
SBC Board 4-25

4.6.5 System Clocks (X1, X2, U15)

A 11.0592 MHz quartz crystal (X1) in a dual-in-line package (DIP) generates TIL level pulses at
X'I P8. This provides the driving input to the 8032.
&~:~~1J:
A 2.0 MHz quarts crystal (X2) in a DIP generates TIL I~~ ~~
7:.').•.
~ie~~'
at
.
"\.:">.'
X2P8. This provides the

clock signals to U9 and U10 (8254's) that generate th~~~pulses. This clock is further
divided down by U15 (74.LS163) to provide a 125~~~~~C'k signal to U13 which is used to
create the sample count Interval. ~~. ~:1f':;'
~ .,=:{,.~-'".
.~ I;
w.;'.~"
4-26 SBC Board

4.6.6 Event Counting (U13, U14, U17, U18, U19, U20, J1, J2)
Two Intel 8254's (16-bit timer/counters) U13 and U14 are used to generate the count interval
and count the individual events from the LRC DCA-03 boards. U 13 is used to generate the
count interval and to count events from the PMT through J2. High speed opto-couplers (HCPL-
2200's) U17-U20 are utilized for isolation and noise reduction.
Counter 0 of U13 is operated in mode 3 to generate the count interval by interrupting the 8032
(INT1) causing it to vector to the data acquisition routine. The clock line of Counter 1 (mode 2)
U13 is used to count events from Channel 1 (J2P3) . Likewise Counter 2 (mode 2) U13 is used
to count events from Channel 2 (J2P1). Counters 1 and 2 on U14 could be used in the same
configuration as counter 1 and 2 on U 13 to count the other events. The 8254 can count up to 8
MHz, which is well above the limit dictated by the DCA output pulse width of 0~,(3.3 MHz) .
0/ t:~:-'~~1~_ ",f'-
">:~." ':;'':: fi:..::~ •.",.
4.6.7 Stepper Motor Control (U9, U10, U31, U32) .z,JJ.%~~? "-
Independent open-loop control of two stepper motors is accompli~~irprogramming the
8254's (U9 for the transverse motor and U10 for the 10ngitudiQ~. ~9J6r) to generate square
wave pulses (in an a stable multi-vibrator configuration);i~Mo~lection and direction is
controlled by Port A of U23 (8255). B4 of Port B of U?z~~d to determine whether U9 is
generating motor pulses and B5 of Port B of U23 i~ ~~_fO determine if U1 0 is generating motor
.~~~ ~~;
pu Ises. ~, ~
'0>
, . ff,~:~~'
The three counters of each 8254 ( l.f1t):f operate in the following manner. Counter 0
outputs the motor pulse while C unter 2 is connected to OUT 0 and counts the pulses
(their gates are common). aded with 10, and when it reaches 0, OUT 2 goes
low enabling Counter 1 Counter 1 (gate enabled by an output on U23) reaches
the preloaded num 1 goes low and disables both Counter 0 and Counter 2.
Hence Counter er (x10). If Counter 1 is loaded with 300 steps, the 3000
microsteps output from Counter O.
When U15P ~. ~w, closure of limit switch 3 or 4 will stop the transverse motor (U12P6) as well
as close the s'5femoid. When U15P38 is low closure of limit switch 1 or 2 will stop the
longitudinal motor (U12P3) as well as close the solenoid. When U15P1/U15P38 is high, the
state of the limit switch circuitry (U27 and U31) is "overridden" and the motors will continue to
step. This is necessary to move the carriage off any limit switch such as when the scanner is
"homed".
4.6.8 Limit Switch Sensing (U27, U31)

Four limit switches are sensed via two IC's (U27 and U31) yielding a Schmitt triggered AND
configuration which will close the solenoid (source shutter) via U33P8 and stop the motors (if
U15P1/U15P38 is low) when a limit switch is closed, causing a "Shutter Failure". A 4.7 k.Q - 2.2
I-lF debouncing network is connected to each limit switch via J4 and J5.
"'--'" SBC Board 4-27

4.6.9 110 Ports (U23, U41)

As discussed in previous sections, the 8255's are used for all 1/0 output. Port A controls the
motor selection, solenoid, and collimator. Port B is a input port and senses limit switches, motor
e
status (running or stopped), shutter closure, and collimator position . Port is configured to be
half in and half out. The lower four bits are used to sense the position switches while the upper
four bits are used as outputs to tum on power to the motors, place the AGS in OP/CAl mode,
override the motion detection circuitry on the 0INK-02, and tum on the relay for the x-ray power
supplies. Port D is used to control an analog multiplexer on the SBe which will be discussed
later, also controls the patient locator light, and doubles as a control for the x-ray relay and the
motion detection selector for safety reasons (if one 8255 malfunctions the other 8255 will still be
able to deactivate these lines). Port E is used to read the scanner failure latch tqJind out what
caused the scanner to fail. Port F is presently unused. ~:\1"
?:~ {3~~~.." tf~·
f'~. ~}'- ..
U23 I/O BIT ASSIGNMENTS '{i ~ -
HEX DATA PIN SIGNAL

ADDRESS BIT
E8XOH PAO 4 TRAN RUN/HOLD
PA1 3 TRAN REV/FWD D, 1=REVERSE
PA2 2
PA3 0=00 NOT, 1=OVERRIDE LSW
PA4 O=HALT, 1=RUN
PA5 O=FORWARD, 1=REVERSE
0=00 NOT, 1=OVERRIDE LSW
O=SMALL, 1=LARGE COLL
E8X1H PBO 18 LMT SWITCH 4 O=CLOSED, 1=OPEN
PB1 19 LMT SWITCH 3 O=CLOSED, 1=OPEN
PB2 20 LMT SWITCH 2 O=CLOSED, 1=OPEN
PB3 21 LMT SWITCH 1 0=CLOSED,1=OPEN
PB4 22 TRANS MOTOR SENSE O=STOPPED, 1=RUNNING
PB5 23 LONG MOTOR SENSE O=STOPPED, 1=RUNNING
PB6 24 SHUTTER SENSE O=OPEN, 1=CLOSED
PB7 25 COLLIMATOR SENSE O=SMALL, 1 =LARGE
E8X2H PCO 14 LR POS SW I O= LONGREV
4-28 SBe Board

LUNAR~ OPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
PC1 15 LF POS SW O-LONGFOR
PC2 16 TR POS SW O=TRANREV
PC3 17 TF POS SW O=TRANFOR
PC4 13 X-RAY RELAY 0=ON,1=OFF
PC5 12 MOTION DET OVERRIDE O=OVERRIDE, 1=NORMAL
PC6 11 AGS CONTROL 0=CALIBRATE,1=OPERATE
PC7 10 MOTOR PWR RELAY O=ON, 1=OFF (+24V)
E8X3H CONTROL WORD = 83H PA OUT, PB IN, PCL IN, and ~CH.~~4'"
U41 1/0 BIT ASSIGNMENTS
HEX DATA PIN SIGNAL

ADDRESS BIT
F4XOH POD 4
PD1 3
PD2 2 N/C UNUSED

PD3 UNUSED
PD4 0=ON, 1=OFF
0=OVERRIDE,1=NORMAL
UNUSED
O=ON, 1=OFF
F4X1H PEO 18 THERMOSTAT ERROR O=YES, 1=NO
PE1 19 E-STOP BUDON ENGAGED 0=YES,1=NO
PE2 20 28 V PWR SUPPLY FAILURE 0=YES,1=NO
PE3 21 TRANS MOTOR FAILURE 0=YES,1=NO
PE4 22 LONG MOTOR FAILURE 0=YES,1=NO
PE5 23 N/C UNUSED
PE6 24 N/C UNUSED
PE7 25 STOP BUDON POSITION O=ENGAGED, 1=NOT ENGAGED
I F4X2H PORT F IS UNUSED
SBe Board 4-29

F4X3H U41 CONTROL WORD = 82H PA AND PC OUT, PB IN
"X" in the address indicates a "Don't Care" condition; any hexadecimal character will yield a
valid address for the device.
4.6.10 Watch Dog Timer (U48)

The watch dog timer provides an orderly system shut down if a malfunction occurs with the
8032, the address lines, data lines, memory or peripheral devices. It will reset the SBC-03 if it is
not pulsed at least once every second. Counter 0 of U14 is programmed by the .@32 to provide
a 0.5 second pulse that !nterrupts the 8032. Whe~ the 8032 gets interrupt~~, j~Jl1ary task is
to pulse the watch dog timer to prevent the reset signal. • ~o~ ~:::=;~jjj:~
,.~,~~~~ .~;'<
4.6.11 D/A (Remote Detector Amplifier High Voltage) CO£94~1t:J44, U45)
~£A;. ' •• . .j;,"'~ • '
An 8-bit A0558 (U44) sits on the data bus and latches the .v~e output when U44P10 is
strobed by the decoder. An integral on chip-op amp~h ~im~e non-inverting input of the
OP-77 (U45P3) which is configured as a differential • .,. ·· )~ R43 provides the offset voltage to
's
U45P2 which sets the output offset of U45. A D~~' required in order to operate the high
voltage supply in the 600-800 VDC region ~t~j~::""R44 , R45, R47, R48, R49, and R51 were
selected to yield approximately a 1 . inciim.if1ffor each single O/A set point increment (e.g.,
a O/A transition of212 to 213 wou as'W-ffie high voltage by approximately 1VDC). 02
clamps the output at 8.2VDC to voltages (9VDC maximum input control to the HV
supply).
gh Voltage and Current) Control (U36, U37)

to set the high voltage and current in the X-ray Insert. U36 and
e a linear 0 - 5 volt output. U36 is used to provide the control for the
nship to the high voltage is that the 0 to 5 volt output of U36 corresponds
to a 0 to 100 output in the voltage. This control voltage (U36P2) is connected to a positive
50 kV power supply and a negative 50 kV volt power supply so it can be said that a 1 bit change
on U36 is a 244.14 volt change in the high voltage.
U37 is used to provide control for the X-ray Insert current. The 0 to 5 volt output of U37
corresponds to a 0 to 5 mA output in the insert current (Le. a 1 bit change on U37P2 is a 1.22
IJA change in the insert current) .
4-30 SBC Board

4.6.13 AiD (Remote X-ray High Voltage, Current and Amplifier High Voltage
Feedback Sense) (U35, U40, U42, AND U43)
U35 is a 12-bit AID that is used to sense the high voltage setting, the X-ray Insert current, and
the Detector amplifier high Voltage. U40 is a 5 volt reference for U35. U41 is a 8 to 1 analog
multiplexer that is controlled by ~o bits on Port 0 of U41. Depending on the setting of these
bits, U42 allows either the positive high voltage feedback, negative high voltage feedback, X-ray
Insert current feedback, or the Detector amplifier high voltage feedback to pass through to
U43P3. U43 is a unity gain op amp that passes its signal to the input of U35P13 . U35 then
senses this voltage and places its digital value on the data bus when the 8032 requests it.
4.6.14 Thermocouple Sense (U38, U39) ~'.

U38 and U39 are used to sense the Tube Head temperature. U39 is a thefT~ amplifier
that converts its thermocouple input to an output that corresponds to a 1 ~~,f61t change per
de~re~ Celsiu.s. !his o~tput voltag~ U39P9 is sent to U38~1. 8 . ~",f1!~, ~ .
which. IS a 8-blt ~ifferen,tl~1 AJD that IS set up so that a 10 ~11I1~olt~~ltage change creates a
one bit change In the digital value. So, a one degree Celslus~ In Tube Head temperature
creates a one bit change in the AJD value of U38 that g ~~ the 8032.
~~, -.,..
""'",
$)~~~} ~.,
, C/:f 'ii. ~
'-----'.
SBC Board 4-31

Test Points
Test Point Signal
TP1 +5 VDC
TP2 +12 VDC
TP3 -12 VDC
TP4 Gi'JD
TP5 11 .0592 MHz
TP6 2.0 MHz
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP14
TP15
rnA FEEDBACK from MAX
PMT HV FEEDBACK
AMP HV PROGRAM
RESET
TP24 -kV FEEDBACK from XORB
TP25 ISOGND
TP26 ISO+V
TP27 ISO-V
4-32 SBC Board

4.7 The OINK Board
NOTE: This discussion covers revision E and higher OINK boards. The theory holds for
02C boards but the components have changed. For compatibility issues please
see OXSE0003, OXSE0025, and OXSE0026 in Chapter 6.
Circuit Functions
• Motor Control
• Laser Control
• Collimator Control '~~ ~.

~ '\~;.
• Fan Control
• Indicator Control
• Emergency Stop Detection
• Error Detection
4.7.1 Motion System

'" ~~"');"
, '"",,,::<';.
Motor Control
Motor control signals (TRANS & ULSE, RUN/HOLD, AND REV/FWD) are applied to
the OINK at J1, a dual-row 1 ctor which comes from the SBC (J3). Each signal is
buffered through one 7407. Buffering assures that these signals can sink 16
mA when LOW (i.e
The the OINK through J6 and J7, and connect directly to the micro
ers (Centents) . R35 and R36 are bias resistors , matched to the stepper
motors, s n the Centent manual. The OINK adds optical isolation to the RUN/HOLD
lines. Please refer to DXSE0003 (Chapter 6) for replacement compatibility infonnation.
Position Controls
Signals from the control panel rocker switches are brought in to the OINK via J12, optically
isolated by IS05, and sent to the SSC via J2. C31 through C34 provide debouncing.
Motion Detection
If the Tube Head Carriage should stop during a scan, undesired exposure may occur. Circuitry
on the OINK senses loss of motion and can cut the +28VDC supply via K1. Slotted disks
mounted on the motor gears interrupt an infra-red beam from an optical sensor. The pulses
created by the sensor arrive at J13 and J14. If they should time out at U7, K1 shuts down the
+28 VDC power to the MAX board .
U8 and U9 provide delay to allow use of both the rising and falling edges of the pulses for better
resolution. SBCO-RIDE (active LOW) enables U10, and pulses are counted at U7, a one-shot.
U7 is reset by the pulses from the optical sensors . After each reset, pin 7 or pin 15 drop down
to 0.7V and then C27 or C31 begin to charge. If either capaCitor reaches roughly 2.1V before
OINK Board 4-33

the next pulse from the optical sensor arrives , a LONG INT signal (TP8) or TRANS INT signal
(TP7) is created . The transverse time out is set at 2.5 seconds at U7A. The longitudinal time
out is set at 20 seconds at U7B.
When SBCO-RIDE is asserted , U4B gates an interrupt signal should either half of U7 time out.
A motion failure or a dropout of the +28VDC supply, sends an interrupt (US) to the SBC shutting
down the Tube Head . When SBCO-RIDE is LOW, the longitudinal and transverse motion
detection systems are prevented from interrupting the SBC. This is the state of the scanner
except when a patient scan is in progress.
Revision E and higher OINK boards require that R1,on the OMI board be removed . R1 is
required for revision 02C OINK boards however. Please refer to DXSE0003 (Ch~ter 6) for
further information. '''''~\*l '
~ ~~t~ !~~~.;~~.
Motor Kill ~: ~;,';i"
The MOTOR KILL signal comes from the SBC via J2P9. It is active~nd held LOW
during OINK operation. When LOW, it turns on 07, which in ~~~i~es relay K3, closing
solid state contacts, keeping +26VDC applied to J6 and Jl (~~motor controllers) . In case
of undesirable operation, MOTOR KILL would be set HI~~+26VDC would be killed to the
Centents only, and motor action would stop. A 1 N62aa:~n'er diode on the 26VDC line on the
motor side of the motor kill relay suppresses transieNi>$i~'Used by the collapsing field in the
$j~ \,",,~"1 '
.r'~~~ 'rI:>'"
motor when the motor kill relay opens.

~ -r,J
'. "~!{"7i~"
This signal is applied to the 1. It controls one of IS04's isolators, which turns on
06, a PNP transistor us nt drive. The signal leaves at J8 to the Laser PCB.
Solenoid C
The two solen Ids (shutter and collimator) are actuated in response to signals from the SBC
which enter the OIN K at J 1, As with the locator light, one of the ISO's is used to control a PNP
transistor. Current is controlled by an RC network conSisting of a 470uF capaCitor and an 75
ohm resistor. The resistor is twice the working resistance of the solenoid, and allows only a
9VDC final drop across the solenoid. The capacitor allows an initial inrush of current when 05
or 04 delivers +26VDC before the capacitor charges. RC = 38ms.
Collimator Limit Switch Detection

Two limit switches are mounted on the collimator assembly of the scanner, one for the shutter
solenoid, one for the collimator solenoid. When activated, they are sensed through J11 ,
debounced, and sent to the SBC via J1.
4.7.4 Fans
There are two fans on the Tube Head, wired in series, powered by the +26VDC power supply.
They hook up at J26. The fans are on at all times.
4-34 OINK Board

LUNAR® . DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
4.7.5 Indicators
Shutter Open Light

This signal from a limit switch on the Shutter/Collimator Assembly is applied to the OINK at
J11 P3. The limit switch is closed when the Shutter is opened . The signal returns to the SBC
from J1 .
Shutter Open Light Safety Circuit

This circuit ensures that a burned out LED condition will prevent the shutter solenoid from
opening. 02 enables the ground return for the Shutter Solenoid depending on lamp continuity
If the LED is burned out, there is no path from the +26VDC (03 emitter) , through R50, to the
base of 02. +26VDC is therefore held at the base of 04, and the solenoid will nQl.actuate.
When the LED is intact, voltage is avail~ble (current flow through R50, theJ~~~ ' and R53
to the base of 02) , enabling the grounding of IS03. ~. ~ ~,/" '
~~_\~~'~'
· h '<""
X-ray 0 n L Ig t . ·'~t~ <~.. '
-,",,<;.<.
This signal, in the form of current feedback indicating current ~, t0B'e head, is applied to the
OINK from the SBC at J1P10. Determination of Insert 9J!!~"~ater than ;::A11lA is made at
U11 , an LM111 comparator. If current is detected, a si~fi§"'T'assed through IS04 and leaves
on J8. ~t1§;,c'¥':" •
•.~ . '"T$.;--: ~o')
Power On Light \:r~" "

Power on for the entire scanner is i-r Idic:atE~~~ft1e presence of +26VDC to the OINK. J5 sends
this voltage to the lamp on the
End of Exposure Alarm

An OR gate, U9, shutter solenoid limit switch reopening or dropout of Insert
current. This of IS03, and a relay. A sharp "ping" sound is heard, indicating
a "safe" r-I"\r,,.,,., to the alarm itself.
The Control Panel Emergency Stop button's normally closed contacts come to the OINK at J17,
and apply power to relay K1. When K1 is on, +26VDC is applied at J16 to a relay which
controls the +28VDC power supply. The relay coil is also wired in series with the Tube Head
Thermostat. Should either the Thermostat open up or the E-stop button be pressed, power
drops out from the relay, and +28VDC drops out to the HV power supplies . These conditions
are also fed to the SBC via IS01 , U8, Ul, and finally J18, another dual-row 10-pin header.
4.7.7 OP/CAl
The OP/CAL signal is also routed through the OINK from the SBC to the AGS.
OINK Board 4-35

LUNAR® DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. t: l::
4.7.8 Error Detection

The OINK board monitors five hardware errors; transverse and longitudinal motion errors (sel
Motion Detection in section 4.7.1), +28 VDC power supply faults (input at J2 pin6) , emergenc
stop conditions (input at J17), and tube head thermostat errors (input at J15). If one of these
errors ~s asserted, it is latched by U1, and is reported to the sec via J18. At the same time, (;
interrupt pulse is sent to the SSC via J19 to reset the microprocessor and thereby halt system
operation. The following table summarizes possible readouts of U1 and the corresponding err
messages reported by the software.
OINK U1 Hexadecimal Errors

Equivalent
04 03 02 01 00 ."
,;§.,~~ '~"
...' ........ <..\. ~.•.
0 1 1 1 1 15 Tran~4~l~~btion
1 0 1 1 1 23 oXe·
~l~~;-;;~I Motion
{}<:! '.' . <
,.ti:.,~'
1 1 0 1 1 27 ,§i <~~!, ~8 VDC Power Supply
1 1 1 0 1 29 /;.J;
vr~':
.c'~~.'-W ",
~<~
-
.
~~~':::. ~~'; .
Emergency Stop Condition
p Tube Head Thermostat

:~
1 1 1 1 ~~,i'
X I
0 I _,..~
1 '*'<§If?' Any of the Above
4-"36 OINK Board

Yest Points
For Rev. 02C For Rev. E and Signal

Higher
TP1 TP16 . +5VDC
TP2 TP15 +5 GND
TP3 TP14 OP/CAL
TP4 TP13 Motor Kill
TPS TP17 Transverse
TP6 TP12
TP7 TP1
TP8 TP2
TP9
TP10 Longitudinal Rev/Fwd
TP11 Transverse Rev/Fwd
TP12 Longitudinal Pulse
Longitudinal Interrupt
TP7 Transverse Interrupt
TP19 +28 GND
TP20 +28 VDC
TP17 TP6 Interrupt
4-37
DPX-IQ Servic€ Manual Rev. E (3198)
4-"38 OINK Board

4.8 Optical Motion Interrupt (OMI) Board
Circuit Functions
Reports Motion to the OINK board
Operations
Optical Motion Interrupt (OMI) boards are used to detect motion in both the X and Yaxes. As
the carriage moves transversely, a slotted disk attached to the pulley near the front of the
scanner rotates through a slot in a OMI board, interrupting an infra-red beam of light. This
creates the signal in figure 1 that is sent to the OINK board. Another slotted disk is attached to
the foot-end pulley to detect longitudinal movement (see figure 2). If the approp~te signal is
absent while there is supposed to be movement, an emergency stop cond~:~::~~~ccur .
.". e~~:~.'"
,",·G .!:i.":::
c/:)<~"
OMl Board 4-39

4-40 OM18oard
4.9 The Laser Board
Circuit Functions
.•.. Regulation of the power to the Laser
• Send power to Laser indicator
Operations
. The Laser Board is mounted next to the detector in the upper arm. The board has two J
.. connectors, VIN and VlDEO OUT. VIN is the -power to the board and is COlltrolted by transistor
01 on the OINK board . VIDEO OUT connects to the LED on the front panel. B~ the LED and
the laser are lit when there is power to the board. The laser itself is hardwiredJ,~1\: board and
cannot be ordered separately. i;.::~,'ft;~;- .
.... ~....~~\~.
It is possible to destroy transistor 01 on the OINK board by groundi~f~C1 on the Laser
board when the power to the laser is on . There is a groundin~w' " ,;Jtached to the laser board
with one of the mounting screws, if any additional ground(Bg . " ""e attached at this point, it is
possible to short D1 and C1 to ground as the screw i~,,!t, ':'
The following table has the laser specifications. fo~~;,~

~~,~¥}
.. "-;!'-I--
SpecifH:ations Laser Specifications Laser
LUNAR Part 1462 Aspect Ratio 4 to 1

Number
Output Power Divergence 0.2 mrad
Astigmatism 11 microns
Frequency Laser Lifetime 50,000 hours
Laser Stru Optimal Spot 500 microns
Laser InGaAIP Bore Sighting 2mrad

Composition
Spatial Mode Single Current Draw 105mA
Longitudinal Multiple Voltage Input 4-6 VDC

Mode
Beam Dimensions 3.3/0.8 mm Safety Rating Class II
.----- Laser Board 4-41

4-42 Laser Board

ppendix4~A
AMP Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the AMP board.?So, .
.~'. c~~~~.r.\~~
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the timeGPiit;JfiiiSe of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Older sca~~y have earlier
versions of this board.~.,<t:!-:~;;'<~i .
AMP Board Schematics Appendix 4 .A

, EFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Aooendix 4.A AMP Board Schematics

Appendix 4~ B
AGS Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the AGS board ..;.,
.u·:·, ~~;~JE~~~)
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the time!fi-f~Je;ase of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Older sca!Jfi,~(liFc1Y have earlier
versions of this board, ~,,"t;~;&'·'j
AGS Board Schematics Appendix 4.8

Appendix-4-_ C
DCA Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the DCA board .,,::"
...~J\~. ' 2...~.
'.' )..:.," r ':'<" -; "
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the timeff2f1f:J/ease of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Older SCCl;~*ill7ay have earlier
versions of this board. .:',~~~~~ ."
DCA Board Schematics Appendix 4.C

-....--.
Append; 4.D
MAX Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the MAX board. '\,-,~
A ~.~~Si:" ... ~j
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the timeJPi..~/&asce of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Older sca~~y have earlier
versions of this board. $'k~~~~'· ;::·"
MAX Board Schematics Appendix 4 .0

Appendix 4.E
XORB Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the XORB board::;~_
-;":.
~ r~~;:~I.·:;~:·>
NOTE: The revision of these schematics
.
is current as of the time .~~/ea:se of the last
,'.;~. :. "~'.
SeNice Manual or SeNlce Manual Update. Older sca~~y have earlier

versions of this board. .~t~;~t ''1.'
XORe Board Schematics Aooendix 4.E

LUNAR\!) DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
Appendix 4.F
SBC Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the SBC board. l[::,.
~. ~ ~~f~~h·~'
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the time,£Qi1riJeaSe of the last
ServIce Manu~1 or Service Manual Update. Older Sc~~y have earlier
versions of this board. . .
...-:,~.....,. . "'.-
..,.."""",,''<t\i,
S BC Board Schematics Aooendix 4. F

Appendix 4. G
OINK Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the OINK board. '<:}1.::, ,
.~ .r~~,'~~
NOTE: .The revision of these schematics is current as of the time,i!i1!eJease of the last
;J'.'t-.~:"' ."......
ServIce Manu~1 or Service Manual Update. Older scac:.~~y have earlier

versIOns of thIS board.{-~L , ..@?f~ =,- ',;c'
GlNK Board Scl Jematics A-ooendix 4.-8

(
I
( (
. Z1 Z2 l3 Z4
~ ~ ~ ~
,
MountIng HoIo MountIng HoIo Mounting HoIo ..oo.>'>tIng HoIo
, UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT. ,
-
Verify Latest Revision
Before Using
.
,"
UNUSED PARTS PWB1
I
uoo
7"lS32 lJ6C
,
~ ~
LPN G>5 REV E f>MI
P\MI
I ,
704lSOO
-
tnD roo. o.\TI! DESCI\1PTlOH Of' awm rmOREV SHEff CURfI£HT
7 .... lSM
CCAREV
~~
3370 WtW7 e ALl. e
3m 4'1M17 R3510 47K1o ""PPO'1-_. ~ ALl. ~
~~
4073 lCW27J117 " RlI&RI8102K7,RllIo2IQ.
° ALl.
°
PS~1A.-04
, J f--t4<
0EP1' . ~N.:. LUNAR CORP.
:::f~~
~J e: 0
~~ 313 w. BEln..a-.aE HIOI--N-JAY
~
eLK "'-"OlSON. WI 153713
USWOH:
K d ll" ~ PS2:501A.-04
OPX
USA
I''''
1
DQCU.AEHT CINHER: DPX ON( CCA <me ~nc DWlANoI
U4A
jo
741S70 R&D
OAAWNIIY: 81~
M8OCIot.TI!D I'U.3 I 0300_0D6H
I TONY DeROSA
A
• C
Appendix 4.H
OMI Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the OMI board.~~<
."- £:~~
NOTE: The revision of these schematics is current as of the timeZi(ffB1ease of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update_ Older sca~~y have earlier
versions of this board. . ,~:~~'-~>
0Ml Board Schematics Aooendix 4 .t-l

\ I
, I ., I 4 ..1\ ~
I 6 I 7
- - - - - [ - - _ .\ - .- . .
I
\
/
+5 VDC
1
~'""- ~
SIGNAL 2
A GND 3
'--- R2 ..
Not Pop 220
I I
I > R1
<.
I
I 10k I
I I
- - - -
r~~
~ OPT01
f- H21B1
B B
QPTO-lNTERRUPTER
....
""
I LPN <396 REV
8
c
ECO. DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE DWG REV SHEET CURRENT
CCAREV I
PVIIB1 LPN 4396 c
3581 1120197 Initial C ALL C
r--
-
DEPT. APPROVAL: LUNAR CORP.
313W. BELTLINEHIGHWAY
USED ON: MADISON, WI 53713
j
0 0
USA
IF)(
rntJe
DOC. OWNER: DPX OMI CCA2817 SCHEMATIC. .
R&D ISlze -f Document Number .,
DRAWN BY: A 2817-SCH
r~
,
ASSOCIATED FILES I 2817_c.DSN I 4 -t
TONY DEROSA Pate:
I
Tuesday. August 06 1996 ISheet 1 of 1
2 3 5 e 7 I 8
Appendix 4.1
Laser Board Schematics
This appendix contains the schematics for the latest version of the Laser board. ,%;,..
NOTE:
.
The revision of these schematics is current as of the timefJf~lE

"-
e
.
of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Older scaI*..~Y have earlier
versions of this board. .. tlfj"~'
Laser Board Schematics Aooendix 4.1

I I I '\ I I I
\
\ ,.~. 2 3 4 5 6 7 \
i '\ i
\.. i
./
,...
lASER DIODE ~
~D2
A DIRECT TO BOARD A
N
SOLDER CONNECTIONS
~~7805 LLED
~I 1
VlN VOUT
_2
;j2
2t::: LASER ON INDICATOR
1 1~4004 1
2X. 100 Header
~
;:r:;: C1 ;:~ C2
0.1 uF
220uF !'l
B B
NOT POPULATED
, -=~
,,r- ---------,,
,
, ,
,
I LS ,
II ,
I
~ , ,
I j.
DIRECT TO BOARD , 0iIVE I
SOLDER CONNECTIONS I
--------- - - I
LASER ON AUDIABLE
ECOII DATE DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE DING REV SHEET CURRENT
CCAREV
c c
8f7196 Initial A ALL
3562 A
PVVB1
Ii
U1A
I LPN 4397 REV A
AM!
I
Heatsink
DEPT. APPROVAL: LUr-.:AR CORP.
313W. BELTLINEHIGHWAY
MADISON, WI 53713
USED ON:
0 USA
, j D
a:?< [Title .
DOC. OWNER: DPXLASER
R&D !SIze I Document Number
"
DRAWN BY: A 1419-SCH

r~
ASSOCIATED FILES
1 ~
I 2
1419.DSN
3
I I 4 .,. TONY DEROSA
5
Date: Tuesday. AUQust 06 1996
6 I 7
ISheet 1 of
8
1
"
DPX-IQ Servtce Manua1 -Rev. E {3198)
ChapterS Olagnostcs
c apter 5
Diagnostics
This chapter contains brief discussions of the tools diskette and the error log. ~t.
5.1 Tools Diskette ......................................................................... ~~~"/}:~~ ..............5-1

T oosI O·Ire ctory ......................................................................... ~~.~
. ~. . ~......................... 5 - 1
Using Edit Scan ...........................................................~,.e4~ .................

Installing Edit Scan ..............................................................~~j;;.~·;.: ............................ 5-2
Loading and Removing the Diagnostic Utilities... :ff:~<;.tr~ ...:....................................... 5-7

5-2
5.2 Error Log ...................................................... ~~~~~ ........................................... 5-13
~>'~~ '.;-.
~' .,~; ..'
ti ~:.(~'\
'i~
. ' '!):;::.~ ,~
~~ " . :~.;: "
~~
Diagnostics . ChapterS
5.1 Tools Diskette

LUNAR Tools diskettes are not available to the customer. This software is available to LUNAR
authorized representatives only.
The Tools diskettes haV€ thr-ee utilities. The software fDr -each utmty resides in a separate
subdirectory on the Tools diskette. The subdirectories are named: Tools, Diags and Monitor.
Tools Directory
There are 6 files in the TOOLS subdirectory.
ERRDUMP EXE . . ~
. ~.
CR ~i . $~~~'
FF ~~ ~~ ~.
PRCONFIG EXE ~"",~" ?i
EDITSCAN EXE & ;r4p.::- W
WINDPMI 386 A ~
~ 1" ~ ~
Most of these files are loaded in to the customer's~~~';;n the system software is
loaded. % .~
. t"~<,~.
!=RRDUMP.EXE is a program that reCOrds~1!~re activity into a file (ERRLOG.BIN).

rhe program records entry to and ~- LUNAR software, errors that may occur dunng
the operation of the software re program was being run when the error
occurred.
The files that are not stem software are CR and FF. CR and FF stand for "camage
retum" and
The Edit S lets you edit a patient's mandatory and optional information, unanalyze
a file, and the Scan Type and Side information in femur and orthopedic hip files. These
are instruction for installing and using the Edit Scan pro.gram:
NOTE: These instructions assume that the DPX-IQ software is installed on the C Drive in
the \LUNAR subdirectory. If the DPX-IQ software is not installed in this location,
substitute the drive letter and subdirectory in which the software is installed in
. place of "C:l.LUNAR" in these instructions.
Toots Diskette 5-1

DPX-/O Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
Installing Edit Scan

The Edit Scan file must be copied to the subdirectory on your fixed disk that contains the DPX
10 software.
1. -Piace the Toots diskette in the A Drive.
2. At the DOS prompt, type:
copya:\tools\editscan.exe c:\lunar
Press [Ent~r]. The EDITS,?AN.EXE file should now be copied to the C:\LUNAR~ubdirectory,
and the EdIt Scan program IS ready to use. . .\~~.>
r(}. ~~~ \0'
~"'.¢' ~.
Using Edit scanA~-:"~

When editing a scan file, LUNAR strongly recommends a copy. 0t~ file be edited to
protect the original file from damage. ~ ~\,~/
A~~
NOTE: The instructions in th1S section assu~tScan program was copied to the
C:\LUNAR subdirectory. If the pro~~~ copied to a different subdirectory,
substitute the name of that ~~i~,,~~ for "LUNAR" in these instructions.
1. Edit Scan must be r u n ; sY~ory to which it was copied in the "Installing

Edit Scan" section. DOS prompt for that subdirectory appears on the
screen.
pt appears on the screen, go to step 2 to continue.
If > prompt does not appear on the screen, type:

c:
Next type:
cd\lunar[Enter]
The C:\LUNAR> ptompt should now appear on the scr-een.
2. At the prompt, type:

editscan[Enter].
3. A message appears asking for the scan file name. Enter the drive letter, the name of
the subdirectory in which the copy of the file is located, and the name of the file. For
example, to edit a copy -of Jane Smith's first femur scan (SMiTHJOO.FOO} with the copy
located in the C:\STUDY subdirectory, type:
c:\study\smithjOO.fOO[Enter]
5-2 Too1s Diskette

4. Use the function keys listed in the menu to edit the file. The function keys are-
described in the section entitled "Function Keys" below.
NOTE: If the Scan Type or Right Side information are changed, be sure to unanalyze the
file {[F-3]) .before exiting the progKJm~ There will be problems apening the file if it
is not unanalyzed.
5. When finished editing, press [Home] from the Scan File Editor menu to exit the
program. A message appears asking if you want to save your changes.
6. Press M to save the changes, press [N] not to.
Function Keys
F1 - Patient Information
F2 - Selected Parameters
F3 - Unanafyze File
Home - Previous
[F1]-Patient Information , ,.
Press [F1], Patient Info e patient's information. The patient's mandatory and
optional information ap
io....."r"t"\'~ fie1d to field .
Use only E characters when entering information into the Ethnic Code and Base
Filename fie you do not use UPPER CASE characters in these fields, problems may
occur during ana1ysis or database rebuilding.
Press {Home] to return 10 ihe Scan Fiie Editor menu.
Too1s Diskette 5-3

[F2]-Selected Parameters
Press [F2], Selected Parameters, to change the scan type and side. The Selected Parameters
fields appear (Figure 2).
Scan Type Femur

Right Side True
Auto Analyzed TnJe
Prtprocessed True
Thickness 16.09899
Figure 2 - Selected Parameters Field

~.
The only fields ~ou
can edit are the Scan Type and Right ?ide fiefds . . and T~~~~zed
Preprocessed fields are changed when you unanalyze a fJle. The ThJck~~iSR::t cannot be
changed . ~ ~~\.
~~~:. ~~
~~, ~".
•-¢1!f.T" '%::~~.
Only use the [F2] option to make only the following edits: ;~),,\~ ,,~
• change a femur scan to an orthopedic hip scan ffi ~~,\;.~......
?JI:. :r~ . .
• change an orthopedic hip scan to a femur sT~~* .
• change a right femur to a.left femur ~"'"0 ~ '"

• change a left femur to a nght r"%i>
DO NOT change the scan that are not femur or orthopedic hip scans (for
example, do not change scan to a totaJ body scan). Making changes other than
femur and orthoped may destroy data.
Use the a from field to field. Change the scan type by highlighting the Scan
Type field 9 one of the following number keys:
pine
2 - Femur
3 - Lateral
4 - Tot~Body
5 - Forearm
6 - Orthopedic
For example, to change a femur scan to an orthopedic hip scan, highlight the Scan Type field
and press [6]. To change an orthopedic hip scan to a femur scan, press [2].
Edit the Right Side field by highlighting the Right Side field and pressing either [1] or [2].
1 - True
2 - False
If ''True'' appears in the Right Side fietd, the scan ts a fight f-emur scan. U "Fatse" appears in the
Right Sille field, the scan is a left femur scan .
5-4 Too1s Diskette

Press [Home] to retum to the Scan File Editor menu.
[F3]-Unanafyze FHe
Press [F3] , Unanalyze File, to unanalyze a file.
A new screen does not appear when [F3] is pressed because the program unanalyzes the file
immediately after it is pressed. To check that the file is unanalyzed, press [F2] , Scan
Parameters. The word "False" appears in the AutoAnalyzed and Preprocessed fields when the
file is unancrlyzed.
Monitor Directory .~,

The Monitor directory contains 3 files. They are: 0.
~
'. ~~4'"
A~~ '';2~
~~
DL EXE '?iJ~
c ~ . '.~<,;r
~~.
FIRMVER EXE ~.:..41.~~\ "~
~L ~
DPXFIRM HEX . .~'~~},v
~~~.
~i\'~ ~ ••
-if,;:, $'- -"'~
These fi1es contain and load the monnor program into t~~M of the scanners SSC
board. This software is a1so part of the System DiSk~\l(fjs automaticaHy loaded as part of
the software loading procedures... " 0'.
¥.
The monitor program may be run by tYPin~Ommand:
DL [Enter]
. ppear on the computer monitor.
the latest version of the tools diskette is not used, the correct
monitor version may be overwritten with an earlier version! When in
doubt, contact the Lunar Service Department.
If you wish to see which version of the sse monitor program is currently programmed into the
SSC, type:
FIRMVER [Enter]
Tools Diskette 5-5

Diags Directory
The Diags directory contains 2 files and one subdirectory. They are:
ANC (DIR)
DIAGNOS . ' BAT
DIAGS EXE
The Diagnostic software performs various tests used to verify proper operation of the scanner
as well as to troubleshoot scanner failures. The diagnostic tests are discussed later in this
document.
DIAGNOS.BAT is a batch program to transfer the diagnostic files to or remove ~m from the
computer's hard drive. The loading or erasing includes all of the files found in. r\1'JC
subdirectory within the Oiags directory. The loading or €rasing does not)~"", W"" . files found
in the Tools or Monitor d i r e c t o r i e s . ... {~~ .. '"
~1f. ~"
DIAGS. EXE is the file containing the software to run the diag~S~~'On the scanner.
~f- . ~';~'1'"
DIAGS\ANC Directory ~'\:t~-;l';
The ANC directory within the DIAGS directory contaiJ~t1irectories. These directories are:
'!f?~ ~.I¥"
t~::~~, '<;-~
ENGLISH ~~: .,.~~:::
FRENCH
GERMAN
V·
SPANiSH
Each of these diref"'i'f"'I,nc'es:: software to provide the diagnostic screen displays in one
of the four languag At this time not all screens have been translated into the other
languages.
5-0 Toots Diskette

Loading and Removing the Diagnostic Utilities

, .-"
(~U0 ~
I
.4i: "ro--'L ''ZL..<.)
C J
,-<
'" r ,..
J);>};
, .- . ' " ,.. . ,
!~::~/,<-:f.. .IF "
',' (-.~ I /;::)
>_/ ./\...1,[1 '
Loading the Program

The Diagnostic programs can be loaded by running the DIAGNOS program. Insert the Tools
diskett€ in -the A drive and~: '~, .'..(7
t" ('.... ""; G.. \ Lv ) r. ""
'. .;'
I
a:\diags\diagnos load (subdirectory) [Enter]. (all characters must be lower case), where
(subdirectory) is where the executable program is located (Le., dpx*.exe, orthoped.exe, or
sa.exe).
Once the loading procedure is complete, the diagnostic software can be access~, by typing
DIAGS from the C:\(subdirectory) prompt. ? Pf7J;,\
Removing the Program from the Customer's Fixed Disk ~~~~~,*~

Type: ~~>:,~",
b]1\~ ~.~
/ a:\diags\diagnos unload (subdirectory) [Enter] (all ~~O-~st be lower case)
~~i~2g~i~: Diagnostic program, start at the C:~'o~) prompt and type:

£fft~ ~ . :f~
DIAGS [Enter] " '.J.~'" :,,~,
The scanner and the system t be connected, turned on and on line for the software
to continue past the gray uce the Diagnostics Main Menu . .U the computer locks
up at the gray screen,
Diags begins witb ssurance Tests Menu selected. To return to this part of the
program frof\l t grams, press (F4).
• ;I...... ~
Tools Diskette
F4 Quality Assurance Tests
1. Peak I Set AMP Gain

See "Peak Adjustment Procedure" section 6.1.
2. MWtipte Standard Scans

This selection runs the Quality Assurance Tests automatically. This is an excellent device for
testing the scanner over night. It should be used overnight when installations run more than
one day. Include the reports with the installation report.
NOTE:
~. ~.
Press (Esc) to begin the sets of QuaJity Assurance Tests. Th~Qs'bf the scans will not be
printed out until the completion of ALL the scans. If the~e.@6b'een turned on in the Print
Manager, then the printouts will begin to be printed at1"~nated time. .
os:~~
W~ 'f,.~
3. Perform Air Matrix Scan .. ~,
If (3) is selected, the "Matrix" menu /aP1Qec:lrsr I~mally all of the default values should be used.
Remove the table top and insert aluminum (or an attenuation insert) must be
between the tube head and the If this is not done, the results will not be valid.
If it is not desired that th rea be scanned, smaller numbers may be entered for
Scan Lines (longitudi ) and Scan Points (transverse scan length). When installing
the scanner, al It settings so that the alignment over the -entire scanning
surface is exa
If "Stop" is ~aea~a r Detector Motion, all of the data will be collected in one place.
Press (Esc) to begin the scan. The "Matrix-Acquisition" screen will appear. Write down the file
name in the upper right hand comer.
4. Analyze Air Matrix Scan

When the Air Matrix scan is over, the "Quality Assurance Tests" menu will appear again. This
time, press (4) to analyze the Air Matrix scan. Type in the name of the Air Matrix Scan file.
After the program finishes reading and processing the file data, a list of options will be
displayed:
F1 Overall Statistics
F2 Line Statistics
F3 Column Statistics
F4 Deviation Image Home - Previous
Selecting (F1) will display the statistical analysis and ask if a printout is desired. The F2 and F3
options are not implemented at this time. The CF4) option shows a color pattern of each pixel's
5-8 Tools Diskette

deviation (in units of standard deviations) from the mean value of all pixels. There is a choice of
High Channel Counts, Low Channel Counts, or Worst Case (the computer selects the most
deviant of the two channets). The Deviation 1mage can be very hetpfu~ 1n determ1ntng how to
take corrective action when the Air Matrix Scan fails (see "Failing Air Matrix Results" section
8.10).
5. Static Counter
The Static Counter is one of the most useful of the Diagnostic programs. The Static Counter
program was PI il Ilarify designed 10 take sampie counts of the 38 and 7D keV channels, .and
display the counts on the monitor screen, print them on the printer, or dump the results to a file.
However, this program can do much more.
Set the X-ray Spectrum and Intensity: ..~\)

i~1' ~~~
The X-ray High Voltage can be set from 0 to 80 kV and the current can .,s~rrom 0 1lA to 5000
IJA (high current applicable to Spellman power supply system: on,I~~:W
CAUTION: Do not operate at over 1000 .~.f .' '. ~",. 'oW?than 5 minutes. And if
LL ,
•
o~rated at hig~ current for ~~s, allo~ a 1~ minu~e cooli.n g .
penod. Operation at 75n;~,~lower dunng thiS cooling penod JS
acceptable. ~~:~-
NOTE: When kV and mA pa~n'J~t{.:af'CS!~ set in the Static Counter X-rays are being
made regardless . is being done. All time limitations start when kV and
mA are set, they are lowered to 750 pA or less, not when
sampling I
~~------------------------------------------
Using the arrow e cursor to the Operating Voltage or Tube Current entries. Use
the backspace some spaces, and then type the appropriate number. The voltage
and curren as soon as the (Enter) key is pressed.
Press (F1) an use the front panel position switches to move the Tube Head and detector to
any location. This feature is useful for positioning the x-ray beam for the alignment pictures.
Press (Home) to leave the scanner at the present position and retum to the scanner control
screen, or choose (Esc) to aHow the scal11"1ef to automatically adjust for the Pat1ent Locator Light
offset.
The Collimator may be toggled between Medium and Fine:
Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Collimator entry. Press (1) for medium
collimation, and (2) for small collimation.
The Sampling Parameters determine how often the SSC reads the 38 and 70 keV counts and
reports these counts to the program. There should not be any need to change the Samples per
Second or Number of Samples value. It may be useful to change the number of repeats to a
large value if an x-ray beam or counts are needed for a long period of time. Otherwise 50
repeats (the default value) is perfect for making alignment pictures.
Tools Diskette 5-9

Data Corrections should be nonnally left OFF. When Data Corrections are switched ON-,- the
software will correct the counts for signal superpositions caused by multiple photons striking the
detector simultaneously, and for dead time (the inability of the counting electronics to react to
two photons arriving at the detector nearly simultaneously).
The Data Output may be directed to -a printer Of a fHe 1n add1t1on to the disp1ay-on the monitor
screen. To print the results, move the cursor to ''To Printer" and press (1) to tum this feature
ON. To save the results to a file, move the cursor to ''To File" and press (1) to tum this feature
ON. Move the cursor down one more line to set the file name, or allow the data to be stored in
the default file C:\STATIC. LOG.
After the Scanner Parameters, Sampling Parameters, and Data Output modes h~ye been set,
the sampling process can be started by pressing the (ESC) key. ~~~,
<t> a{f..~~~t.
it .-~.. i[,f,,~ ,"
6. Qwck CoUimation Ratio ~~. '%» ~.
This test runs part of the daily QA to test the collimation ratio in oU,r",f~'i\'
~. A~~';>'~,"
~4;~~~' '
-J!1s.~;i,\''''''
"'~"~~o.. ~.""~'
~~~; --=
,;fi;.
,7'~$h.::~
~~~~..
,~
.". " O"~~~' ,:,
j?r--.-.- "'."'~
fi
r.\:)o'
~.
~k';r
~,....
5-10 Tools Diskette

F1 Limit Switch Diagnostics
1. Limit Switch Closure

If (1) is pressed, the status of each of the four limit switches is displayed. This option is helpful
in determining if all of the Limit Switches and their associated cables are operating correctly,
and if their signals are being properly interpreted by the SBe Board.
, .. ~- 2~ ~ Set Limit Switches I)

. r,'\; ./ 'If(2) is selected, the program may be used in conjunction with the home position fixture to set
f'f,P'. (and verify funit switch positions. The prograr n starts with the adjustment of the Transverse
c£'v- V-"::' \ Home Limit Switch (which would normally be a selection of (F4». The other switches may be
~\j ~u~S I ~elected by pressing (F1) through (F4): <:i;.),~
.);>
) '.,,:\/
> ', \ "\. .~('~('F1) se ts an d ven'f'teS th e Longl'tud'tna I H orne L"t ~~ "'~
~~
Iml SWit. ch '~;~.
}.:~ .
\' ~-,
("( J'(
~.-,:>,,_~(~).'
(., .\S~, .}..
; 11 ) (F2) sets and ve~f~es the longitudinal Away ~j":lit S~itch_,~_.~~,~~-
<. (F3) sets and venfles the Transverse Away limit SWltch~~~t,'''!e'1''
~
\5 i (~
W , P'IJ"
. \ .!~ '~l i~~'
.-'--)¢".' ~;<:A~\
>
"1(F4) sets and verifies the Transverse HomeLimit Swit~ -(}.;k~.--

:
.\ /\V,":J"
:0 \ {\ ' '-',,- ~~, ~~'~~" . ():"'L' . ~-
The setting and verification of the Limit Switches can o~~~lle with the Table Top removed. '.
Once the desired switch is selected, press (1) to s~w~:~S~o verify. When \1) is pr~ssed, the
program asks that the scanner be moved to Ho~~the Front Panel Position SWitches.
Wrth the End Doors and Front Panel remov,5; ' 1 t~,Jcrme Position Fixture, which is part of the
Alignment Kit, should be positioned in ~e . . comer of the scanner. Use the Front Panel
'-- e
Position Switches to move the s . ' ... until -' large collimator hole is directly beneath the hole
. -j in the Home Position Fixture. and the scanner will move to the exact position
where the Limit Switch sho t the Limit Switch, and press (Esc) .
Once the Limit _'.. ',Tr- .. program allows for verification immediately. The verification is
the same as se . The Position Switches are used again to align the large
collimator h ome Position Fixture h01e. When (Esc) is pressed, the scanner will
move until Limit Switch. As soon as it closes the Limit Switch, the program will
displayw r not the limit Switch has been set within aUowed tolerances.
3. Limit To Limit Distance

If (3) is selected from the Limit Switch Diagnostics menu, the scanner will step from one Limit
Switch to the next aroundihe perimet€rofihe scan window. This is the same test performed in
the Quality Assurance Test and reported as Transverse and Longitudinal Mechanics values.
4. Home Scanner
Moves arm to home position.
Tools Diskette 5-11

F2 Motor Diagnostics
1. Pos1tion Contr{)~s
If (1) is pressed, the Front Panel Position Switches may be tested.
2. Distance Accuracy
If (2) is selected, the source and detector will be moved either 100 mm transversely or
longitudinally.
3. Speed Accuracy
If (3) is selected, the transverse or longitudinal speed is calculated and displayed on the screen.
No speed tolerances are given or have been set. ~
~.~~,
~-:., i~~ ....
4. C able Stress B um-In , ~~~ ~'-;;~Ji"
This program runs the scan arm several ways to stress the cables. ~ ~~;> -.,.
. ~~ ~iifJf'
..-..:.t"'7,. ~.~;\
F3 X-Ra~ Diagnostics .. ~ .(/1:.~~~ ~~

The (F3) option allows the follOWing deVIces to be tested :. ~~em on and off:
1. Patient Localizer (Light) ~\:w .>C.
2. Co"im~tor Selection . ~ 'i?~~~ ~

3. Solenoid / Beam Indlcator l:~ .,....r~.;?/,"
4. X-Ray Relay . ~~.
5. LinearitylReproducibility A~1~
6. Tubehead Therm e~
. ' ~~.
Option 5. from this men at is used in the LUNAR Quality Control Department to
verify that the . ity is proportional to the X-ray Insert current, and independent
of line voltage.
F5
17 of the Version 3.4 Operator's Manual.
F6 Select Language
5-12 Too1s Diskette

, ',
;' '- ,
5.2 Error Log

When the DPX-IQ system hardware or software senses an error, it makes an entry into the
emog.bin file. Each entry refers to a line or lines of code in the program that was running at the
time and is therefore generally unreadable. Certain entries, however, are fairly Gommon and
can be useflli tn trouble-shooting. Here ~s a ttst-of common codes: ~
NOTE: If the computer is rebooted after an error has occurred, the error is not usually
saved to the error log.
Entry # on Right Problem
15
23
27
29
30
66
71
Faulty Negative Power Supply
Faulty Positive Power Supply
Emergency Stop Button with Laser On
No Communication with SBC
255 Serial Time Out
NOTE: Although error codes 78 and 80 usually mean the above, they can mean that
either power supply is bad or that they both are.
Error Log " 5-13

The program used to access the error log is ERRDUMP.EXE in the C:\LUNAR directory. This
program is the only way to display the information in the ERROR LOG. To use this program,
exit the DPX-IQ system software to the C:\LUNAR> prompt. Then the options for using
ERRDUMP are:
1. Type ERRDUMP [Enter]

This will display on the screen only information for the last time the software was run.
This is most useful to run immediately after an error has occurred.
2. Type ERRDUMP -I -n [Enter]

T.rns M -display aU ~nformatmn -in the ERR-LOG.BIN. T-h~s option is more usefuJ for
investigating a problem that has occurred over several days. ,~
. ~-~~\
3. Type either above command followed by >PRN. I! '~~~$":#'"
This will send the information to the plinter for a hard copy w~J(jjttTfen~may be faxed to
LUNAR for analysis. ¢l)!~,~~,
~_ ~J;;.""
~
~-'l-:"~'
~~~~P
&'~~O'
~~~.
-'
~~.
~ ~\~~
',. V
f} ,~~
5-14 Error Log

Chapter 6
Procedures
This chapter contains procedures for testing and replacing parts. The appendic~are all
uncontrolled copies of GMP documents and as such are subject to change~wi~~~otice.
~~~t~'
6.1 Peak Adjustment Procedure ......................................... '" .. ~..f~~~";~:'¥: ....................... 6-1
6.2 AGS Test Procedure .....................................................~'-.~~~ .............................. 6-7
6.3 Reloading LUNAR Software ...................................~~ .~.:~.:" ................................... 6-9
6.4 Tube Head Replacement. ..............................~"~\. C,;.. ::~~ .....................................6-11
,,'" ~J.<. ""~B).......................... ".................. 6- 13
6.5 Lower Cable Bundle Rep Iacement Proced ur~.~::
6.6 Upper Cable Bundle Replacement Proce~};~ ....................................................6-17
6.7 Tube Head Control Cable Replaceme~1Q:cedure ............................ ......... .......... 6-19
.* .~""'i
6.8 Patient Compressor Strap.: ........fI~.:t;~z.0':"' ........................................... ".................. 6-23
6.9 Returning Parts To LUNAR (For ~atjonal Distributors) ....................................6-25
--- 6.10 Tests To Be Performe , ~:, .............................................. ! .. . ............................... 6-27
Procedures Chapter 6
Chapter 6 Procedures
6.1 Peak Adjustment Procedure

The voltage to the detector is controlled by the adjustment of the potentiometer on the sse
board labeled HV ADJ - R43 (see Figs 6.1 and 6.2). The voltage at TP18 of the! SBe is equal to
the detector voltage divided by 1000. If R43 is adjusted to decrease the voltage! at TP18 by
0.001, the peak will increase by 5 units. ..
The last 'peak value obtained during a Quality Assurance scan is stored in the Quality
Assurance History database file. If the next peak value obtained differs from the last value
stored in the database by more than 50 units, the Quality Assurance scan will fail. If the peak
must be shifted by more than 50 units to return it to 500 units :!:25, the peak must be adjusted in
steps of less than 50 units (40 unit steps are recommended). A complete QA must be run
between each step to update the Quality Assurance History database file.
I.f) n
FIG 6.1 DPX-IQ sse (t p e 0\ 1')
'\\ .
/\' V\\) \'~\V
"
{J\\
.(\, '
\
)-\
).
J\\~
tG ~'
J...~ I ~
;'11
',., !,.1
/ ;~':cr
\. f,
I ~ .~
,\...J':::)
(
~
Peak Adjustment 6-1
Jl}
J)/)
r\'\J
,.
..- \. -...
'v\~ \}l'j
rf/)Jt Pt Ch ~ " ;':'

eA\;1lr 'c:r~" >: ~\'
6-2 Peak Adjustment

A . If the software peak setting corresponds to where both the high and low channel counts are
at a maximum, (see fig. 6.3) follow the steps outlined below. The graph on the QA will look
similar to the one shown in fig 6.3 with the dashed vertical line (where the software thinks
the peak is) on the graph at a point where both the high and low energy plots are maximized
(the dashed curved lines). If the graph on the QA is unlike fig 6.3, go to part B of this
procedure.
. 4---1~R1::' P--\o TC i l.5.1~Z; >

P~ak~~3raiphic with dashed line in proper position.
1. Load tt"!e ,~~f'~"'software located on the TOOLS diskette (see seGtion 5.1).
:~~'~:':';~~'" ~t?}~·:. '~-':> ':\ '
2. T~DtA$$/:~nd from the menu, select "Peak / Set AMP Gain", then select "Perform
PeaJ\:~ahd [Esc] to run the peak. Observe the results generated by thE~ QA to
determine if the software has selected the Amplifier Setting where both high and low
channel counts are at a maximum. If not go to part 8 .
3. If the peak requires adjustment, (is not within +/- 25 units of 500) connect a voltage
meter to the SSC at TP18 (see fig 6.2). Put the meter to the VDC scale and record the
voltage reading (e.g. 0.703VDC)
4. Retum to the LUNAR System S9~~~~

, ..bY :~tin~.~p).t;G~ . and typing CDILUNAR
[Enter] DPX [Enter] . ._~Cl' 0 " 'i> ' . _..•. C, ...' -(/ ) .
- ~. (. ~ ) .
r-, '.
" ,-'
,....... .....;"..,. }\: )
!)~a,
I:
t' .'-~ ..•. ; ,.,. 7-:e '. /_

, \ I /' ('»
C)
/'~:' :' , ~i 'f " ': ((li! ;) {~n 1:.:~ .'.
,/ " . r '" r,
- ,'- , / , /'
,J / ' ~ !
I'f')
'~
I' 0
Peak Adjustment 6-3

Using the voltage recorded in step 3 and the peak value recorded in step 2 determine
the appropriate voltage adjustment for R43.
To determine voltage adjustment:

If Peak >500:
New V TP18 = (Current Peak - 500) 15 11: + Old V TP18
If Peak <500
New V TP18 =(500 - Current Peak) I 5 11: - Old V TP18
*00 Inot attempt to adjust the peak by more than 40 units as an adjust~.nt
1;",
without a
complete passing QA in the LUNAR software will cause a peak fa~lur~~e QA. For
Pea~~ settings that are more than 50 units away from 500 mUltiP.J.~~~ents are
required. . ~ ~'?
. Mt,,~
7. With your voltmeter attached to TP 18, adjust R43 (~e~j~Lmtil
your voltmeter
reads what you determined in step 6. ~'. ,~~~
8. From the main menu press F3 System QU~'\:~ce and place the System
".. ' rt up and at head end of table. Press
Standard on the table silk-screen with ~~~.
[Esc] and allow the QA to run in itr:Wand to print out. Verify that QA passes.
9. If peak value is not withi ," nits~O, record peak value from the QA that was just
run and the current 18. Using these values repeat steps A. 3-8 until
Pea~~ is within 25 u d a complete passing OA has been run.
6-4 Peak Adjustment

S. If software is unable to identify the correct peak (the dashed line does not line up with high --
points of both the high and low energy plots as in the figure below), use the following
procedure:
b£Tt.CtOlt,
". · 1
'.%50 -----
laO .
. 3';0'
400
.-;; -, '~;';<' ...so '. '
;:::.::;:?,:;~:\;" .1:::~, ~::~ ~~"M+M ~",n'" ....• 9:0
:\'::::"':':'/'.: - - '.. - ,,:fWII:,~~-aJtl!'A_al,HIQlUlI1U11I S!SO
,\~;'J'g'.1~';'J,[~\j(~,~~.;~iii~&Jit,\;~1~~~{~0~1£~~~C· . . . ,•• •. ':.

:::,-, : :,.:, :, ,;:':
.. .
Fig 6.4 Software is unable. te>Jind correct peak.
1. Determine the Amplifier Setting where both high and low channel counts are at a
,maximum, for ~xample in fig. .f.6 .4,at ~OO\mits. (LoW keV = 397258 High keV=28B363)
'00 DO,'s Yf7f,-t,5fic r O::; n,~ rt1 e5 YJ;-LJ t~/YJ lij· .
i
2. Measure the DC voltage~atSBG TP18 for example 690mV (see fig. 6.2).
:..... ." . . . . ..
3. Use the foliowingJorn1~la to adjust the peak using R43 (see fig 6.2) with your voltmeter
attached to. TP18on,tne
. ,:-::.'.
.
SSC. All voltages are in millivolts.
Ne~ Vms ~ ··='Old V TP1S + {Estimated Correct Current Peak Location - SOO)/S
Usin~fthe sample readings in steps 1 and 2 above, the new voltage at TP18 that will
correspond to a Peak Setting of 500±25 units should be:
New VTP18 = 690 + (300 - 500)/5

= 650 mV.
4. If the formula above yields an answer that requires the peak be moved more than 50
units, (the absolute value of [300-500] = 200 >50) the peak must be moved in ste!ps.
Start with the peak setting of the last passing QA. Move the peak setting first toward
the Estimated Correct Current Peak (in a step less than 50 units) until the scanner
recognizes the Estimated Peak as the correct peak and a QA passes. (The Low and
High Channel counts are maximized at the amplifier setting which matches or nearly
matches (a difference of less than 50 units) the peak setting on the QA).
Remember that a complete passing QA must be run between each step.
5. Run the peak and ensure the software is able to identify the setting where both high
and low channel counts are at a maximum. If this peak setting is not within 25 units of
500, retum to part A of this procedure to make the final adjustment.
Peak Adjustment 6-5

Peak Adjustment
6.2 AGS Test Procedure

Use the following DOS commands to enter the LUNAR subdirectory:
C: [enter]
CD\LUNAR [enter]
Insert the TOOLS Diskette in the A: drive and load the diagnostic software. Type:
a:\diags\diagnos load [enter] (all characters must be lower case)

~~~~A
When the C:\LU NAR> pr~~~~ r~a~p~~~s~)ty~e: -r~~~ ~-;\:~.:.
DIAGS [enter] . :;: , "t ' , -~l ~;) ,:-0. /
, "I I
( ~5%J-. ~~"P~
~..~~\. .,~~.;
'-h" ' :
For this test to be succeS~fU;, -the ~etector

voltage must be prgp~iale:':
Use the
PEAK/SET AMP GAIN option from the,menu to perform~~r"procedure.
Select the Static Counter from the initial menu. Wh~. ~

.' . ,,~ 'fcitic counter screen appE!arS, use
the "..1-" key to move the cursor to Operating Vol_~' enter 76.0. Then move the cursor to
Tube Current and enter the number 150.. ~vepeat" number to 20 and the "Printer" to
ON. .,; ~,
If the AGS is operating pro annel counts will be approximately 600,000 to

800,000 counts, and there igh channel counts in the range of approximately
400,000 to 700,000. B I be stable to approximately ± 3000 counts from one
sample to the next. itions are not satisfied, the AGS is not operating to peak
performance. may not justify further adjustments. Adjustments 1to the AGS
should onl en the customer reports white pixels around the outside of the
body in ans or if white areas or streaks are visible near the trochalnter in
femur sca IS adjustment should be made only after the detector has been replaced
without any improvement in results.
Adjustment of the AGSDCA may cause a change in BMD results. Scan the aluminum
spine phantom three times before and after artY adjustment, and compare the averages
of the three scans. Run 5 Quality Assurance scans prior to the spine phantoml scans to
properly calibrate the densitometer.
Before adjusting the AGSDCA to improve AGS performance! please review the discussions on
Performance, Operation and Adjustment in section 4.1. Lunar strongly recommends that if an
adjustment is to be made, all of the DCA c;md AGSDCA voltages (T4 - T7) should be reset to the
values in table 4.1. This adjustment procedure will only work correctly from the proper starting
point.
AGS Test 6-7

If an oscilloscope is available, adjust AGSDCA-T4 upwards until there is no rollover at AGS-

TP12 (see the figure In SECTION 4.1). --
If no oscilloscope is available, follow the procedure below:
1. As you watch static counter counts on the monitor display" adjust the potentiometer
nearest to AGSDCA-T4 up by 10 mV. () ~j) .' '._~ .}!')j C r= ;:O! I)'/)/.l-ru-
'}J::s" 5.>
i
'./le -"-:' t: ",\ . :.... , . / ..:: / "': , ';" ~~\)'\ J~ t"'~ ..::_-)',...~t-
u,
.
, ,/ J. i : ,'" / " .! /~ I .) ) j 8 J"'-' J.) J t::: ,

2. If the low channel counts increased during step 1 by more than 10,000 counts, return
to step 1 and increase the voltage on AGSDCA-T4 by another 10mV. End the
adjustment when:
~~';
a. A 10 mV adjustment increases the low channel counts by les~th~~OOO, or
b. the low channel counts are more than the high channel co~~e counts are
stable, and the counts pass the following verification te~, .~' .
Verify proper operation with the aluminum wedge. Press tbe ~~;and
note where the
'''':t'.:~Qtable top. Press the <Esc>
center of the red Patient Localizer lamp spot is posiiltlon
key and the collimator will move into the localizer la ""s.iftOno. Press <Esc> again and the
shutter will open. Allow a few samples to appea~. ~ onitor, and then move the Aluminum
Wedge slowly through the radiation beam, pti_~ifh the thin edge of the wedge. Move the
wedge very slowly until the beam reacges yminum thickness of approximately 2 mm.
In the results displayed on the the sample number where the high channel air
counts begin to be reduced. the counts in both channels should be reduced for the
following samples. In oth the high and low channel counts must decrease
consistently as the beam.
If the low increase at any point instead of decreasing, the AGS is not properly
adjusted. use "bone points" or white pixels in the image around the outside of a
patient's T y scan.
6-8 .A.GS Test

6.3 Reloading LUNAR Software

It is sometimes recommended in answer to a particular problem that the software be reloaded .
This can be accomplished by locating the latest version of the Lunar Software (labeled "System
Diskette").
BE SURE OF WHICH VERSION OF SOFTWARE IS PRESENTLY BEING USED!

RELOADING OLDER SOFTWARE CAN DESTROY IMPORTANT DATA.
The Main Menu of the Lunar Software shows which version is presently on the system.
Begin by making sure the System Diskette is write-protected (or READ-ONLY). ~. the default
drive is the A: drive when A:INSTALL is typed, the software loading procedurl:'~ttempt to
e:ase all ~e executable files on the A: diskette. If the A: diskette is. not Wi~ ' -:" ~ ~ed, the
diskette Will be permanently corrupted. Both square holes on the dlske .' ,. ' e open. If only
one hole is open, move the slide on the other hole to open it also. T "-' '>.''_ diskette is write-
protected. ~.. . tJi:-;. ~'
. J
~.~~
When reloading software, you must be in the root dire~~~ C: drive. Get there by typing
at any C: prompt: :A ~~' "ie~
P~~t~: .
CD\ [enter] p t ~~~-#<
Insert the Lunar System Diskette i '·" e A~!e'~nd type:
A:install [enter]
Follow the instru n until a message is displayed confirming a successful

software load.
When new '~!:"~I'" software are released they may not be loaded in the above manner. BE
SURE TO F THE LOADING INSTRUCTIONS THAT ACCOMPANY ALL SOFTWARE
UPDATES.
Reloading Software 6-9

6-10 Reloading Software

6.4 Tube Head Replacement

When a replacement Tube Head is sent to a site in the field for replacement, it is not ready for
immediate installation into the scanner. Some parts from the old Tube Head must be
transferred to the new Tube Head. These parts are: 1) tilt bar; 2) lead ring (around filter area);
3) lead wrap; 4) fan bracket; 5) nuts, bolts and washers; 6) collimator positioning hardware (3
pieces); and, of course, 7) the collimator assembly. Verify that all necessary parts have been
transferred to the new Tube Head before shipping the defective. LUNAR has received
defectives with the lead ring, for example, still in them .
CERIUM FILTER
DPX X-RAY ~
TUBEHEAD
ASSEMBLY
LEAD RING
----..,0~
---'U
COLLIMATOR . , /,. ," ::: WAR N I N j(; I
STUD ,'~
"..~. :
w .''.-.
'. ! \ DO NOT
BRASS REMOVE
PLATE WHENTHE .
,,: • REPLACING THE TUBEHEAD
~ .
-.-------BRASS WINDOW PLATE
SPRING
(BILLIVILLE
WASHERS
. .. .. {}~,: .'~;
?';;~;~)/I
TOOEHEAD
ADJUSTMENT
SCREW o
Tube Head Replacement 6-11

Shelf Life
Many distributors have asked about the shelf life on the Tube Heads in their stock. The shelf
life of thE~ Tube Head is not accurately known~ but we feel at this time that it is over two years.
Perform the following Tube Head inspections on all replacements before mounting them:
1. Check the shelf for oil spots which would indicate that the Tube Head has a leak. If oil
is discovered, retum the Tube Head for warranty replacement.
2. Shake the Tube Head and listen for the sound of an air pocket or bubble inside. If a
bubble is discovered, retum the Tube Head for warranty replacement.
If a Tube Head has been on the shelf for three weeks or more, perform the wa~p procedure
described below. " 'i.~~'::.\ .,
Mountin'g The Tube Head ti~~~~~

Use procedure DXSEOOOO in this chapters appendix for repacking t , '. " ~ube Head's high
voltage connections, and refer to the installation procedures, Q" " ~ " 3 and DXAP0009 (also .
in this chapters appendix), for tube head mounting and a~~ " - 'bcedures.
~. _~ ~~ ..,r;,
~"Ui:\'~'
Warmin~J Up The Tube Head /.~~\"- '"41)

This procedure applie~ t? any Tube Head that h~'r¥bn the shelf for three weeks or more.
When thEl Tube Head IS Installed, ram~: thec~nd current slowly:
1. Using the static counter-

.
, m from the diags program, set the current to 750 JJA
~~~
and the voltage to 41 '"",
' ",
2. , - se the voltage by 5 kV.
3. kV is reached.
This P described in the installation procedure, DXAP0003.
6-12 Tube Head Replacement

6.5 Lower Cable Bundle Replacement Procedure
Necessary tools: 1/8" and 5/32" Hex Wrench, Small Screwdriver, Diagonal Cutters, 3/8"
Wrench, Large and small wire ties.
1. Shut off the power to the scanner.
2. Remove the head and foot end panels. At the foot end of the scan table unplug the
AlC power cable to the scanner.
3.
4.
::::::::::b~:O:::~::::::~o~rt::r::~e(mo at each en:,~~7:'
5. On your new lower cable bundle, use a diagonal cutters to ~~V;ire ties holding the
cable together, also unfold and read the LUNAR SE~y~~TES attached to the .
new cable bundle. _~ .~:;:l;;it!9
~~~~~.
6. Lay the new cable bundle flat out on the fl?.-(~~e the end with the (2) 16 pin
connectors and the yellow and orange~~nnectors, this is the end that connects
to the bulkhead, this is the end to .§.lart_UnstalI action from .
.. _~ ~" !t.l
~~t;"'
7. Locate the bulkhead on - nnenhere are (3) wire ties that hold thE~ cable bundle
in place between the nd the cable track. Before cutting any wire ties note
the way the cable down and the way the cable lays before it enters the
cable track. T must be fastened in the same position and lay the same
way.
8. (3) wire ties between the bulkhead and the cable track with your
. Disconnect the two Lemo connectors (orange and yellow) by
gra the Lemo connector between the bulkhead and the colored strain relief and
pulling outward.
9. Next disconnect the two white 16 pin molex connectors. These connectors have a
catch lock located in the center of the housing which must be depressed to disconnect
them from the bulkhead.
10. If you try to remove the cable bundle by pulling it back towards the cable track you will
notice a 3 conductor gray wire cable tied to the high voltage cable bundlie. This wire
carries the transverse optical interrupt signal from the front carriage (we will refer to
this wire as the OMI cable). To find the location of the OMI board and the front carriage
follow the OMI cable. On your new Cable bundle the OMI wire is connec;ted through
the bulkhead.
Lower Cable Bundle Replacement 6-13

11. To remove the OMI cable push the x-ray tube head all the way to the outside of the
scanner (patients left side), then notice the clearance between the front panel and the
high voltage cable bundle connecting to the x-ray tube head and the way the cables
are tied down as you will need to wire tie them back the same way.
12. Now you can cut the (4) large wire ties and the (2) small wire ties that hold down the
high voltage cable bundle and OMI cable. Then you can pull the lower cable bundle
back to where it enters the cable track.
13. Next take your small screw driver and pry open (20) of the cable track plastic retaining
clips; that hold the cables into the track. These clips pivot at the back of the cable track
and can either be removed or left in the open position so the cables ca~e removed .
.~~~
14. Pull the old cable bundle out of the cable track towards the foot,~~·table.
15. Now install the (3) conductor OMI cable from the bUlkhead~\;i\t1I BOARD. To.do
this you must remove the white 16 pin connector frog}, t~}IJlead labeled bulkhead
2, this connector is a part of the upper cable bu~l~ new OMI cable will
connect into this housing. Note the position of~~ that holds the upper cable
bundle in place and then cut it in order to p~:ctnnector out to install the OMI
~bl ,e. Note th~ orientation of the .e. xisti~ ~!ilals in this bulkhead. connector as they
. e
slide! and lock Into the connector I~ . ~ctlon only. Where the wires enter the
connector each hole is numerjcal~..#.red. (Please read the attached LUNAR
SERVICE NOTES) Put n wire into hole # 11, and the black wire into hole # 9,
and the red wire into
16. the bulkhead braCket the way it came out and fasten the
uppHr a large wire tie the way it was before the original wire tie was
cut.
17. OMI cable in the same position as the previous cable and connect it to
the rd. Then tie the high voltage cable bundle and the OMI cable down to the
high voltage cable trough,(there are three large wire ties near the bulkhead, two large
wire ties put together to tie the high voltage cables down at the center of the high
voltage cable trough, and two small wire ties to anchor the OMI cable down to the
Bracket before it connects to the OMI board). Before tightehing the wire ties assure
that the proper clearances and no stress is applied at any of the connectors or wires.
Tighten the center cable ties first (two large wire ties put together and located at the
centler of the high voltage cable trough). Be sure the high voltage cable bundle does
not hit the front panel when the tube head is an the way toward the outside of the
scanner (patients left). Then tighten the three wire ties near the bulkhead making sure
that lthe high voltage cables do not hang over into the cut out space on the high
voltage cable trough as they may hit the longnudinal motor bracket and cause
positioning problems.
\ ,
6-14 Lower Cable Bundle Replacement

18. Take the new cable bundle and connect it to the bulkhead by routing the cable bundle
the same way as the replace cable bundle, (note the connectors are labeled bulkhead
1 and bulkhead 2) and fasten the cable bundle down in the three spots between the
cable track and the bulkhead with wire ties. Lay the new bundle down into the cable
track making sure aI/ the cables lay parallel to each other. Start replacing the clips to
the cable track as far as you can. Continue the process: remove a few clips, extract
the old cable bundle, add in the new cable bundle, and replace the clips.
19. To fin'lsh removing the old and installing the new cable bundle in the lower portion of
the cable track you must remove a screw located at the end of the cabll~ track. To do
this use a 1/8" hex wrench and a 3/8" wrench. Once you remove the screw you can lift
the cable track out of the channel it rides in and finish prying open the q~aining clips.
Remove the old cable bundle until it reaches the cable entrance~ hle~e all the
cables enter the electrical pan area. Then finish installing the ne,t.. : . ~ ~undle until
you reach the cable entrance hole, finish clipping all the cliP.S at«:~, . replace the
cable track hold down screw (do not tighten the screw at ~w.
20. Locate where a/l the wires from the old cable bUgdl~aT: on the electronics pan.
All of the wires are labeled except for the wire~~~o the terminal block. Here is a
list of wires that must be disconnected befo~~ng the cable bundle from the pan
area. SBC(J-5), OINK(J-17), OINK(J-1ft~(J-14), OINK(J-5), OINK(J-8),
PMT/AGS(J-11)(J-11 is the yello~rinector), the orange Lemo connector
(connected to the H.V. Lemo .J.)o~.~ the last three wires connect to the Terminal
block. Write down the n . where the orange, blue and yellow wires go to on the
terminal block and di m with your small screwdriver. Carefully pull the old
cable bundle thro entrance hole from the pan area. The old cable bundle
21. connector at a time) the new cable bundle wires through the cable
the pan area. Connect the wires to their proper locations.
22. the arm all the way down to the foot end of the scan table. At this time
make sure that the Lower cable bundle and the high voltage cable bundle have some
slack where the cables enter the cable track near the bulkhead area. Then make sure
the cable track has at least 1/8" of clearance from hitting the frame. To adjust this
slide the cable track in the trough it rides in to get the proper clearance, then tighten
the screw that holds the cable track in place with a 1/8" hex wrench and a 3/8" wrench.
Move the arm up and down the scan table to be sure there is nothing wrong with the
cable track motion. Leave the arm at the foot end of the table.
23. Leave a little slack in the cables from the cable track to the pan area to allow all of the
cables to be routed and wire tied exactly like the original cables.
24. Reconnect the AlC power cord, put the table top, pad, and end panels bClck on the
scanner.
Lower Cable Bundle Replacement 6-15

25. Turn on the scan table, computer, monitor and printer. Do a daily calibration to verify
thalt everything passes. Do a phantom scan and try the position control buttons for
proper operation. Verify that the patient positioning light is working. continue to verify
that the scanner will also pass a phantom scan.
6-16 Lower Cable Bundle Replacement

;.0 Upper Cable Bundle Replacement Procedure
ools Necessary: Small Phillips Screwdriver, Small Slot Screwdriver, Diagonal Cutt~r's, Hex
Wrench Set, Mini Molex Pin Extractor, Large and Small Wire Ties.
1. Tum off the power to the scan table. Remove the table pad and both head and foot
end panels . Next, remove the table top by removing the two allen head screws at
each end (use 1/8" hex wrench). Lastly, remove the column cover located at the back
of the arm held in place by (10) Phillips Head screws.
2. Remove the bottom arm cover by removing the (8) screws that hold it i~place (use
9/64 hex wrench). Next, remove the top cover (4 screws, 3/32 hex w~J. Remove
the column cover lastly. i-, ,~~:,::~ ,
.~~~.
3. Open the cable track and cut the wire ties at the end of it. ~~ect all the cables
coming from the cable track and remove the cable b~~~cfr as the top of the
column (through the hole). -$' -:- ., ?~.
£:~A~O~
4. Place the new cable bundle in the cable tr~~1tQ~nnect all cables to their
appropriate positions. Close the cable , ~itrci~~ire tie the cables at the end of it.
Route the cable bundle throu;h v y t n e top of the column.
Next locate the Laser and Oisconnect it. Remove this cable to the top of the
column cutting any n 're ties.
6. r On light and connect. Replace any wire ties
7. -'f the arm column follow the cables vertically down and cut all the wire
ti upper cable bundle to the other cable assemblies.
3. Carefully pull the upper cable bundle out towards the back of the arm and down
through the holes in the column.
). Next cut the wire ties that hold the cables down near the bulkhead. these are located
in the lower rear portion of the arm.
10. Make sure the bulkhead connectors are labeled on both sides of the bulkhead bracket
and then disconnect them.
1. Next remove the two (16) pin Molex housing connectors that are attached to the upper
cable assemblies from the bulkhead bracket. Also disconnect the yellow Lemo
connector from the bulkhead bracket. Pull the housings and the Lemo connectors out
to work on them.
r Cable Bundle Replacement 6-17

12. Use the mini Molex pin extractor tool and remove from bulkhead 1 pin16 and pinS.
From bulkhead 2 (the lower connector) remove pin15, pin16, pin6, pin?, and pinS.
13. Now remove the old cable bundle by pulling the cable out through the back of the
column. The old cable may now be discarded.
14. Next route the new cable bundle through the column wire tieing as you go.
15. Route the taped end of the cable through the hole at the bottom of the column to the
bulkhead area (follow the other cables that go to the bulkhead).
16. Carefully remove the masking tape from the cable exposing the mini MC?!~x pins and
the Lemo connector. Note the orientation of the existing terminals in~lkhead
connectors and the numeric labels at each hole of the connectqr ..(~ ~~:\~':.-
~~;"$
17. Connect the wires as follows: ~ ~~t~ ~
.~'-#:'"
"'C'"~~_~"
.------------.-----------~~k4:f'
Color
Yellow
Brown
White
Bulk Head 2, Pin 8
Bulk Head 2, Pin 15
Bulk Head 2, Pin 16
18. Insert the connectors into the bulkhead bracket the same way they were removed and
fasten the upper cable bundle with wire ties as Original.
19. From the wire tie just fastened, the cables going into the arm column must not have
any slack in the cables (pull the cables from the column area to remove any slack).
Make sure that none of the cables hit any of the mOving parts in the narrow area where
the cables come from the back of the column out to the bulkhead.
20. Mount the column cover back in place and replace the top and bottom arm covers.
Replace the table top, table pad and the head and foot end panels back on to the
scanner.
21. Tum on the power to the scan table. Run 2 daily QA's, 2 phantom scans, and an air
matrix and verify that all tests pass.
6-18 Upper Cable Bundle Replacement

6.7 Tube Head Control Cable Replacement Procedure
1. Switch off the power to the scanner.
2. Remove the head and foot end panels. At the foot end of the scan tablE! unplug the
AlC power plug to the scanner.
3. Take off the table top by removing the 4 screws (two at each end).
4. Move the scan arm to the head end of the table.

...d~.
5. Take the black tape off the high voltage cable bundle at each end of ~~eving
(open any cable track clips that are in the way as in step 8) as wetk~~~'wire ties
holding the bundle in place. Next, slide the sleeving away fro~~e~ head and
remov~ the tape beneath the sleeving. Note the position; ~~cable before
remoVIng the tape. The cables must be returned to ~:eositlons.
4 · ~'t
6. Disconnect the military-style connector and th~~wire (if one exjsts) from the
tube head and slide the cable out of the bla,~~'1mg toward the cable track.
~' 'Y
~. "iii?J.
7. Unplug J3 and J5 on the XORB b~.~o~ trace the ground wire (if one exists) from
the control cable and discon~ct W
tne power supply. Cut the wire ties holding the
control cable to the pan.
8. Pry open the plasti ips that hold the cables into the cable trclck. These clips
pivot at the ba track and can either be removed or left in jthe open
position les. The screw located at the end of the cable track near
the removed. Once this screw is removed the cable track can be
li~~ nne! it rides in and the remaining clips can be opened. Mark the
p-. cable track screw on the frame to retum the track to its original position.
9. Remove the old .control cable. Note the position of all the cables in the cable track.
They will need to be returned to the same position during this procedurE~ .
~
.~! _C_A_U_T_I_O_N_:__I_f_th_e---.;;...ca_b_l_es_a_re-n_ot_r_e_tu_m_e_d_to_th_e_ir_o_n_'9_in_a_I__P_O_s_it_io_n_s__
damage will result.
, ca_b_le_ _ __
10. Feed the new cable, military connector first, through the black sleeving on the high
voltage cable bundle starting near the bulkhead. The sleeving can be expanded by
pushing two parts of it together to better fit the connector through.
Control Cable Replacement 6-19

11. Once the cable is through the sleeving, connect it to the tube head and connect the
ground wire (see figures 1 and 2). Position the cables next to the high voltage cable
bracket as in figure 1. The collimator control cable should come out of the cable
bundle between the two high voltage cables toward the back of the scanner. Tape the
cables together for several inches with three layers of electrical tape starting as close
to the bracket as possible. Continue to spiral the tape around the cables as it was
origlinally and finish by taping three layers for several inches near the bulkhead. Tape
the sleeving near the bulkhead as it was originally. Pull the sleeving tight along the
bundle and tape near the tube head. Wire tie the cables to the tube head high voltage
cable bracket.
n 9 CDANGERJ@
High Voltage! ~
1 - Positive High Voltage Cable

2 - Negative High Voltage Cable
3 - Collimator Control Cable
4 - Tube Head ContrQI Cable
6-20 Control Cable Replacement

OPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
Top View of
Tube Head
I I
"- /
~
••(J\<
/
.
0«;-'
~.~4,:.
(i; Ji91~, ,~
...( "'" ~;.. ~':"':II'
.f~ "\t,~~
1t~: ~,
~;o~~r
t!\~,,~
~'\s'the

12. Lay the control cable in the cable track in the same original one. Start
replacing wire ties between the bulkhead and tQ~!~ead. Before tightening the
wire ties assure that there is proper clearance~~~tress is applied at any of the
connectors or wires through the entire ran~J~~~tion. Tighten the center cable ties
first (two large wire tie~ put together a~~d at the ce~ter of the high voltage cable
trough). Besure the high v9Itag~.l~ndle does not hit the front panel when the
tube head is all the way th~t of the scanner. Make sure the high voltage
cables do not hang into out space on the high voltage cable trough. Tighten
the three wire ties n ead.
13. ble track and reattach the track to the scanne!r frame.
14. e foot end of the scan table. Check that the lower Galble bundle and
e cable bundle have some slack where the cables enter the cable track
khead. Check that the cable track has at least 1/8" clearance of the frame.
st this, slide the track in its trough, then tighten the screw that holds the track in
place. Move the arm up and down the table to verify that the cable trac!k moves
properly.
15. Reconnect the AlC power cord, and replace the table top and end panels.
16. Verify that a daily calibration passes.
Control Cable Replacement 6-21

6-22 Control Cable Replacement

~6~8 Patient Compressor Strap

If the Patient Compressor Strap will not rewind, the motor (Roller Assembly) must be replaced
(Lunar PIN 3134). To do so, follow this procedure:
1. Remove the back ledge and disassemble.
2. Install the Patient Compressor Strap on the new Roller Assembly.
3. Stand behind the scanner with the Patient Compressor Strap extending away through
the back ledge and towards the front of the scanner. Wind the strap on the Roller
Assembly, winding with the top of the roller turning towards yourself. .~~
4. When the entire strap has been rolled onto the Roller AssemblY",. ~~ROlier
Assembly into the end blocks. The left block has a slot in it to ~~e spring axle.
Tum the top of this block towards yourself for 20 turns. 'S'~~>'~'
~ '~i'
5. Bolt the end blocks to the scanner. -Zt
Ik"t\~<'~"
~\t~[;~ :?
6. Attach the back ledge to the scanner. ~"Ii~,~t'

f{!jf~~' ."l,i~,
..".
_. d!~'~~;/ ~iiJ
r
'~<f?
'\!.~~'r
..-
'jent Strap 6-23

6-24 Patient Strap

6.9 Returning Parts To LUNAR (For International Distribut()rs)

Retum parts prepaid to Lunar. Please list our customs broker as intermediate consignee :
Burlington Air Express

6023 S. Howell Ave.
Milwaukee, WI 53237-0140
Shipments of defective parts being retumed to LUNAR from intemational distributors should add
the following instructions to the air bill and proforma invoice:
DEFECTIVE EXCHANGE SERVICE PART, RETURN TO VENDOR. <l~~

NO DUTIES SHOULD APPLY. ALL PARTS ARE MANUFACTURED IN THE -\~\f=D
STATES. FOR CUSTOMS CLEARANCE PLEASE NOTIFY THE BURLI,NG.~~TR
EXPRESS IMPORT DEPARTMENT: ~\ "i~~'<··
~~
~i
. ;1,
.. '. ~~~~:.
.iJ? .
BURLlN.GTON AIR EX~RESS IMPORT DEPARTME ~ ~~~,~. ~.
PHONE. 414-482 0700 #. ,~; ~.~
FAX: 414-482-0965 ~. ~~,~;'
WATS: 800-242-3821 . fJ~\~i
NOTE: All parts must be labelec! a system they are from, and thE~ symptoms
each part exhibited in failu~;aaf.Jlo be described.
NO WARRANTY OR EXC TS WILL BE GIVEN UNTIL THESE CONDITIONS

ARE MET!
Parts must also in 90 days of LU NAR opening a service report for them (usually
the day they a All parts not retumed within 90 days (warranty or not) will be
invoiced fo butor price.
If it is the inte on of a distributor to keep a part for their spare parts stock, they should notify
the LUNAR Customer Service Department. This way, LUNAR may immediately invoice for such
parts and close service reports in a more timely manner.
Retuming Parts 6-25

6-26 Returning Parts

LUNAR® . DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
6.10 Tests To Be Performed
.' ,
Replaced Component or QA's Air Phantom AGS

Procedure Performed Matrix Scans Test
+5, ±12 VDC Power Supply 1
26 VDC Power Supply 1
28 VDC Power Supply 1
AGS Board, DCA Boards, AMP 5

Box
Centent, Transverse 1
Centent, Longitudinal 1
Collimator 5
Laser
,(Positioning
Lower Cable Bundle 1 2

2
1 1
5 .1 3
PMT, 5 1 3 1
Tube Head '(Counts
./Air Ratio
./Spillover
,IBM Values
Positive Power Supply 5 1 3
SBC 2 1 2
Tube Head Control Cable 2 1 2
Upper Cable Bundle 2 1 2
System Move 5 (not in 1 3 '1

DIAGS)
Tests 6-27
Appendix 6.A DEXA Installation Work Instructions

AR®~__________________
D_P_X_-I_Q~S_e_~_ice
__M a_nu_a_I________________~R~ev~.~E~(3~/9~8~)
__
ppendix 6.A
EXA Installation Work Instructions
Work Instructions [DXAP0003] ,.
~,
i appendix contains the latest work instructions for installing a DEXA sc;.an~~ease
~fully read .and f?lIow the steps described in the "PROCEDU RES" se~~ne document
m performing thiS procedure. . ~~' :Si,;> .
£T~
.,
;;VI; .
.c..n:..,~~-
< .f;.~ ~ ,.,.
TE: The revision of this document is current as, gf~ , : ' ,:.~ffifJI of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Upd ~~er, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any ti. " ~. . ,1i:rout notice, The LUNAR Service
Drs
Department will periodically notify .' ,' _'. - . of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in futu~v . pdates.
The distributor is re '. ~enSUri~g that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with documents,
~~--------------------------------.-----
------------------------------------------------------------------.
'EXA Installation Work Instructions Appendix 6.A.
WNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0003 REV:G DATE: 11/1!0/97 CO: 4501
TITLE: DPX Series Installation Work Instructions
DOCUMENT TYPE: Work Instructions
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications WRITTEN BY: Jeff Franz
AUTHOR/MODIFIER APPROVAL:
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the steps necessary to assemble a OEXA scanning system at
a customers site, and to assure that the system is operating within LUNAR's
specifications and in compliance with applicable Federal and State regulations.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees performing installation of a DEXA scaoning
system.
RESPONSIBILITY
LUNAR Corporation maintains a staff of individuals specifically trained to:
a. properly install a scanning system.
b. instruct operators at the cust?mers site in the safe and proper use
of the system.
c. instruct the customer's Radiation Safety Officer in the required

device specific radiation safety information as found in the Operator
Training Outline.
ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
DXAP0001 OPX Arm Grounding Brush Installation
DXAP0012 DEXA External Options Installation
UNCON.TROllED DOCUMENT
DXAP0004 DEXA Installation Report Vtgrrfy Latest Revision
DXAP0008 DPX-Series Installation Tes~ Procedures Before Using
DXAP0009 Source/Detector Alignment
DXAP0010 DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation
DXAP0011 DPX-IQ Arm Grounding Brush Installation
DXQC0022 Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
SYS_INST System I nsta.lJation Record
SYS HSTO System Change History
"'--' .
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT

This document contains confidential or proprnstary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information therein Is to be reproduced. distributed,
used or dlsdOHd. either In whole or In part, except as apeclflcaJly authorized by lulUIt' Corp.
REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
PROCE:DURES
1. PREPARATION
A. The Installation Itinerary indicates the appropriate software, user

documentation and hardware configuration for the system to be installed.
Software shipped with the system should be labeled with the appropriate
system number.
B. Begin the installation by filling out the initial information on the DPX-Series
Installation Report.
2. EQUIPMENT CHECK
A. Upon arrival at the customer's site, verify all of the equipment listed on the
packing slip has arrived. If there is evidence any equipment has been
damaged in shipment, notify the LUNAR Customer Service Department
immediately. Fill out the System Identification section of the Installation
Report. Verify all compliance labels are affixed to the system are legible,
and completely filled out:
I. controller label attached to the computer.
II. WARNING label by the

., scan table's
.
main power switch .
III. system, high voltage "'power supplies (2), tube head assembly,
collimator assembly and British Type B labels on the foot end panel
of scanner.
IV. Caution Radiation label on front of scan arm and computer

keyboard.
V. laser compliance label on top of scan arm.
VI. Laser Aperture label on detector holder.
If labeling is incomplete, contact LUNAR Customer Service.
3. SCAN TABLE ASSEMBLY AND TUBE HEAD MOUNTING
A. Remove table assembly from crate (International and airfreighted

domestic systems) and 'position in' room so the back of the scanner is
accessible (in order to install the arm).
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 2 of 12

This document ccmtalns confidential or proprietary Infonn.ltion of Lunar ~. Neither the document nor the Infonnation therein '- to tM reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either In whole or In part, except .. apectflcally authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWNAR"DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0003 I REV: G I DATE: 11/10/97 I CO: 4501
B. Unlock the end panels and remove them by hinging them down and
sliding them toward the front of the scanner (toward the rear of the
scanner for DPX-IQ).
NOTE: Note that all panels are grounded with green/yellow wires with
protective earth labels (p/n 17231) near the connection points. For
safety reasons, it is imperative that these connections be re-
established when the panels are re-attached. Each connection should
have its own protective earth label and should only be rT,ade with a
green/yellow cable. If this is not the case, notify the Lunar Customer
Service Department.
C. Remove table top (four #1 0-32 screws from the underside, or from the
upper rim channel on the scanner frame) and back panel (four 1/4-28
screws and five #10-32 screws) from the table assembly.
D. Unlock both ends of the front door and carefully swing it down. Remove
the upper front panel by removing the two screws holding it to the front
legs and lift it upward and off. For IQ systems, remove the upper front rail
by removing the phillips head screws.
E. Remove the arm assembly from its crate. Remove the high voltage cable
trough (four screws) and the front longi~udinal carriage (three flathead
screws) from the arm. Slide the rollers·on the front longitudinal carriage
onto the front longitudinal track located on the frame assembly. Keep the
carriage as far as possible towards the head end of the table assembly.
Separate the Longitudinal Drive Cable at the rear of the scanner, being
careful not to lose the attached ground cable. You will have to loosen the
jam nut before the turnbuckle. Tape the two ends and the k)wer cable
slack to the frame so it is out of the way and will not be broken when the
arm is hung.
F. If you wish to have an extra hand hold, remove the arm's back cover
panel by removing the phillips head machine screws.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Pa!)e 3 of 12

This document c;ontalns confI~ or propt1eWy information of Lunar Corp. Nelther the document nor the Infonnatlon thef"eln Is to be reprod~ dlatrIbuted,
~ed or disclosed, either In ~e or In part. except .. speclflcally authorizitd by Lunar Corp.
REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
G. Clip the wire-tie that is holding the source carriage to the back of the arm.
Also, remove the two lower adjustable wheels from the rear longitudinal
carriage plate using 2-7/16" wrenches. At the head end of the table
where the cutout in the rear trough is, hold the arm upright and position
the arm's lower transverse rail through the back of the table. Lift the arm
and hang the four wheels of the rear longitudinal carriage onto the upper
longitudinal extrusion (this is easier if you tilt the front of the arm slightly
downward). Be careful not to damage longitudinal and transverse belts.
NOTE: DPX- a arms must be carefully lifted over their longitudinal carriage as
they have no column extending to the floor.
The rear longitudinal carriage must NOT be bent (see illustration, next
page). Have someone then balance the arm in an upright position while
you slide the front longitudinal carriage into position and attach it to the
end of the lower transverse extrusion.* Then re-attach the two adJustable
wheels to the rear carriage and adjust them using two 7/16 wrenches and
a 9/16 wrench.
The scan arm on the DPX series scanners is supported by a series of

concentric (stationary) and eccentric (adjustable) bearing rollers 0J
wheels). The load of the arm is carried primarily be the concentric rollers.
The eccentric rollers are used to stabilize and position the arm, and to
adjust the free play in the mounting of the arm.
~.
By rotating the adjustable bushing on its mounting bolt, the clearance

between the wheel and the track can be adjusted. Normal adjustment is
obtained by rotating the eccentric bushing until the wheel can just be
tumed against the track by hand. If the bushing is overtightened it can ·
exert a force greater than the load rating of the longitudinal drive system,
causing the slip clutch to release or the belt to jump teeth.
Reconnect the longitudinal drive cable after the arm is secured. Be sure
to include ground cable in assembly. TIghten ground cable ring terminal
between turnbuckle and jam nut.
*00 not tighten screws until the transverse belt is run onto the pulleys.

This document contains confldential or proprietary lnfonnation of Lunv Corp. Nefther the document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, dlstrtbut.d.
used or disclosed, efther In wtlole or In part, except . . speclne&.lly authorized by Lunv Corp.
REV:G DATE: 11/10/97 [ CO: 4501
3 2 1
Long Column
Short Column
Figure 1
H. Re-attach the high voltage cable trough to the front and rear longitudinal
carriages.* Then unbolt the tube head from the tube head shipping
bracket and attach the tube head to the source carriage, using the
Belleville washers at the top and the tube head tilt bar at the bottom (use
the same hardware used to attach the tube head to the shipping bracket).
Put the hardware back on the tube head the same way it ca.me off.
Remove the shipping bracket from the pan (four bolts and nuts) and
reattach it to the pan, with one bolt and nut, laying it down flat. Attach the
other 3 bolts and nuts to the mounting bracket. This is done for
transporting the Tube Head in the Mure should the scanner be moved.
* Run transverse belts onto pulleys. Tighten the 3 flathead screws which attach the
front longitudinal carriage to the arm's lower transverse extrusion. Re-check the
adjustment of the eccentric wheels.
I. Mount the OMI board on the end of the arm. Be sure it is properly
adjusted so that the wheel between the slots fully blocks thE~ infra-red
beam of the transducer. As the wheel rotates, each wheel slot should be
aligned with the centerline of the transducer window. Also Attach the Arm
Grounding Brush and the Arm Slot Cover if applicable (see DXAP0001,
DXAP0010, DXAP0011, and DXAP0012).
CAUTION
Throughout the following steps, wire ties will be used. Do not snu~J them too
tightly, as damage to the cables will result.
Do not apply power to any of the electronics until connections havte been checked
at least twice for accuracy.
Do not connect or disconnect any wires with power applied to system.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Pau e 5 of 12
This document contains confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information themn Is to b• ...produced, dlstl1buted,
used or disclosed, elther In whole or In part, except .. apeclflcaJly authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWNAll" DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0003 REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
J. Check to see that a 20-amp or greater service is supplied to the room. It

must be dedicated to the systenl.
K. Use p'hase tester to assure outlet is wired properly.
L. Cut the wire-tie that is holding the black cable track to the +26VDC power
supply.. Attach the cable track (cables will be protruding) to the rear
longitudinal carriage plate using the bolt which threads into the tab of the
carriage. This bolt will have to be removed first, so remove the nut from
the end of the bolt, and remove the bolt. Move the end of the cable track
into position and insert the bolt from the back side, through the (outer) tab
and the cable track, and into the threaded (inner) tab. Do not over
tighten; the cable track should still be able to pivot. Install the lockwasher
over the end of the bolt and fasten snugly with the nut. For the DPX-IQ,
the cable track attaches to the rear longitudinal carriage bracket using (2)
10-32 x 1/2 SHeS.
M. Then neatly separate the following/groups of cables:
0111
Caw.
Figure 2
I. a stiff red cable which goes to the transverse Centent (top side of
the high voltage cable trough),
II. a small gray cable which goes to the transverse motion detector
from the bulkhead.
III. a large black wrapped bundle which is connected to the tube head,
and

Thl. document cantuln. confldentlal or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either In wflole or In part. except .. apoctfIcally authorized by Lunar Corp.
Wl3UC DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0003 REV:G DATE: 11/10/97 I CO: 4501
IV. four cables (one small coaxial, a green/yellow ground cable;-and a

cable bundle with two Molex connectors) which go to the bulkhead.
N. Run.. t.he longitudinal belt onto its idler pulleys. Lay the red cable (see
paragraph 3.M.1. above) to the Centent (make sure red cable is routed
ab?ve longitudinal drive belt and on top of the high voltage cable trough)
and make connections. Also hook up the transverse motor ~,ires (on top
of high voltage cable trough and above longitudinal belt) to the Centent in
the proper config uration (see below).
[ CENTEN T CN014
POWER SUPPLY GND. L
Figure 3
-- - - - -
--- - . -- ~ - ---~- ...
There are three transverse motor types that can be used with DEXAI scanners.
When replacing a transverse stepper motor, refer to the following tables for
proper motor configuration.
CAUTION: If a transverse stepper motor is not wired properly, it may staN or cause
other motion errors.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT PagE~ 7 of 12

This document contains confidential or propn.tary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information thereln Is to be ~ dlstr1buted,
used or dlsclOHd, either In whole or In part, except as apecffically authorized by Lunar Cofp.
IWNAR· DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0003 REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
Wiring Contlguration _ ~-"::"" '''':>'o . ~ ..•. _~ _ ••
Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior Motor VE:.·'>(,T~
OINK - 02C Parallel Serial, add Resistor* Serial, add Resistor*

OINK - E Parallel Serial, add Resistor* Serial, add Resistor*
OINK .. F . Serial Serial Serial
~ D l (~ \~ ~~ 50<14/. \~ I'
*The re~I.~tor to be ~d. ded\ IS 47 kQ bhtween
#' ·c~ ;{ souA f l pins 11 and 12 on the transverse Centent.
For Serial c:onfiguration-------~

//~. "'"
,/ ". \
Centent Pin #/ Oriental Motor \ AMP Motor Superior Motor \/[XTAI
_ _.,....J
3 f.1-/4SF A Red R(V

. ) A. r..~ ') ,f;~.-u:.:.'Z)
I
i f~'" Red Red VI(
4 I (j i Blue ;
; Yellow RedlWhite 11z
I
5 '/
v Green ;
./ Black Green - vfl

6 ;',. !) Black \ /
.-'
.-'
Orange GreenlWhite 111'
. / ' .'
For Parallel Configuration
Centent Pin # Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior Motor

3 Red Not Possible Not Possible
4 White Not Possible Not Possible
5 Yellow '" Not Pbssible Not Possible
6 Black Not Possible Not Possible
Wire-tie the red cable and the motor cable to the high voltage cable
trough.
P. Lay the small gray cable (see paragraph 3.M.I!. above) in place along the
inside of the high voltage cable trough and connect it to the transverse
,/ OMI (Optical Motion Indicator) board.

, ... ~, .
Route the four cables (see paragraph 3.M.IV. above) along the
longitudinal carriage bracket, to the bulkhead bracket and wiretie the
cables in place to the two anchor positions on the rear longitudinal
carriage. The cable should not be strained when the armis at the head ...
and foot ends of the scanner. Connect the LEMO coaxial cable and the''''
Molex connectors lat1eled "Bulkhead 1'f and "Bulkhead 2" to the
appropriate bulkhead connector. Connect the green/yellow ground cables
to the rear carriage near the protective earth label (p/n 17231). This label
must be in place and only green/yellow wires may be attached near it.
I
r'--"'"

This document conulns confidential or propnetary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. NeithM th4I document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced. distributed,
used or disclosed, elthM In whole or In part, except as specffically authoctzed by Lunar Corp.
REV:G DATE: 11/10/97 ICO:4501
R. Anchor the tube head bundle (see paragraph 3.M.1I1. and illustration) to
the high voltage cable trough. There are four tie down locations toward
the rear of the trough panel. The tube head bundle should be tied down
first by itself in such a way as to create an arch as it leaves the cable
track. This is to allow play when the arm moves to the foot end of the
table. Tie the OMI cable on the head end of the high voltagle cable trough
using the two tie downs and tying to the four wire ties, securing the tube
head bundle. Tie the OMI cable to the tube head bundle an additional
time near the bulkhead. Tie to High Voltage bundle, also between trough
and bulkhead. Secure all cables such that they do not contact the
transverse motor (it gets quite hot).
S. Assure that all cables and bundles lie neatly, do not bend sharply, and are
securely in place. Wireties should be placed where provision is made
(anchors mounted to frame); wireties should also be used to neatly
bundle wires. DO NOT over tighten the wireties.
T. Re-check all electrical connections made. Check for bindin!~ as the arm is
moved to the extreme comers of the table.
U. Re-attach the back panel being sure to reconnect the green/yellow ground
wire near the protective earth label (p/n 17231). Move the scan table to
its final position in the room, with six to eight inches between the wall (2 to
3 inches minimum) and the bpck of the ·arm.
.. '"
V. Unscrew the casters from the borlom of the legs and replace them with
glides. Store the casters inside the scanner in the front trough behind the
door.
w. Level the scan table by placing a torpedo level alternately on the front,
rear, and sides of the frame and adjusting the glides to mak,e the table
level. Once the table has been leveled, it must not be moved.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Pane 9 of 12

This document contains confidential Of proprletasy Information of Lunar Corp. Netther the document not the Infonnatlon thentin is to be reproduced, distributed,
tned Of dlsclo&ed, etther In whole Of In part, except U IpedflcaJly authorized by Lu""r Corp.
ILUNAR· DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0003 REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
x. Move the arm to the foot end of the table assembly, near the access hole
in the main frame . The longitudinal drive cable passes through the front
and rear parts of the mainframe twice, creating an "upper" and a "lower"
longitudinal drive cable. Attach longitudinal ground cable to clamp via
clamp screw. You will have to remove (and reinstall) the screw to do so.
Place the upper rear longitudinal drive cable into the clamp on the
longitudinal carriage keeping the turnbuckle on the head end of the clamp.
Move drive cable relative to clamp so as to take up any slack in the
ground cable. Tighten the clamp. Place the lower front drive cable in the
clamp mounted on the front longitudinal carriage. Verify the arm is
perpendicular to the centerline of the table and that this is the natural
position (Le., no force is necessary to maintain this position). Then tighten
the front clamp, accessing it through the hole in the left side of the
mainframe's top strut.
Y. Check to see each printed circuit board is firmly mounted and properly
connected.
Z. Check the other electrical assemblies to make sure they are firmly
mounted and properly connected.
AA. Before applying power to the scanner connect one lead of an ohmmeter
to the ground lug of the scanners AG..power cord. Connect the other lead
to the detector ground screw: The measured resistance shall be less than
10 ohms. If not, check all electrical.connections and remeasure. If
continuity cannot be achieved, contact the LUNAR Service Department.
AB. Determine the regional AC line levels by setting a meter for AC voltage
measurement and at least 250 VAC full scale. Carefully measure the line
voltage at the outlet.
I. Verify the voltage specified on the fuse rating label near the power
supply isolation transformer agrees with the measured voltage.
Check the scanner wiring at the AC input. Verify the wiring at the
isolation transformer is correct (Le. the "secondary" wires are
attached to the side of the transformer with two terminals marked 0
and 115, and that the "primary" wires are attached to the
appropriate input terminals for the regional AC conditions). Verify
the white and black wires from the fuse blocks go to the correct
10caHohs on the terminal strip, and that the shorting blocks are in
their correct position for the regional AC line voltage (see drawings
for ECO 931 in section 7.C. of the Service Manual)

This document contains confidential 01' proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein .. to be reproduced, dJatr1buted,
used or dls.ctOHd, either In whcHe or In part, OJ[cept a. specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
REV:G DATE: 11/10/97 I CO: 4501
II. Verify U21 on the SBC is labeled "DPL BOOT 1.0" for nOrilO
systems and uDPL BOOT 2.4" for IQ systems.
AC. Install any external options (see DXAP0002).
4. COMPUTER AND CABLE SETUP
A. Remove all components from the boxes and instruct the customer to save
the boxes, if possible, in case a component needs to be returned for
service.
B. Position the computer, monitor, and printer on the console table. Remove
any shipping insert that may be in the A: drive.
C. Connect the monitor, keyboard, mouse, and printer to the computer. The
computer, monitor and keyboard shall be placed at least 1 rTleter from the
side of the table. Feed the supplied paper into the printer.
D. Position any optional peripherals and connect them by cable to the

computer.
E. Using the cables supplied, connect the scan table to the conlputer. Make
sure that all 110 cables are fastened to their respective units (by screws or
clamps). The 110 cable on the scan table connects at the P1' connector of
the SSC.
5. POWERING UP THE SYSTEM
A. Plug each of the AC power cables into the outlet strip on the underside of
the console. Make sure that the AC cable from the CPU is first plugged
into a "surge suppressor plug" before insertion into the outlet strip.
B. Plug the outlet strip into the wall outlet that was checked previously.
Verify the outlet strip is on.
C. Turn on the scan table, COrTlputer, monitor, printer and any peripherals, in
that order. Use the Setup program (Ctrl-Alt-Enter) to ensure Serial2 and
Parallel ports are correctly set to Auto. The non-cached address region
must be changed to START=O, LENGTH=1024.
6. SOFTWARE VERIFICATION I DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
A. Verify that all Scan Types on the Software Order form can be accessed.
S. Press Alt-S and observe the system number programmed into the
software. Verify it matches the system number recorded on the disk.

This document contains confidential 0( proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. NeitMf the document nor the Infonnation thenln Is to b41 reproduced, distributed,
used 0( disclosed, either In whole or In part, except u spectfleally authorized by Lunar Corp.
ILUNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0003 REV: G DATE: 11/10/97 CO: 4501
C. Load the LUNAR Diagnostic software. Insert the LUNAR ools Diskette.
The version number of the System Diskette and Tools Diskette must
match exactly. Type:
a:\diags\diagnos load c:\xxxxx <Enter>
xxxxx is the directory where software was loaded. This is essential for
DPX-IQ diags to operate properly.
7. TUBE HEAD ALIGNMENT
A. Align the tube head as instructed in the Procedure DXAP0009, Source-

Detector Alignment. The arm hood cover may be left off until after the
limit switches have been verified.
8. RECORDS
A. (U.S. Installs Only) - Completely fill out form FDA 2579 - Report of
Assembly of a Diagnostic X-Ray System. Leave the appropriate copy
with the customer and return the other three copies to LUNAR. These
forms must be submitted to the federal and state agencies within 15 days
of the install. It is imperative they are completely filled out and returned to
the Customer Service Department as quickly as is possible.
B. (U.S. Insta"s Only) - Have the customer sign the delivery receipt and the
Software License agreement.
C. Complete the System Installation Record (SYS_INST) and insert it in the

foot end of the scan table, along with the System Change History form
(SYS_HIST).
D. Complete the Installation Report; this is submitted to the Applications

department upon return to LUNAR. After review, this report becomes part
of the systems Device History Record. The portions of the Insta"ation
Report referred to in this document should be filled out at this time. The
remainder of the Insta"ation Report will be completed during procedures
DXAP0008 and DXAP0007. Refer to document DXRAOOOO as needed.

This document contains confidential or proprieury Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the dOCUment nor the Information therein Is to be reproduced. dlstr1btrted,
used or disclosed, either In whole or In part. except as spec/flcally authorized by Lunar Corp.
Appendix 6. B DEXA Split Frame Installation Procedure

Appendix 6.B
DEXA Split Frame Installation Proce,dure
Work Instructions [DXAP0005]
~'.
,1"
This appendix contains the latest work instructions for moving a DEXA SY~~~h openings
that would not be large enough for the scanner to go through whole. PI.~~UIIY read and
fo~low the steps described in the "PROCEDURES" section of the do~~~en performing
this procedure. ;_ ~~,,~, '"''I'
,)\~~,*
NOTE: The revision of this document is current ¥;SJ~ime of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Up ~ '''~''' '_ 'FIowever, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at a .' ,,' without notice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically ~. ,.. f9!1'l1butors of any changes anci provide copies
of the latest revisions in/ut~~nual Updates.
/Iff.ib;J,IJ'v for ensuring that all copies of the SE~rvice Manual

,..,_...",.. documents.
DEXA Split Frame Installation Procedure Appendix 6.8

REV: B DA TE: 5/5/9'7 co: 4149
TITLE: DEXA Split Frame Installation Procedure
DOCUMENT TYPE: Work Instruction
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire
DEPT. APPROVAL: QA APPROVAL:
PURPOSE
This procedure is for making possible to move a DEXA system through openings that
otherwise would not be large enough for the scanner to go through whole.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all situations where it is necessary or more convenient.
RESPONSIBILITY
All personnel installing or performing moves should be trained in this procedure.
PROCEDURES
1. Remove the two end doors.
2. Remove the table top and back panel. UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT

Verify Latest RE~vision
3. Drop the front door. Before Using
4. Remove the front panel.
5. Close and lock the front door.
6. Mark the position of the longitudinal away limit switch (at the foot end) and
remove.
7. Mark the positions of the longitudinal idler and drive brackets on the frame of the
scanner either with a pencil or by scratching the paint around them. This will aid
in repositioning them when the frame is reassembled. Remove the upper bolt
from the brackets and push each bracket to the side (the brackets ~'ill pivot on
the lower bolt). Secure the brackets to the frame in this position with electrical
tape so they do not swing freely when the lower half of the scanner is moved.
8. Remove the eight (8) 5/16" hex head bolts from the frame legs. There are two
bolts per leg located about half way up each leg of the frame.

Controlled Document
DATE: 5/5/97 co: 4149
9. Now the two halves of the scanner may be separated. Two people are required
to lift the head and foot ends simultaneously taking the upper half off of the lower
half. The upper section is much lig hter than the lower half (with the Electronics
Mounting Chassis). Take care not to twist or bend either half of the frame as this
may cause alignment problems.
10. Reassemble the frame in reverse order. Use the marks on the frame to
reposition the longitudinal brackets, longitudinal away limit switch and verify that
the longitudinal belt runs properly on its pulleys.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 2 of2

Controlled Document
Appendix6.C Source-Detector Alignment Procedure

Appendix 6. C
Source-Detector Alignment Procedure
Work Instructions [DXAP0009] ,
~
This appendix contains the work instructions for aligning a DEXA scanner.~~~\arefully ~.\ ~.,.
'''iT ..
read and follow the steps described in the "PROCEDU RES" section of ~.~ent when
performing this procedure. . ~,·~""'it~~·~
.,
~" ~'"~
~(...~j~~.. ~~
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of ' ~. :;l" of release of the last
"'"
Service Manual or Service Manual Upd ~ ,.","" r, this is an 'uncontrolled'

copy and is subject to change at any tt. . . :.J'Mout notice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify ~.,'. .. :_"~ drs of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in futu . ~i,rvpdates.
~e~suring that all copies of the Service Manual

documents.
Source-Detector Alignment Procedure Appendix 6.C

IUIR DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0009 REV: 0 DATE: 7/25/97 CO: 4239
TITLE: Source - Detector Alignment
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the necessary steps to check and align the source-detector
assembly of DEXA Densitometers.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to all employees installing and servicing DEXA systems.
Associated document: DEXA Installation Procedures.
RESPONSIBILITY
Technicians who align DEXA systems are responsible for following these 'work
instructions. The Production, Applications, and Service Managers are responsible for
ensuring all DEXA systems are aligned per these work instructions and that personnel
performing these alignments are adequately trained.
PROCEDURES
1. Turn the scan table off and remove the tabletop by unscrewing the four 10/32 x
3/8 S.H.C.S. screwed in from the bottom of the tabletop. Remove screws and
hinge the hood cover up. Remove the screws on the left hood side panel. For
DPX-IQ, remove the lower arm shroud
2. Remove the detector collimator and lead cup (if applicable), and photomultiplier
tube. Insert an upper alignment bushing into the detector holder, keeping it in
place with the detector chuck nut or service nut (DPX-lQ).
UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT
Verify latest Revision
Before Using

this document contains confldentla' or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information therein Is to b4, reproduced, distributed,
used or a lselos&<l, .,tn.,
In wtlole or In part, except .. specifically authoozw by Lunar Corp.
I
LUNAR'DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0009 REV:D DATE:7~5ffi7 co: 4239
3. Point to point alignment
Remove the source collimator and lead wrap (shipments after May, 1997 have
the collimator already removed and packaged separately). Slide the dial
indicator onto the lower alignment rod, and attach the lower alignment rod base
to the top of the Tube Head (see drawing, Dial Indicator Setup, above). Put the
upper a.lignment rod into the upper alignment bushing so that the points of the
two rod can be easily lined up. Using the tilt bar and the upper spring loaded
7/16 nut, align the two points on alignment rods so that they are inline in the
transverse and longitudinal planes. Note: The tilt bar adjustn1ent screw is
unidirectional, i.e. tightening it tilts the Tube Head toward the front; loosening it
has no effect (see drawing, Tilt Bar Operation, at right). So if the Tube Head is
tilted too far toward the front, it must be repositioned toward the rear and brought
forward again. At this time tighten the lower two nuts that mount the Tube Head,
and the nut that is located on the tilt bar adjustment screw.
0 C
0
FOOT L
U
..- END
M
r'l N
____Tilt Bar
Adjustment Screw _~I'---"
Side View Looking from End View Looking from

Front to Rear Head to Foot
Figure 1
4. At this point remove all the alignment tools. Install the lead wrap and source
collimator on the Tube Head. Install the Detector (WITH POWER OFF!!!), lead
cup and detector collimator (DPX and DPX-L). Install the film holder into the
detector collimator rather than the brass collimator insert. For DPX-IQ, install the
detector (with power off), lead cup, service nut,. and film holder. Qround the PMT
at the threaded hole on the front side of the detector holder. Note that the
protective earth label (p/n 17231) should be present wherever a green/yellow
ground wire is attached to a chassis piece. Notify Lunar Customer Service
- Department if this is not the case.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT . Page 2 of 4

This document contains confidential Of" propri6tary Information of lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either In whole Of" In part. except as specifically authorized by lunar Corp.
WNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0009 REV:D DATE:7~5ffi7 CO: 4239
5. Turn the scanner and computer on, from the <C:\LUNAR> prompt, load the
diagnostic software by inserting the Tools Diskette into the A: drive and typing:
a:\diags\dia~nos load c:\lunar [enter].
NOTE: The word "lunar" may be substituted for other working directories such as
"ped".
Type DIAGS [enter] to enter the software.
6. Note: Refer to section IX.A.2 in DXAP0003 for instructions on Tube Head warm
up before performing this step. Then insert a piece of film into the holder (large
number "57" on film should face up) and take an initial picture using the DIAGS
static counter program. For the DPX and DPX-L use 76 kV, 750 mA, 30 repeats,
and large collimator (leave all other parameters at defaults). This picture is your
starting point for final alignment. HINT: If the collimator is manually positioned
to minimize counts when sampling through the film holder, this should center the
beam and minimize time and film usage. Sample without a piece a film until the
counts are minimized, then insert a piece of film and expose for at least 30
repeats.
7. Follow the directions on the film holder for developing the film (move the lever to
'L', insert the film, move lever to 'pI, remove film, wait 20 seconds, peel apart) If,
when the film is developed, the beam spot is not in the exact center, adjust the
collimator position:
A. Determine from the images on the film which of the two collimator
jackscrews must be adjusted and the amount of adjustment necessary.
One complete turn of the jackscrew equals 4 mm of correction on the film.
B. As much as is possible, prevent the collimator from moving as the

mounting screws are tightened. Take another picture to verify the
alignment after tightening. Repeat the last two steps until the center of
the beam and the crosshairs image match to within 2 mm.
8. Take one more film, positioning the tube head in the four corners of the table and
in the center, moving the film in the film holder to mimic the location on the table
and making an exposure at each of the five locations. Do a large and small
collimator shot in the middle of the film.

This document contalnl confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information therein II to l)it reproduced, distributed,
used or dlIJcloD(;d, althor In whole or In part, e~ c; ept u specifically .lrthorind by bunar Corp,
WNAR DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0009 REV: 0 DATE: 7/25/97 CO: 4239
9. Examine the four corner pictures and the center shot. All the crosshairs should
be visible in all 5 spots and be no more than 2 mm in either direction from center.
The only criteria for the small collimator shot is that the crosshairs should be
visible at all. If these conditions are not met, it may be necessary to redo the
runout procedures (0 and E) and make adjustments to the scanner. If, after
adjustments, the pictures are not satisfactory, contact the LUNAR Customer
Service Department.
10. Label the film with the systenl number, the date, and the relative location of
home position. Coat the film using the chemical sponge supplied with the film.
Save this film and include it with the rest of the installation paperwork.
11. Remove the film holder from the detector collimator and insert the detector
collimator insert in its place. For DPX-IQ, replace the service nut with the
detector chuck nut. Re-install the lower arm shroud. For safety reasons, it is
imperative that protective earth connections be re-established when re-installing
certain components such as panels or the PMT. Each connection should have
its own protective earth label and should only be made with a green/yellow cable.
If this is not the case, notify the Lunar Customer Service Department.
12. Confirm the alignment by running an Air Matrix scan. For new installations this is
the nE~xt step in the install procedure, DXAP0003. Note: Remember that the
Detector must be peaked prior to performing an Air Matrix.
13. Replace the tabletop.

This document contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or disclosed, either In whole or in part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
Appendix 6.0 DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation

~AR® DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
~----------------------~--------------------------~~~~~
ppendix 6.D
lPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation
Work Instructions [DXAP001 O] ~t.
*,
~~ ~,."
'.~,~
"
s appendix contains work instructions for installing the arm grounding ~~~ifle DPX-IQ.
lTE: The~vision of this doc~ment is current as of the tim~~~se of the last

ServIce Manual or ServIce Manual Update, H~~~r~S IS an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time wit . _._~e, The LUNAR Service
, ,~~~ ~ y changes and provide copies
Department will periodically notify dist1Sn'b
of the latest revisions in future Manual ~'res,
~ -'. <;~.
The distributor is responsib/~ G;1ng

that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the curren~~ments.
lPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation Appendix 6.D

LUNAR-DOCUMENT 10: DXAPOO10 REV: 0 10ATE:7~om7 1 co: 4326
TITLE: DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation
-
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications WRIITE N BY: Scott Shropshire
DEPT. APPROVAL: 01Jrltlft
(/
QA APP ROVAL: fl. -;~~-{/
PURPOSE
To document the DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Applications Manager is responsible for ensuring that this work instruction is current and
that all people who perform this process are trained.
PROCEDURES
DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation
The arm slot cover must be installed for TOV G.S. compliance after the scan arm is attached.
1. Insert the lower spring guide screws (6-32x%" flathead) into the lower spring
guide (part number 1943 or 1848). The screw heads must go between the two
strips of felt on the inner sides of the guide. Slide the guide along the top edge
of the back panel until all the screw holes line up. Tighten the screws.
2. Line the upper spring guide (part number 1944 or 1847) up with the screw holes
in the back rail, slot down. Fasten the guide on with 10-32x%" screws and
lockwashers.
3. Insert a stainless steel strip spring (part Dumber 1839) into each of the end
canisters (part numbers 3560 and 3561 ) with each tab sticking out through the
side slot in each canister (see figures 1 and 2).
UNCONTROllED DOCUMENT
Verify latest Rev'rSron-
.
Before Using
,;
\
_______ ~~~:--------------------;:;-:--:--7--:7::=-- ~~~,~- ~
QUALlTY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 1 of 6

This document contains contAins confidentiAl or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information themln Is to be reproduced, distr1butl'd, IJl lKl
or dbcJ030d, Clithor In wnolCl or In part. eXGept as specifically authorlzfX1 by Lunar Corp.
LUNAR' DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0010 REV:D OATE: 7/28/97 CO: 4326
Head Canister
Head-End Cannistet
_____ PIN l560 -------.
o 0 .----- Stainless Steel Spring 0 0

PIN 1839
~
,/ .........
o0 o0
1 2
Figure 1
Foot Canister
~
o 0 o 0
o
~ ~
o0 o0
1 2
Figure 2

This document conalns conalns confidential or proprieary InfonNItion of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information therein Is to be reproduced, distributed, used
or disclosed, either In whole or In p.1Irt, except as specifically authcx1zed by Lunar Corp.
I LU ~R· DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0010 I REV: 0 I DATE: 7/28/97 I CO: 4326
4. Using 8 screws (1 0-32x3/8") with washers (#10) and lock washers (#10) attach
head and foot canisters, with slots down, loosely to the locations shown in figure
4, then pull the spring brackets out of the canisters. The springs should now be
in the guides. Tighten the canisters onto the scanner.
Figure 4
aUALlTY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 3 of 6

Thla do<:ument contaln$ contalna confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Infonnatlon therein la to be reproduced, dlatr1txJted, used
or discloSed , GllIiM In wt\Olc Of In p.ilrt, CIl(tcpt as .peclfi~lIy luthOftZed t>y Lunar corp.
LUNAR- DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0010 I REV: 0 I DATE: 7/28/97 I CO: 4326
5. The foot end strip spring should now be ready to be attached to the arm. Extend
the spring until it reaches the foot side arm spacer (part number 1856). Then
attach the spring bracket to the arm spacer with two 8-3x3/8" button head screws
with #8 lock washers (see figure 5).
". Arm Spaoef Block
i---~/
Scan
'
'' .
Arm
Figure 5

This document contains contains confidential or proprietary Inf~tion of Lunar Corp. Nelther the document nor the Information therein Is to be reproduced, distributed, used
or disclosed, either In whole or In part. except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
LUNAR· DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0010 I REV: 0 I DATE: 7/28/97 I CO: 4326
6. The Arm Slot Block (pIn 3847) is normally assembled to the Arm at Luna~ If not,
attach the Arm Slot Block to the head side of the extrusion near the column (see
figure 6). Next attach the head end strip spring bracket to the arm slot block in
the same manner as above.
Figure 6

This document cooalns contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, distributed, used
or disclosed, either In whole or In part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar eofl'. .
LUNAR' DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0010 I REV: 0 I DATE: 7/28/97 I CO: 4326
Back Panel
:~II~C:
~Slotted holes
/ ~
Figure 7
NOTE: There must be at least 20mm of space between the column and
the canister covers when the ann is at its longitudinal limits.
7. Test the arm slot cover by running the scan arm from head to foot several times.
Verify that the arm slot spring does not bind or "ride out" of the grooves created
by the upper and lower spring guides. If necessary, raise or lower the back
panel of the scanner by loosening the screws holding the panel to the scanner
frame.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 6of6

Thb document conualn" contain. confidentJal or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Information therein I. to be reproduced, dlatributed, used
or disclosed, either In whole or In part, except as apedfically authorized by Lum:r Corp.
Appendix 6. E DPX-IQ Arm Grounding Brush Installation

j ,
Appendix 6.E
DPX-IQ Arm Grounding Brush Installation
Work Instructions [DXAP0011] _
.~~..,.
This appendix contains work instructions for installing the arm grOunding.bpJ~~e DPX-IQ.
~'1.,"~ ~~~,
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the time . '. ~ se of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Hope~ ., :~
..,'tiS an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time wjt~~e. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distri?~ . i'(':Why
' changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manua/~fes.
The distributorJs responsibJ" . . \ g t~at all copies of the SeNice Manual

are updated wIth the curren ' 9~ments.
DPX-IQ Ann Grounding Brush Installation Appendix 6. E

DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0011 REV: B DATE: 10122197 CO: 4504
TITLE: DPX-IQ Arm Grounding Brush Installation
PURPOSE
This procedure describes how to install the arm grounding brushes required for CE
compliance on DPX-IQ scanners after the scan arm is attached .
APPLICATION
This document applies toward the installation of all DPX-IQ systems.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Customer Support Manager is responsible for ensuring that this work instruction is
current and that all people who perform this process are trained. Personnel who perform
this task are responsible for following these instructions .
. ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
DXAP0003 - DPX-Series Installation Work InstruC?tions
Before Using

This document contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the Infonnatlon th....ln Is to be reproduced. distributed.
used or disclosed. either In whole or In part. except as apectflcally.uthorlzed by Lunar Corp.
REV: B DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4504
PROCE:DURES
1. Attach the grounding brushes (Lunar part number 3717) to the grounding brush
support (part number 3716) as in figure 1. Use the 6-32 3/8" screws, the #6 lock
washers, and the 6-32 lock nuts provided.
Brushes
~(p/n3717)
o Brush Support
(pIn 3716)
Figure 1
2. Locate the head end Arm Spacer (part number 1856) near the arm slot (see
figures 2 and 3). Attach the grounding brush support to the arm spacer (on the
foot side) with the button head screws and lock washers making sure that the
brushes are pointing up. Verify that both the brushes contact the bottom of the
back rail.
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 20f4

Thla document cent/lina c:on1"Idential or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. Netttt.r the doc:ument nor the infonnatJon therein la to be reproduc.d, dlatz1buted.
used or dladoaed, either In whole or In part, except .. ~Iy authorized by Lunar Corp.
REV: B DATE: 10/22197 I CO: 4504
I I
I
Figure 2
Head-End Arm Spacer,

Foot Side
Figure 3
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 30f4

This document contains confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of L.unar Cocp. Nefther the document nor the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used or dlsdoaed, eHher In whole or In part, except .. speclf\<:ally Mlthorized by Lunar Corp.
REV: B DATE: 10/22197 co: 4504
3. Verify that the brushes retain contact with the rail as the arm moves fran1 limit to
limit.
GENERATED RECORDS
None
':,,'

This doaJment contains" confidential Of" proprieury Information of Lunar ~. Nefthef" the document 00f" the Infonnatlon therein Is to be reproduced, distributed,
used Of" disd~. either In whole or In part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
Appel tdix-6.-F DEXA Extemai Optlons instatiation

! I
i
Appendix 6.F
DEXA External Options Installation
Work Instructions [DXAP0012] .
'\.
This appendix contains work instructions for installing the arm slot cover;~-\~-IQ.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the ti~'

, ~'\" ' •. ~~se of the last
Service Manual or Service Marwal Update. HOle~~sis an 'uncontrol/ed'
copy and is subject to change at any time wit~ViOIfce. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distribf..~~y changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manu~1l!s.
The distributor is responsibt . ' ~ffng that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the curren . o~~nts.
DEXA External Options tnsta11ation Appendix 6.F

~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0012 REV: B DATE: 5/16/97 CO: 4195
TITLE: DPX-Series External Options installation

! I
PURPOSE
This procedure specifies the methods used to install external options for a DPX-Series
system.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Customer Support Manager is responsible for ensuring that this work instruction is
current and that all people who perform this process are trained. Personnel who
perform this task are responsible for following these instructions.
PROCEDURES
New hardware must be added to the DPX for TOV GS mark compliance. This
hardware facilitates two important external safety options:
1. an external emergency stop switch, and

2. an external indicator for DPX x-ray generation.
Before Using

Controlled Document
LUNAJt DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0012 REV: B DATE: 5/16/97 CO: 4195
External Options
E-Stop and Indicator
Protective Earth IN & OUT

Line OUT
Neutral OUT External E-Stop Switch
Line IN (Optional)
I
~
,
. ...
Neutral IN r------r--,--....,---r----,.-----,
, V A2 I A2 I A1 · A2 I A2 I A1
o LED 0 LED
u. E-Stop
F9 F10 Line Neutral • r- --Jumper
Relay Relay
11 j 14 I 12 11 I 14 I 12
Figure 1
1. EMERGENCY STOP OPTION
A. The e-stop jun1per must be removed and a normally closed dry contact or
switch is wired in series with the system's e-stop circuitry. The external e-
stop must be a normally closed dry contact switch rated for 26 VDC or
greater and 1 amp or greater. Without external emergency stop, the e-
stop jurrlper must be inserted as indicated in the diagram above.
2. EXTERNAL INDICATOR OPTION
A. An external power source must be supplied by the customer. The voltage

and current are limited by the ratings of the line and neutral fuses
provided (Fuses with a lower amperage rating for a specific application
may be provided by the customer). The ratings of the factory fuses are
3.15A1250V. The external power source must be connected to the Line
and Neutral IN termihal blocks. The external indicator must be cGnnected
to the Line and Neutral OUT terminal blocks. A protective earth terminal
block is provided for connecting the power supply and indicator to Earth
Ground. F9 and F10 are fuses for the line IN and Neutral IN respectively.
With no external indicator, no external wiring is needed.

Controlled Document
WNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0012 REV: B DATE: 5/16/97 I CO: 4195
3. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
) I
A. Fasten the 6" DIN rail (3273) to the PEM nuts located on the pan using 2
I
I
8-32 X 3/8" screws each with a #8 flat washer and lock washer. Some
older systems may not have the PEM nuts on the pan . In that case, drill
two holes in the pan 5" apart as in figure 1.
100-------25"--------.:
5·'
o
+5i+121·12VPS
[SSl
o
~
Termnal Blocks
1 Relay I
~
D Terminal Block I
AC ENTRANCE
Figure 2
B. Cut the 4 5/8" piece of grommet (1029) in half. Place a small aillount of
cyanoacrylate based glue on the inside edge of the grommets and insert
around the edge of the 3/4" diameter holes. If these holes are not
present, one or both will have to be drilled. The location of each hole can
be seen in figure 1.
C. Connect the cable assembly (3682) to the solid state x-ray relay located
on the pan. Connect the black wire terminal ring to the (+) termlinal on the
solid state relay and the red wire terminal ring to the (-) terminaL Route
the cable from the solid state relay to the external options terminal block,
wire tying the cable to existing wires along the way. Insert the black wire
into A 1 of the line relay and the red wire into A2 of the neutral relay (see
figure 2).

Controlled Document
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0012 REV: B DATE: 5/16/97 co: 4195
D. For OINK Revision E and higher, connect cable 4339 to J27. RO~lte the.
cable from the OINK board to the external options terminal block, wire
tying the cable to existing wires along the way. Insert the cable ends into
the terminal block (see attached diagram).
For OINK revision 02C, locate the gray wire coming from J17 of the OINK
board. Cut the gray wire approximately two inches from the OINK board
connector. Strip 1/4" of insulation from both ends of the gray wire. Cut
the J connector off of cable 4339 and strip 1/4" of insulation from the black
and red wires. Cut the 1 1/2" piece of heat shrink tubing (5190) in half
and slide it onto the red and black wires. Solder the red wire end to a
gray wire end, twisting the two wires together before soldering; repeat for
the black wire end and the remaining gray wire end. Place the heat shrink
over the exposed wire.
E. Place the External options label (3680) on the pan. The label should be
placed in the opening to the upper left of the external option terminal block
assembly. Leave the data boxes on the label blank.
F. Secure all wires in place with wire-ties.
External Options
Terminal Block Assembly
BlK RED
Black
~. ----
E-Stop
F10 ~ Line Neutral -Jumper
Relay Relay
. RED BlK
Cable 4339
From OINK Board
Figure 3

Controlled Document
Appelldix6.<3 -oEXA tnstattation Test Procedures

DPX-IQ Service Manual Hev. E (3/98)
J I
I
I
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of iliJ/'ii of release of the last
SeNice Manual or SeNice Manual Upd ~~e" this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any ti ),. ~ .)1fJtout notice. The LUNAH SeNice
Department will periodically notify . ' .. ' drs of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in futup1:' fbpdates.
~'.;
The distributor is ~ensuring that all copies of the Service Manual

are updated with documents.
~~---------------------------------------------------------
DEXA instailation Test Procedures Appendix 6.G

- - - - lWNAR-f)()CttMENi1D:iJX-A13eooa·-----+-+\.
TITLE: DEXA Installation Test Procedures
DjQ CUMENT OWNER: Applications WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire
!
PURPOSE
This procedure details the tests required to be run on a DEXA system upon its initial
installation at a customer's site.
RESPONSIBILITY
All personnel performing installations of DEXA systems shall be trained on this procedure.
ASSOCIATED MATERIALS UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT

DXAP0003 - DEXA Installation Procedure Verify Latest Re'vision
DXAP0009 - Source-Detector Alignment Procedure Before Using
DXQC0022 - Aluminum Spine Phantom Procedure
PROCEDURES
These test procedures shall be performed following the assembly of the DPX-Series
scanner according to procedure DXAP0003 .
1. SYSTEM (QA) TESTS
A. kVp and mA Verification
I. To break in ALL DPX-Series scanners, the Tube Head slhould be

ramped up to its normal operating voltage very slowly. lise the
following procedure:
a. Using the static counter program from the Diagnostics

program, set the voltage to 41 kV and the current to 750~A.
b. Wait five minutes and increase the voltage by 5 k\/.
c. Repeat step b until 76 kV is reached.

Controlled Document
1LUNAR" DOCUMENT 10. DXAPOOOB I REV· D I DATE· 5/14/97 I CO: 4162.------f
I\, Use the DIAGS static counter program to verify the kV and rnA are
being properly set. Use the following parameters:
Test Point kV mA Limits

XORB TP1 76 750 0.74 - 0.76
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 1 3000 2.97 - 3.03
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 1 4750 4.70 - 4.80
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 2 3.760 -
3.840
XORB TP 6
NOTE: Make these measurements quickly! Running the tube head at

h~gh current for long periods of time will damage it!!!
B. Complete the Source/Detector Alignment procedure at this time according to

procedure DXAP0009. Retain the two final alignment (center shot and five
corners shot) photographs and return them with the install report.
C. Using the DIAGS software and the control panel positioning switches,
carefully move the scan arm to all areas of the table to check for binding
points. In particular: Tube head and solenoids must clear tabletop and
carriage bracket bolts. Collimator and shutter wiring should be correct and
wiretied so they do not catch on anything. Especially watch for binding while
the scan arm is moving to home position. The Molex connector of the
collimator assembly may hang up, causing the scanner to jerk when moving
off of the limit switch. Verify the collimator limit switches operate correctly.
Make sure the red, "SHUTTER OPEN" light illuminates when the shutter is
open.
D. Verify Limit Switch Positions
I. In the DIAGS software, Press F1 - Limit Switch Diagnostics. Press 2

- Set Limit Switches. NOTE: Be sure the Front Panel is attached
before verifying the limit switches. " ./ 11
~ '~''' I-: S 1Yle(~(fJ velzlf/(t]R ntJ Drc;..~C

d
,.' .. ... ,r •
r::,-c/- 'j'y)(j r ) 1Y\ J~ n.;PCv~/) ·

-' 9 ' ~.- , CtJ'fYJ Pfli1qr:::,:' l.(.
3 ! ,') nJ.'- I-U'~ t...r)17) f T
t!)
- j
~),!5
(
Tfl;lIJ.SA.6
~.,
' I
'~
•
.
-_/h'lrt:"'
1'/) I '1' 1\.....,;.....
q';) - -/," n" "~-6'VY 1
I U,- /..1 1--, .
G
.
, <'_
,
( ......
.,... , (/:.
(QJ1I')/r:>
.u71') 0/\ -'"
en'Y') 01 . .) //I
~t....1
n
..... f
_ /J ' -, /'1. t"""
/-://111 , .... ...r { ~ I , .
/
..,.~':.,:'" j'

Controlled Document
------II-LUNAR:.ae6BMEN1--1~ I REV: 0 I DATE" 5/~4/-9-1--~
II. Press/4 - Transverse Home. Place the "Home Position" jig in the
home corner. Press 2 - Verify Switch Position. Using the position
switches move the tube head so the large collimator lines up with the
r I
hole in the jig. Press Esc and the head will move to the transverse
home limit switch. The program counts the number of steps from
where the head was positioned to the limit switch, and verifies if in or
out of tolerance. Adjust the limit switch accordingly. And repeat
NOTE: 20 transverse steps =1 mm.

III. Press Esc. Select F1 - Longitude Home and repeat the above
procedure for the longitudinal home limit switch. Always do the two
home limit switches first.
NOTE: 10 steps longitudinally = 1 mm.

IV. Repeat the above procedures for the transverse and longitudinal
away limit switches. When finished, the arm hood cover and arm
back panel may be put back on.
E. Calibrations
I. Unpack the standard and verify that the serial number on the delivery
receipt and/or packing list matches the number stamped on the
standard. Record the serial number on the installation report .
II. At the C:>, type: CD\LUNAR
III. At the C:>\LUNAR prompt type:
DPX and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX, DPX+.

DPXL and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX-L
DPXALPHA and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX-Alpha.
DPXA and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX-A
DPXSFPLU and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX-SF or
DPX-Alpha SF.
or DPX and press <Enter> if the scanner is a DPX-IQ
IV. If this is a new system, the Database Maintenance screen will be

displayed. Create the database files by pressing F1-Create Missing
Files. Press <Home> to return to the Main Menu.
V. Setup the Printer, Default, and Reference Data options as

appropriate. Refer to the Operator's Manual.
Controlled Document
----II LUNAlR~eGliMENnO:-DXA~668---+--<1R~E---V:1Lt~ATE: 5/14/97 I CO~2
VI. From the Main Menu, press F3 to run a system calibration. Run one
(1) calibration. Verify that all QA tests, BMC and width values pass.
VII. After the calibration has been run, exit to DOS by pressing F10 from
the Main Menu.
VIII. Leave the calibration printout in the customer's QA History Binder.
NOTE: The following two tests should be run immediately following the QA.
If not, the scanner should be repeaked (either by running another
QA, or by performing a Peak in DIAGS) before doing them.
F. The AGS Test (Alurninum Wedge)
I. In DIAGS, select 4 - Static Counter. Set the voltage to 76 kV, current

to 150~, repeats to 20, To Printer option ON.
II. With nothing in the beam (except perhaps the tabletop), press Esc to
open the shutter. Take about 5 repeats, then begin to slide the
wedge into the beam (narrowest edge first). While sampling, slowly
push the wedge through the beam. Take about 10 repeats in the
wedge. This will leave five repeats with nothing in the beam at the
end.
III. After the shutter closes, the collected data will be printed. Examine
the printout. Note the high channel counts. At the repeat where the
high channel counts begin to decrease, the low channel should also
decrease. The low channel should then steadily decrease for all other
samples taken through the wedge.
NOTE: The sign of a failing AGS Test is where the low channel counts
decrease, then increase brie'ny, then decrease again. See the AGS
Test in the Service Manual for more information.
G. Air Matrix
I. In DfAGS (with table top off), select 3 - Air Matrix. Choose 1 -

Perform A Scan. Leave all settings as they are. Note the filename.
This will have to be entered to analyze the data (filename format: XM.
followed by the 4-digit system number followed by MO.01A.
Subsequent scans have extensions 018, 01 C, etc.) Press Esc to
continue.

Controlled Document
ILUNAR;'eGtlMEN'f--tB~---+I~RElI~ I DATE: 5/W$J1--r: 4162 j-
II. Remove the detector collimator and replace it with an a1tenuation
insert or tape a 0.25 inch piece of aluminum over the detector (over
on top of the collimator) to reduce the intensity of the beam.
I i
I
III. Press Esc to beg .in the scan. The scan will take approx. 30 minutes to
complete. NOTE: If anything passes through the beam during this
test, IT Will FAll.
IV. Analyze the Air Matrix scan and print the overall results. All
categories must pass. If NOT, check the deviation imagt~ for possible
electronic or alignment problems. If an alignment or an electrical
adjustment (or replacement) is needed after a failing Air Matrix, rerun
a calibration from the system software, or a Peak from the diagnostic
software, before retrying the Air Matrix.
V. Once an acceptable Air Matrix scan is printed, delete the Air Matrix
files (these files begin with "XM" or "XP" plus the System Number, and
they are generally the only files beginning with "X" in the C:\lUNAR
subdirectory). Return the printout of the passing Air Matrix with the
install report.
H. Overnight QA\QC Tests
NOTE: Notify the site's Radiation Safety Officer that the sc;a nner will be
generating x-rays while unattended. Post signs (W;a rning, X-
Ray Radiation) on the door of the room and on the scanner.
I. From DIAGS, choose F4 - Quality Assurance Tests, then option 2 -

Multiple Standard scans. The system configuration options appear.
Change the number of scans to 10, the number of sets to 1, and
press <ESC>. The scanner will automatically peak before each scan.
II. Check the overnight results the following morning. Make sure all 10
scans ran. Air values should be within 2 0/0, air ratios should not vary
by more than 0.02, and the peak units should not range l1l0re than 25
units. If the air ratio, counts, or peaks do not fall within these specs
contact the lU NAR Customer Service Department.
III. Return the printouts to lU NAR.

Controlled Document
IWNAR;'oeuMe-NiiD-:-1JX:WOO08-~1REI~ -DA'T-E: 5/14/9"7~:--4W2
I. Alun1inum Phantom Scan in 15 em of water
I. Before running any patient or phantom scans, five (5) calibrations

must be in the database for accurate results. If only one calibration
has been run from the system software (before the Air Matrix), then
four (4) more need to be run.
II. Run the aluminum spine phantom scans according to the Procedure
DXQC0022. When setting up the phantom scan, verify the Patient
Positioning Light and the Laser On light operate properly.
III. Run 3 scans at Medium (750uA) speed. Average the results from the
3 medium scans, and verify that the mean is within 2% of the
expected value for the phantom. Record the average results of the
.medium scans and the expected result on the Install Report.
NOTE: Follow the analysis instructions included with the Aluminum Spine
Phantom. If not analyzed properly, the results may deviate from the
expected value.
J. Test Completion
".--.
I. At the successful completion of all test, the diagnostic software should

be deleted from the hard drive. To do so, insert the TOOLS diskette
into the A: drive and type:
a:\diags\diagnos unload XXXXX [enter]
XXXXX is the directory where DIAGS was loaded.

Controlled Document
Appendix 6. H Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure

LUNAR® DPX-IQ Service Manual R!ev. E (3/98)
I I
j
Appendix 6.H
Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Proce(,jure
Work Instructions [OXQC0022] l '.
~,
This appendix contains the latest work i.nstructions for scanning an alumi.n~~J~Phantom.
Please carefuHy read and before scanning. _~~J.~~1-
.~,A"~·
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as oftf)# ~:f¥?elease ofth~~ last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. H~ this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any tim ~: ~otice. The LUNAh~ Service
of the latest revisions in futureMaa .,

Department will periodically notify dist .... . ~ ?§of any changes and provide copies
ates.
The distributor is resp0f!sibl iiS~ri~9

.. that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with ~ 6uments.
~--------------------------------------
1-
.A.!uminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure Appendix 6.H

WNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXQC0022 REV: A DATE: 5/20/96 ECO: 3408
TITLE: Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure

OdCUMENT OWNER: WRITIEN BY: Scott
DEPT APPROVAL: QAAPPROVA
PURPOSE
This procedure details the process for scanning aluminum spine phantoms on DPX-Series
scanners at the time of system installation. . .
UNCONTROLLED DOCUM ENT
APPLICATION Before Using
This policy applies to all aluminum spine phantoms used in the field.
RESPONSIBILITY
All personnel that scan phantoms at customer installations will be trained on this procedure.
PROCEDURES
The scans will be run as part of the quality assurance procedures.
L Acquiring an Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan
A. Verify that five (5) calibrations have been run on the scanner. These shall
have been run within the previous week. If a calibration has not been run
within the last two days run a calibration. If all of the calibrations are more
than a week old, rerun all five.
B. From the LUNAR Main Menu, verify that you are in the AP Spine scan
program. Select option <F1> for a Patient Spine Scan and then <F4> to add a
new patient.
Enter the mandatory information as follows:
Enter as the first name "Spine" followed by the phantom serial number, and
"Phantom" as the last name.

Page 1 of3
Do not use if red "Controlled Document" stamp is not present on front page
IwJlAR° DOCUMENT ID: DXQC0022 REV: A DATE 5/20/96 ECO: 3408
The rest of the Mandatory Information should be entered as follows:

. V1'1tJ rC-z., posTa
Birth Date : Present Date minus 40 years " -nll-'" li/l~ rj :).,:Y}t
r jtJJI-J v '.J . ~'l' .-'
Height : 170 cm 1)05 PJ}?Y1; '/;! ~n ;:/-l()i JiOlfj -:)
Weight : 70 kg
Sex : Male
Ethnic Group: White
C. The spine phantoms will be scanned in 15 cm of water. Remove the table

pad, place phantom tub on scan table in approximate center of scan window.
Place the phantom in the phantom tub filled with 15 cm of water. Position the
phantom in the water bath so that the long axis of the phantom is in the
midline of the table in the same transverse plane as the belly band. Make
sure the phantom is parallel to the midline, not at an angle.
*** When properly positioned. the detector will remain over the water bath
during the entire scan. ***
D. Press <ESC> to continue. \
E. The next screen displays the scan parameters. Verify or change that the scan
parameters are set as follows:
Scan Mode : Medium
kV : 76.0
uA : 750
Collimation : Medium
Sample Size : Medium
Scan Width : Auto
Scan Length : 170 mm
NOTE: The scan length 'can be shortened to no less than 120 mm if desired.
If left at 170 mm, the scan should be aborted after 3-5 lines into T12.
Press <HOME> after entering any changes.

-
WNAR®DOCUMENT 10: DXQC0022 REV: A DATE 5/20/96 I ECO: 3408
F. Press <ESC> and the arm will move to home.
r iG. Press <ESC> and the scanner ramps up the tube head voltage and current,
and the arm moves to a location where the Patient Localizer Light is
positioned over the transverse center of the scan table.
H. Use the positioning switches to center the patient localizer light in the middle of
the L5 section of the phantom. All scan lines must be completely in water.
I. Press <ESC> and the scan will begin. Verify the scan does not go outside of
the tub (the confines of the water) and starts scanning below L4, otherwise,
abort, reposition, and restart the scan.
J. At the completion of the scan, the arm will move to the home position. Press
<ESC>. The scan process is complete and the user is returned to the Main
Menu.
lL Analyzing The Scans
A. Press <F2> and the directory of scans is displayed.
B. Choose the patient name (or appropriate -identification) of the phantom scan
by using the up and down arrow keys, and press <ESC>. Select the
appropriate scan and press <ESC>.
C. Verify the Mandatory and Optional Information is correct. Press <ESC>.
D. Press <F2> Auto Analysis and adjust the intervertebral markers. Adjust the
markers using the histogram as the Operator Manual describes for a normal
spine scan. L2-L4 should contain 88 lines; L 1-L4 should contain 108 lines.
Verify the labels are correct on the phantom for L 1 through L4. If not, correct
them using option <F3>.
If performing repeat scans, use the Compare scans option for optimum
reproducibility.
E. Press <ESC> to return to the Bone Results screen.

F. Verify the BMD results for L2-L4 are within 2% of the expected value provided
for the phantom. If the results are not within 2 % , verify that edge mark
placements are correct. If the edges are correct and the results remain more
than 2% from expected, rescan the phantom (verifying thE~ phantom is
positioned parallel to the table midline before rescanning). If you cannot get
passing results with the second scan, call the LUNAR Applications
Department.
G. Print out the results of the phantom scan.

Appendix 6.1 DEXA Installation Report

,I I
.
Appendix 6.1
DEXA Installation Report
Work Instructions [DXAP0004]
The distributor is respon.;S/DI'a1IjOf8,U ring that all copies of the SeNiCf.~ Manual
are updated with
.. '-..-
DEXA Installation Report Appendix 6.1

DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0004 REV: E DATE: 10/29/97 CO: 4455
TITLE: OEXA Installation Report
DOCUMENT TYPE: Quality Record
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications Bonnie Meise
AUTHOR/MODIFIER APPROVAL~.-
DXAP0003 - DEXA Installation Work Instructions UNCONTROLLED DCICUMENT
DXAP0008 - DEXA Installation Test Procedures Verify Latest Revision
Before Usinl~
CHECK LIST
SYSTEM NUMBER:,_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ INSTALL DATE:
FACILITY: '-------------
ADDRESS:_______________________________________
CITY:,__________________,STATElCOUNTRY:_ _ _ _ _ _ _";ZIP:-,_ _ _ __
CONTACT: PHYSICIAN:
PHONE#: FAX#:
----------------------
----------------_.--------
SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION
SCAN TABLE SIN: STANDARD S/N:,___________TUBE HEAD S/N: ______
CONTROLLER MODEL I HD SIZE: SIN:
PRINTER TYPE:, _______________--~--------------------------
---------------
SOFnNAREVERSION:,___________~-~----------------------~
STANDARD BATCH: 6, 7, or 8 (Circle One) SOFTwARE CONFIGURED FOR STANDARD BATCH? YIN
SETUP
DOS, WINDOWS, OR WINDOWS 95 DISKETTESICD (CIRCLE ALL THAT APPLY)

ALL COMPLIANCE LABELS PRESENT, CORRECT AND LEGIBLE? YIN
ALL COMPONENTS THROUGH POWER STRIP? YIN
ARM GROUNDED? YIN
OPTIONS INSTALLED:_____________________________________
QA TESTS (CHECK OFF AS COMPLETED)
SOURCE/DETECTOR ALIGNED?
LIMIT SWITCHES VERIFIED?
VERIFY PROPER AGS OPERATION (WEDGE TESn?
RUN AIR MATRIX TEST. PASSED?
RUN 10 OVERNIGHTS. PASSED?
PMT DETECTOR HIGH VOLTAGE (SBCTP18): VDC PEAKSETTING:, _ _ _ __
RESULTS OF 3 PHANTOM SCANS: I 1_____
AVERAGE: PHANTOM S/N:_ _ __
EXPECTED VALUE: ±2% DIFFERENCE: (%)
VERIFY LATEST REVISION BEFORE USE Page 1 of 2

This document contains conftdentlal or propdetary Infonnation of Lunar Corp. neHher the document nor the lnfonnatlon Is to be "'prochtCed, dlatrlbut.d, used or
dladoaed,.1ther In whol. or In part, except .. spectftcally authortzed by Lunar Cofp.
WNAR~ DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0004 REV: E DATE: 10/29/97 CO
kV I ~ VERIFICATION:
Test Point kV /-lA Limits Actual
XORB TP1 76 750 0.74 - 0.76
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 1 3000 2.97 - 3.03
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 1 4750 4.70 - 4.80
XORBTP5
XORBTP2 3.760 - 3.840
..
XORBTP6
REPORTS
__ VERIFY SYSTEM NUMBER IN SOFTWARE (ALT-S)
__ VERIFY SCAN TYPES AVAILABLE MATCH SALES ORDER
__ AIR MATRIX RESULTS
__ PRINTOUTS FROM 10 STANDARD SCANS (OVERNIGHTS)
__ PRINTOUTS FROM 3 PHANTOM SCANS (INCLUDING ANCILLARY RESULTS)
__ SIGNED (BY CUSTOMER) DELIVERY RECEIPT
__ SIGNED (BY CUSTOMER) SOFTWARE RELEASE FORM
__ SIGNED (BY CUSTOMER) DPX-SERIES TRAINING OUTLINE
__ COMPLETED FDA FORM 2579 (AND ANY REQUIRED STATE FORMS) USA 0
___ SIGNED (BY DOCTOR) Responsibility for Adm. of Rad. to Human SUb. FORM
...
COMMENTS/ISSUES
SALES/ORDER:
OUT OF BOX:
THAIN/SITE:
INSTALLER'S SIGNATURE_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _--.-;/_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __

(print name)
TRAINER'SSIGNATURE._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~_~/_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _~~ ~
(print name)

Th'- document contain. confldenti&l or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Netther the document nor the Infonnatlon therein I. to be reproduced, dlatrlbuted. l
or dlsetosed, efther In whole or In part. except . . .peclflcally authorized by Lunar Corp.
Appendix 6.J System Installation Record

I ,
I
I
Appendix 6.J
System Installation Record
[SYS_INST]
~),
This appendix contains the a system installation record. This record Shou~,.~d for each
system installed. ~ ~. (~r
~.. ~
...w6tl;, ~~).
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as oft t.iIRe~~release ofth€~ last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update.. H . ,~ . ~";~ this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any tim ~' .. ~ . ~ otice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify diS. )~.~
.'-"', . ~'bf any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future M~~teS.
resPo'1sible;~rfSUring
The distributor is that all copies of the ServiCE! Manual
are updated with the ",:: nt~uments.
~----------------------------------------
System Installation Record Appendix 6.J

SYSTEM INSTALLATION RECORD
(SYS_INST.A 21 SEPT94)
UNCONTROlLED DOCUMENT
SITE INFORMATION Verify teRest Revision
I ! NAME: Befolre Using
) .
ADDRE~S~S~:------------------------------------'--~-------
CITY: --------------STATE:-----------ZIP/POST CODE: ---------

TELEPHONE: FAX:
----------------------
SYSTEM
TYPE: ----------------SYSTEM#:-------------SCANNER#: ---------
INSTALLATION INFORMATION
INSTALLED
BY:
----------------------------------DATE:------------
INSPECTED
BY:
---------------------------------DATE:------------
SOFTWARE INFORMATION
LUNAR SOFTWARE VERSION: DOS VERSION: -----
SOFTWARE OPTIONS INSTALLED (check all that apply) AP Spine___
Femur Lateral Spine Total Body Forearm _ _
Orthopedic SA Peds ___
PC KWIK PowerPak Serial Number:
-------------------
Optical Drive Software (Name & Version): __________________________
STANDARD & PHANTOM INFORMATION

Standard Serial#:
------------------------------
Aluminum Spine Phantom Serial #:_____AI. Spine BMD L2-L4:_______
SCANNER COMPONENT SERIAL NUMBERS

Tube Head: _ _ _ _ _Collimator Assy: __________Filter: _ _ _ _ __
Pas. HV Supply: Neg. HV Supply: PMT: ________
SBC: OINK: MAX:
XORB: AGS: AGS DCA: -------
DPX DCA: AMP:
-------------------
COMPUTER COMPONENT SERIAL NUMBERS:
PC
TYPE: KEYCODE: SERL~L#:
-----------------------
FIXED DISK TYPE: FIXED DISK SERIAL#:
---------
MONITOR TYPE: MONITOR SERIAL#:----------------
PRINTER TYPE: PRINTER SERIAL#: ______________
KEYBOARD SERIAL#: ____________
OPTICAL DISK TYPE: OPTICAL DISK SERIAL#:
Ext. FLOPPY TYPE: FLOPPY SERIAL#: _____________
MODEM TYPE: MODEM SERIAL#: _______________
Appendix 6.K DEXA Operator Training Procedure

Appendix 6.K
DEXA Operator Training Procedure
Work Instructions [DXAP0007] .
~i'
This appendix contains the latest version of the DPX Series Operators Tr~,i~~edure.
Please review before training. ,\..
'\.~I
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of t!Jf! ~ ~ . .' lease of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. H.~ this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any tifl1~otice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify dist~fany changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Ma ~t~s.
The distributorJs resP01sib,c,f su;ng that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated wIth the ,,,,.. ' ~~ments.
~-------------------------------------------
'.
DEXA Operator Training Procedure Appendix 6.K

WNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0007 REV:A DATE:5~Offi6 ECO: 3408
TITLE: DEXA Operator Training Procedure

QOCUMENT OWNER:
DEPT APPROVAL:
RESPONSIBILITY
All personnel performing DEXA operator training shall be trained in this procedure. Such
personnel will use the most current DEXA Operator Training Outline.
ASSOCIATED MATERIALS Verify Latest Hevision
Before Using
SYS_HSTO - System Change History
DXAP0006 - Responsibility for Administration of Radiation to Human Subjects
OX_TROUT - DPX Series Training Outline
DEFINITIONS
The installation consists of assembling the device, verifying proper operation, and training
'- the operator(s) in a) operation of the device, b) analysis of acquired data, and c) device
specific radiation safety. Training of scan acquisition will take place with phantoms, unless
a licensed physician has authorized specific patients to be scanned during training. The
Lunar employee conducting the training will obtain a signed copy of the Responsibility for
Administration of Radiation to Human Subjects form (DXAP0009) from the physician, prior
to permitting the scanning of patients for training purposes. This form will be filed with the
systems Device History Record at Lunar. If patients are scanned during training the Lunar
employee may assist in positioning, but the customer must actually operate the scanner.
PROCEDURES
A. Determine if patients will be scanned during training. If so, obtain a si~~ned copy of
the Responsibility for Administration of Radiation to Human Subjects form before
proceeding. REMEMBER: You may help with positioning, but the actual scan must
be initiated by the user.
B. Train the operator in the use of the system following the latest version of the DPX
Series Training Outlin~ (DX_TROUT).

Do not use if red "Controlled Document" stamp is not present on flront page
IlUNAR" DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0007 REV: A DATE 5/20/96 ECO: 3408
C. In California, the operator must be supervised by a physician. The physician must

have a Radiology Supervisor and Operator Certificate or Radiology Supervisor and
Operator permit. These certificates or permits are granted by application and
exarrlination. The state conducts the examination. In addition to a properly
certified physician supervising, 3 different qualified indtviduals can operate the
bone densitometer:
1. An individual who has completed Lunar Corporation training, holds the Lunar
Corporation training certificate and has a valid California Diagnostic
Radiology certificate.
or
2. An individual who has corrlpleted Lunar training, holds the Lunar training
certificate, and has a valid California Torso, Skeleton Limited Permit.
or
3. A doctor, on an applicant's behalf, can submit a Special Perrriit Application.
D. Obtain the operator's signature and the training date on the cover page of the
appropriate training outline.

Do not llIse if red "Controlled Document" stamp is not present on front page
Appendix 6. L DPX Series Operator Training Outline

LUNAR® DPX-/Q Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
, I
i
Appendix 6.L
DPX Series Operator Training Outline
Work Instructions [DXAP0013] ,
Thi~ appendix ~ntains the latest version of the DPX Series Operator Traiqjn~e.
reVIew dunng training. ~',. ,~.[.,
Please
~ ..
1!;~'.
~.
.....
~; '7~-r ~~
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of ~ release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update, HCJl~ter:· this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any ti >W'I1·I"'IAlA,I'iJ1,,.,tlf~l=l. The LUNAf{ Service
Department will periodically notify G/S1:n/iU
of the latest revisions in future MaflJ.J.~~lIOOrate~s
The distributor is reC"""'r'lC""""O"'~""~"'~C"1 'ng that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with
DPX Series Operator Training Outline Appendix 6.L

WIlle DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
TITLE: DPX Series Operator Training Outline
DOCUMENT TYPE: Work Instructions/Quality Record
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications WRITTEN BY: Jeff Franz
I 0Ne) have reviewed the attached outline and u erstand the topics discussed, and I
verify that the training outlined is complete. In addition, I will read (or have read) the
appropriate Manual(s), including Radiation Safety.
( )
Signature Print Name Date
( )
( )
( )
Facility System#
City State Traiined by
Cross out what does NOT apply:

Devices: DPX DPX-L DPX-a DPX-A DPX-SF DPX-IQ DPX-1Q
240 180
Applications: AP Spine Lateral Femur Total Body Hand Forearm
Spine Body Composition
Optional Orthopedic Pediatric Small
Applications: Animal
UNCONTROlleD DOCUMENT
Verify Latest RevfsfOft
Before Using

This document contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to be reproduced, distributed, uMd or
disclosed, either In whofe or In part, except u specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
'''AI~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
1. DEVICE SPECIFIC X-RAY INFORMATION
A. High Voltage 1 Current Settings - 76 kV, current variable (150, 750, 3000 or
4750mA) depending on scan mode (all set in software).
B. X-Ray Unit Location - X-ray tube under tabletop. Place the computer >1
meter from the side of the scan table for operator exposure of <0.1 mremlhr
or 1.5 meter if unit has TUV as mark.
C. Cerium filter provides 38 keV and 70 keV channels (Dual Energy).
D. Collimator Assembly - Collimator sizes of 1.68 and 0.84 mm; automatically

selected for scan mode; lead shutter incorporated into collimator.
E. Patient dose - (varies with scan mode)
SCAN MOIDE CURRENT (uA) DOSE (mR)

AP Spine Screening 1 3000 1.2
AP Spine IFast1 I Hi-Res Fase 3000 2.4
AP Spine ~Vledium 1 I Hi-Res Med 3 3000 4.8
AP Spine Fast 750 0.3
AP Spine IVledium 750 1.2
AP Spine Slow 750 2.4
AP Spine Detail 750 4.8
Lateral Spiine Detail 750 4.8

Lateral Sp:ine Medium 3 3000 7.7
Lateral Spiine Medium 1 4750 7.6
Femur Fast 1 I Hi-Res Fast3 3000 2.4

Femur Medium 1 I Hi-Res Med 3 3000 4.8
Femur: Medium 750 1.2
Femur Slow 750 2.4
Femur Detail 750 4.8
Total Body Screening 150 0.01

Total Body Fast 150 0.02
Total Body Medium 150 0.03
Total Body Slow 150 0.06
Total Body Detail 150 0.06
1 AVclilable with DPX-L and DPX-a only.

2 Optional upgrade required.
3 DPX-IQ only

This document (;ontalns confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of
disclosed, ~ther In wteole or In part, except .. specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
I
LUNAR" DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013I REV: 0 IDATE: 10/22197 ICO: 4494
\
SCAN MODE CURRENT (uA) DOSE (mR)
I ,
Forearm Fasf 150 0.12
I
J Forearm Medium 2 150 0.24
Forearm Slovl 150 0.48
Forearm Detail 2
150 0.96
Ortho Fast1,2 3000 4.8
Ortho Fast. 1,2 3000 9.6
Ortho Medium 1,2 3000 9.6
Ortho Medium. , 2
1
3000 19.2
Ortho Siovi 750 4.8
Ortho Slow Hi-Res. 2 750 9.6
1 Available with DPX-L and DPX-a only.

2 Optional upgrade required.
3 Only on DPX-IQ.
G. Pregnant Women - Even though the dosage level is low, LUNAR does not
recommend scanning pregnant women.
H. Recommended Safety Rules For Personnel

1. Wear personnel dosimeters.
2. Post room with a Caution: X-Radiation sign.
3. Remain> 1 meter from scan table during the scan.
4. No eating, drinking or smoking in the scan room.
5. Do not stare into laser beam.
Check with your State Radiological Board to see what safety regulations your state has
regarding X-Ray equipment, and what the state's operator requirements are (e.g. is an RT
required to operate the scanner?).
2. SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Scan Table
I. Location of on/off switch and POWER ON (GREEN) light.
Always leave the power on.
II. Location of the X-RAY ON (ORANGE) light.
Ill. Location of the SHUTTER OPEN (ORANGE) indicator.

This document conulns confidential 0(proprietary lnfonnatton of Lunar Corp. neither the document nO( the Infonnation Is to be reproduced~ dl.tributed. used 0(
dtsdosed. either In whole Of' In part, except •• speclfIcally .uthorized by Lunar Corp.
DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
IV. Location and use of EMERGENCY STOP button, and the

emergency stop circuit.
a. Four conditions will invoke the Emergency Shutoff. Each case
resets the scanner (and SBC) and patient data is not saved.
The condition which invoked the circuit must be rectified before
the scanner will operate.
i. Write down any error messages that appear. LUNAR

will need this information in diagnosing the difficulty.
b. Conditions for shutoff.
i. Emergency Stop Button. Push in to invoke. Tum button

in direction of arrow before restarting scanner. Push to
release on DPX-IQ.
ii. If arm motion stops (for more than 95 sees longitudinally,
or 3 sees transversely).
iii. Temperature of tube housing assembly exceeds 80
degrees C.
iv. If the 28 Vdc power supply is interrupted.
v. Reset button and 110 cable.
WARNING: THIS SCANNER OPERATES AT HIGH VOLTAGE. ACCESS TO THE SCANNER'S

ELECTRONICS SHOULD BE RESTRICTED TO LUNAR AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ONLY.
V. Location of Laser Positioner, Laser Aperture, and LASER ON

light. Explain safety procedures. DO NOT STARE INTO THE
LASER. DO NOT position detector over patient's head while
laser is on. Check with regulatory affairs person for any local
restrictions.
VI. Keys, Front Panel Locks, Side Panel Locks. Keys MUST be
removed from panel locks and stored in a safe place. Do not
open the scanner without LUNAR authorization.
B. Computer
I. Host Computer (Controller)

a. On/off switch; exit software; turn off at night.
b. C: - hard drive; explain partitions, RAMDRIVE, if any.
c. A: (and possibly B:) - diskette drive(s). (CD-ROM/JazzlZip ..
drive optional)
II. Monitor - On/off switch, turn off at night.

this document cOflulns confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. neither ttM document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of
disclosed, elther In whole or In ~rt, except . . apecffically authorized by Lunar Corp.
DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22/97 CO: 4494
I I
I". Printer
a. On/off switch; turn off overnight.
i b. Paper loading.
c. Ink/Cartridge loading.
IV. Micro Disks - specifications, formatting, care and handlin~~.
; 3. SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. All LUNAR software is loaded on the hard drive and a backup (SYSTEM
DISKETTE) is left on-site.
S Resetting the computer, Ctrl-Alt-Del.
C. Accessing DPX software. At the any C:\> DOS prompt, type:

CO\LUNAR [Enter]
At the C:\LUNAR> prompt type: DPX, and press [Enter].
D. Do not load any non-LUNAR memory resident programs onto your DPX
computer. Load any non-LUNAR non-memory resident softwarE~ onto any
available partition other than C:. If only C: is available, load othE~r software
into H:s own directory.
E. Daily System Quality Assurance
I. System is peaked to obtain maximum count rate to irnprove

statistics. High energy peak should be within 50 units of
previous peak and remain between 300 and 700 units.
II. ", "Electronic, mechanical and x-ray functions are Checked to

ensure. proper operation. All tests should Pass.

This document contains confldentlal or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to be reproduced. dlsb1buted. used or
dladosed. el1her In whole or In part, except as apecffical/y authorUecI by Lunar Corp.
IWNAlR DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
III. Three chambers of standard block are measured five times to

obtain Bone Mineral and Width measurements .
. a. O/oCV should be less than 2.00.
b. Mean 8M and Width values should not be flagged with

footnotes. Footnotes mean "FAIL".
c. Bone Mineral and Air Values from previous 5 calibrations are

averaged by computer to provide calibration values for
scanning.
IV. Save all Quality Assurance printouts. Both passing and failing
QA's are stored in the database. Only passing QA's are used
for system calibration.
NOTE: Training of scan acquisition will take place with phantoms. unless a licensed physician has
authorized specific patients to be scanned during training. The LUNAR employee conducting the training will
obtain a signed copy of the Responsibility for Administration of Radiation to Human Subjects form from the
physician, prior to permitting the scanning of patients for training purposes. This form will be filed at Lunar.
The lunar A~pplications Specialist may assist the customer with patient positioning, but the actual
scan must be perfonned by the customer.
F. AP Spine Scan
I. Select patient from directory or use [F4] - Add New Patient.
II. 'Enter/edit Mandatory and Optional Information.
III. Review scan parameters: mode, length and width.

a. See the Scan Mode Selection flow chart.
IV. Position Patient

a. Patient lies supine with legs on support block and with arms
outside of scan area.
b. Remove all attenuating objects (metal and plastic) from scan

area.

This document (;oo1&lns confidential or proprietary Informatloo of Lunar Corp. netther the document nor the InformatJoo I. to be reproduced, distributed, used or
dl&closed, either In whole or In part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22/97 CO: 4494
c. Use positioning switches to position localizer laser/light. Note

precautions for laser use.
J I
i. Position transverse plane between anterior superior iliac

spine and anterior iliac crest.
ii. Position longitudinal plane mid-line.
NOTE: If the patient is restrained with the belly band, make sure they are comfortable and do not
leave them unattended. Observe them frequently.
V. Begin Scan
a. Watch for 5-25 lines of iliac crest at beginning of scan.
b. Scan must start below L4. Only a few lines of L5 necessary.
c. Spine should be centered, computer should track spine. If

incorrectly positioned, abort scan [F1] and restart.
d. Scan a few lines of T12 to define the intervertebral space

above L1. This will assist the computer's analysis.
G. AP Spine Analysis
I. Select patient from the Patient Directory.
II. Select scan from Scan Directory.
III. Review Mandatory and Optional Information.
IV. Verify Values.

a. Image Parameters.
V. Auto Analysis.
a. Check computer placement of edges and baselines; "adjust if
aberrant (exclude artifacts).
b. Check intervertebral markers and adjust if needed.

i. Use histogram to find low density scan lines.
ii. Rotate for scoliosis, if necessary.
c. Label vertebral bodies using pelvis/L5 and ribsrF12 as

landmarks.
VI. Compare "function.

VII. Save changes.
VIII. Print results and review printout.

This document cont&lns confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to be reproduceod, distributed, used or
disclosed, elthef In whole or In ~rt, except .. apec/flcaUy authorized by Lunar Corp.
ILUNAI~ DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
H. Lateral Spine Scan (optional)
II. Enter/edit Mandatory and Optional Information.
III. Review scan parameters: length and width.

a. Detail Mode for DPX and DPXA.
b. Medium Mode for DPX-L and DPX-a. Scan duration cannot

exceed five minutes. Five minutes, 0 seconds = 130mm width
x 160mm length.
IV. Position patient.
a. Secure compressor strap to handle on front of table and install

the lateral positioning device.
b. Patient should lie on their left side with their back flat against
the rear of the lateral positioning device and buttocks against
the lower portion of the device. Legs should bend so that back
is flat against positioning device. Shoulders should not roll
forward. Head should be supported by cylindrical foam pad.
c. Place foam spine support pad under patient's waist.
d. Secure patient to positioning device with compressor strap

(belly band).
e. Place foam wedge between thighs and bottom of positioning

device if necessary.
f. Place foam wedge under patient's knees.
g. Use positioning switches to position localizer laserllight to the

apex of the iliac crest. Note precautions for laser use.
NOTE: While the patient is restrained, do not leave them unattended. Make sure they are
comfortable clnd observe them frequently.
VERIFY LATE:ST REVISION BEFORE USE Page 8 of 21

This document cO(1ulns confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of'
disclosed. either In whole Of' In ~rt, except as spedflcally authorized by Lunar Cofp.
. . . . . DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4494
v. Begin scan.
I I
a. Watch for the iliac crest in the first few scan lines.
b. There should be at least one inch of soft tissue ant,erior to the

vertebral bodies as measured on screen.
c. You should see all of the posterior elements of the spine.
d. Spine should be straight.
e. Abort scan [F1] and reposition if scan positioned incorrectly.
I. Lateral Spine Analysis (optional)
I. Select patient from the Patient Directory.
III. Review Mandatory and Optional Information.
IV. Verify Values.

a. Image Parameters.
V. Auto Analysis.
a. Check intervertebral markers and adjust if needed.
i. Use histogram to find low density scan lines.
b. Label vertebral bodies using pelvis and ribs as landmarks.
c. Check computer placement of edges; adjust if aberrant.
d. Check placement of ROI boxes. Adjust if necessary ..

i. Do not include any soft tissue inside the RC~I's.
ii. The upper and lower boundaries of the Body ROI's
should be located through the middle of thE~ vertebral
end plates.
iii. The software automatically manipulates the Mid ROI's
as the Body ROI's are manipulated. The Mid ROI's need
not be manipulated separately. .
VI. Save changes. Print results and review printout.

Thla document contains confidential or proprietary InfonnatJon of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproduced, dlab1buted, uaed or
disclosed, either In whole or In part, except .a apeclftc:&lly .uthorized by Lunar Corp.
REV: D DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
.J. Femur Scan
III. Review scan parameters: mode, side, length and width.

a. See Scan Mode Selection Flow Chart.

a. Patient should lie supine on table with feet strapped in the foot
brace and the arms outside of the scan window. The femur of
interest should be rotated into position.
b. Use the positioning switches to position the localizer lasernight

in the center of the thigh and 3" below the greater trochanter.
Note precautions for laser use.
NOTE: While the patient's feet are restrained, do not leave them unattended. Make sure they are
comfortable and observe them frequently.
V. Begin scan
a. The first few scan lines should include the shaft of the femur
centered in the scan path. The beam should not scan outside
of the patient's body. The scanner should follow the contour of
the femur, slightly more tissue will be acquired on the medial
side below the ischium.
b. Ischium should appear after 30 scan lines. Abort [F1] and

reposition if positioning is incorrect.
c. Abort and restart if scanning into air on the outside of patient's

hip. Select a lower current (or slower) scan mode and/or use
bags of tissue equivalent (rice), if necessary.
d. Scan should proceed 25 lines beyond the top of the greater

trochanter (approx. 1 inch on-screen) and auto-stop.
Continue scan if auto-stop invoked too early.
e. Press [F1] to end the scan if the auto-stop does not invoke.
VERIFY LATE:ST REVISION BEFORE USE Page 10 of 21

This document contains confidential 0(proprietary information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of
dladcned, either In whole or In part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp,
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 : 4494
K. Femur Analysis
I. Select name from Patient Directory.
ll. Select scan from Scan Directory.
III. Review Mandatory/Optional Information.
IV. Verify values

a. Image parameters.
V. Auto Analysis.
a. If necessary, rotate ROI box so that it is perpendicular to the
femoral neck.
b. Position the ROI box proximal on the femoral neck without

including the ischium or greater trochanter, but inc:luding soft
tissue on both sides of the neck.
c. Press F9 - Search (IQ systems).
d. Press the Esc key to return to the bone results screen.
VI. Save changes.
VII. Print results and review printouts.
L. Total Body Scan (optional)
Il. Enter/edit Mandatory and Optional information.
III. Review scan parameters.
IV. Medium scan mode is recommended on patients >26cm in

thickness. Precision and accuracy error may be comprornised
on patients >26cm if medium scan mode is not used.

This document contains confidential or proprietary Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. neittler the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproducod, dlsbibuted, used Of'
disclosed, either In whole or In part. except .. apeclflcally authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWHIR DOCUMENT ID: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10/22/97 co: 4494
v. Position patient.
a. Parallel to long axis of table.
b. Midline of patient should be over the midline of the tabletop.
c. No part of the patient should be outside of the scan area

(indicated by the blue lines on the pad). Hands may be tucked
under the soft tissue of the hips.
d. Head should be approx. 1 inch below head line on pad.
e. Legs and feet strapped with velcro.
NOTE: WhilE~ the patient is restrained, do not leave them unattended. Make slire they are
comfortable ;and observe them frequently.
VI. Begin scan.

a. Scanner should scan 3-5 lines full-width of table before locating
the head. If head is detected on first line, stop and reposition
patient. If head is not located after 13 lines, the scanner will
auto-stop. You may continue, or reposition and restart.
b. Scanner will follow patient's contour when auto width is used.
c. Scanner will auto-stop after scanning beyond the feet. If it does

not, press abort [F1], and save the scan.
M. Total Body Analysis (optional)
I. Select name from patient directory.
II. Select scan from scan directory.
III. Review mandatory and optional information.
IV. Allow computer to calculate R-value. If more than 5 iterations

are needed, allow the computer to "continue" until finished.
V. Verify Values.
VI. Auto Analysis

a. - Move and/or Alter cuts (angle them), as necessary.
b. Select Standard or Extended Research Analysis.

. .--..,.
VERIFY LA TE:ST REVISION BEFORE USE Page 12 of 21

this dOCt.lment cClOulns confidentialOf' proprietary Infol"l'Mtlon of Lunar Corp. neithlH'" the document nor the Information Is to be reproduced, distributed, used or
disclosed, either In wtlole or In part. except as spectfically authorized by Lunar Corp.
. . . . . DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
VII. Use Manual Analysis option to exclude any artifacts or for user
! I
defined ROJ analysis.
VIII. Change Headings
IX. Compare
X. Save changes.
XI. Print results and review printouts.
N. Forearm Scan (optional)
II. Enter/edit Mandatory and Optional information.
III. Review scan parameters.
IV. Verify Values to enter/change patient arm length, arm side and
scan mode, width and length.
a. The length can be measured best by placing the elbow on the

table and the hand pointing upwards, measure the distance
from the table top to the ulna styloid process in millimeters.
b. Medium is the recommended mode for a typical forearm scan.
c. Scan width is determined by adding 20mm to the rnaximum

arm width.
d. The scan length is automatically determined when one of the

non-manual scan paths is selected. The recommended mode
is Total Arm. Typical time, 7 minutes.
V. Position patient.
a. Remove table top pad and install forearm scan platform.
b. Place patient's arm parallel to long axis of table, along midline

of platform. The patient's arm should be placed in the center of
the platform so one strap secures over the hand and another
strap secures just distal to the elbow. The patient should sit
straight up with the front of their shoulder even with the mid-
point of their forearm.

Thl. document conulns confidential or proprieUry Informlltion of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the information I. to be reproduC4td, distributed, und Of"
dlsclond, either In whole or In part, except •• apectfJ~ly .uthorized by Lunar Corp.
DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
c. Scan is started with the localizer laser/light positioned in the

center of the arm adjacent to the ulna styloid. Note precautions
for laser use.
VI. Begin scan.

a. Scanner will offset 10mm distally and start scanning.
b. Verify scan is centered and straight. The ulna styloid should be

visible after only a few lines.
c. If the scan was started too far distally (includes carpel bones),
abort the scan [F1], and reposition. Continue scan at end for
additional length to include full 33%) site if auto stop appears to
have invoked too soon.
O. Forearm Analysis (optional)
l. Select name from patient directory.
II. Select scan from scan directory.
III. Review mandatory and optional information.
IV. Verify Values.

V. Auto Ana,lysis
a. Check edges, baselines and Reference Point for proper
placement.
b. Move/add/alter regions in [F9] - Position ROI.
c. Bone/Region labels can be changed with the Labels option,

[F8].
VI. Select either SPA or COMAC calibrations for best comparison.
VII. Save changes.
VIII. Print results and review printouts.

Thl. document contain. confidential or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be rwproduced, dlstr\but~, used or
disclosed. either In wtlole or In ~rt, except a. speclflcally author1z~ by Lunar Corp.
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4494
P. Database Utilities
) I
I. Patient Results - Offers options to view, print or graph patient
scan results.
II. QA History - Offers options to view, print or graph a Daily

Quality Assurance data.
Archive - Copies scan data to a labeled diskette, stores the

destination of the file in the database and deletes the file from
the database on the hard drive. This should be done daily.
/
I
/ IV. Restore - Allows you to return archived files to the hard drive.
/
! This is NOT necessary to reanalyze scans that are on Archive
/
I
diskettes.
J
I V. Copy Files - Allows you to copy scan files from one location to
another, such as the C:\DB_DATA\ directory to a micro disk in
the A:\ drive.
I Change Paths - Allows you to create new databases and

switch between them. This option also includes non-
destructive database correction routines, and other database
parameters. Contact LUNAR for information on using this
screen.
VII. Delete Patient - Allows you to delete a patient's name from the
patient directory (also deletes mandatory and optional
information). You can delete a patient only if the patient has
\\
not been scanned.
\.
~,
-"'\ VIII. Backup Data - This routine is used to copy all non-archived
files to diskette. It may be used in conjunction with Archiving
for better data security.
Rebuild Database - This routine rebuilds the database files

from scan files. Contact LUNAR before using this option.
Q. Change Default Settings - System parameter defaults should be set to the

most often used parameters. Customized Report Headings are selected
from here, as well as Reference Data and Reference data adjustments.
Reference data must be switched to turned "on" and the Report
Headings must' be re-entered any time you reload or update the LUNAR
software from diskette.
R. Choose Scan Type - Permits the user to switch between AP Spine, Lateral
Spine, Femur, Total Body and Forearm programs.
this document contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Cofp. neither the document nor the Infonnatlon Is to be reproduced, distributed,. used or
disclosed, either In whole or In part, except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
~IK DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10122197 co: 4494
S. Print Manager - Permits the user to analyze files and print them at a later
time.
I. . Print options - The computer can be programmed to print at a

specified time every week or every day. Also, the printer type is
selected from here. The printer type must be reset any time
you reload or update the LUNAR software from diskette.
II. Select All and Mark Report allows the operator to print reports
at times other than that specified under delayed print time.
Press <ESC> after marking reports to print them immediately.
III. Delete All allows the operator to erase all reports stored in the
Print Manager.
T. Select Language - Screen displays can appear and reports can be printed
out in English, French, Spanish or German.
U. Select Normals - BMD Results can be compared to a variety of reference

populations throughout the world.
V. Exit To DOS - Permits user to leave the DPX series software. This should be
done before turning off the computer.
4. RESULtS DEFINED
A. BMD - Bone Mineral Density in g/cm 2 • Density is derived by dividing the

bone mineral content by the area analyzed.
B. BMC - Bone Mineral Content (mass) in grams.
C. Area - In centimeters squared.
D. Width - Average width of scan region (in centimeters).
E. BMCIW - In grams per centimeter.
F. Femur - Three ROI's; neck, trochanter and Ward's triangle.
G. R-Value - Amount of low energy photons attenuated at any point divided by

the number of high energy photons attenuated at that point.
H. T-Score - A representation of results compared to young adult normals in

Standard Deviations.
I. Z-Score - A representation of results compared to aged matched normals in

standard deviation.

thIs document contains confldentlal or proprietaty Informatlon of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Infonnatfon Is to be reproduced, dIstributed, used or
dls<:losed, efttIer In whofe or In part, except . . apeclfl<;.aJly authorized by Lunar Corp.
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4494
J. Volumetric Density - TBMD (trabecular bone mineral density, mg/cm 3 - as

! I
measured with aCT) as calculated from BMD using BMD-TBMD correlation.
K. Vertebral Height - Normalization (SO) of vertebral height (rather than BMD)

to average young adult and :for patient height.

Thla document contain. confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information I. to be reproduced, dlatn buted, used or
dlacloaed, either In whole or In part. except a. specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
"-lie DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4494
APPENDIX I, ORTHOPEDIC SOFTWARE PACKAGE (optional)
The purpose of the Orthopedic software is to provide densitometry of the proximal femur in
which a prosthetic device has been implanted in order to monitor the changes in an
individual patient. The software has operating similarities to the standard software but is an
optional external package. With some versions this package may share databases with
the DPX series software.
1. SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A. Accessing ORTHOPED software. At the any C:\> DOS prompt, type:
CO\ORTHOPED press Enter
At the C:\ORTHOPED> prompt type ORTHOPED, and press the Enter key.
S. Quality Assurance (option F3) is not necessary and not recommended. The
ORTHOPED software package can use the calibrations from the DPX series
software. Use a batch program to copy the DPXS.DSF file from the LUNAR
software to the Orthopedic software.
C. Orthopedic Hip Scan
III. Verify Values to enter/edit scan parameters.

a. Porous Length, enter the porous coat length of the patient's
implant according to the manufacturers specifications.
b. Implant Length, enter implant length as specified by the implant

manufacturer.
c. Select the right or left Patient Side.

This document conLtlns confidential or proprieLtry Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to N reproduced, distributed, used or
disclosed, either In wtlole or In part, except as specifically authortzed by Lunar Corp.
---- - ---- ------- -- -- ------ - ----- -- - - - .----='--=-==-=~=-----
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494

d. Select the most appropriate mode. The 0.6 x 1.2mm sample
I I
sizes cover more a.rea for large implants than the 0.6 x 0.6mm.
The smaller sample size doubles the radiation dose. Fast
3000mA is for patients who have a thickness <22 cm within the
scan area. The Medium 3000mA is for those >22cm in
thickness. The radiation dose for the Fast 3000ma 0.6 x
1.2mm is 4.8 mrem. The Medium double. Slow 750mA modes
are more time consuming modes with the same dose as the
Fast 3000mA modes. The DPX and DPX-A allow only the Slow
modes.
e. Auto Width and Length is recommended to save time and to

limit radiation dose on human subjects.

a. Patient should lie supine on table parallel with the midline of the
table. The patient's arms must be cleared from the scan area.
The leg with the femur of interest should be placed with the
knee in the foam positioning device. Strap the foot of the leg to
be scanned to the vertical portion of the leg brace. Move the
leg parallel to the midline of the scanner.
b. Use the positioning switches to position the localizer light in the

center of the thigh - 1-2cm below the tip of the implant.
V. Begin scan
a. The first few scan lines should include the shaft of the femur
centered in the scan path. The beam should not scan outside
of the patient's body. The scanner should follow the contour of
the ferrlur, slightly more tissue will be acquired on the medial
side below the ischium.
b. The implant should appear only after 10-20 lines have been
scanned.
c. Abort and restart if scanning into air on the outside of patient's
hip. Select a 750mA scan mode and/or use bags of tissue
equivalent (rice) jf necessary.
d. Scan should proceed 5 lines beyond the top of the greater
trochanter and auto-stop. (continue scan if auto-stop invoked
too early).
e. Press F1 if auto-stop does not invoke.

This document contains confidential or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nor the Information Is to be reproduced, dlstrtbuted, used Of'
dlaetosed, either In whole Of' In part, except as specifically authortzed by Lunar Corp.
. . . . DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: D DATE: 10/22197 CO: 4494
D. Orthopedic Hip Analysis (option F2)
I. Select name from Patient Directory.
III. Review Mandatory/Optional Information.
IV. Verify values

V. Auto Analysis, Standard or Gruen style [F2].

a. If you would like to switch to Gruen analysis select [F6].
b. Check edge placement for both bone and implant with [F7]
Profiles. Set the Offset and Perimeter if you would like.
c. Check for correct placement of the reference point and ROI
boxes with the F9 Position ROI option. The Reference point
must be placed directly adjacent to the lesser trochanter.
d. Hit Esc and the results will be computed.
VI. Manual analysis

a. Position ROls to desired region.
VII. Save changes.
VIII. Print results and review printouts.
E. Database Utilities
If databases are not being shared with the DPX series software, a separate
backup and archive is recommended. See the DPX series Database Utilities
Outline or the Orthopedic Software User Manual
F. Separate but identical Default Settings exist for the ORTHOPED software.
Customized Report Headings are selected from here, as well as Reference
Data and Reference data adjustments. Reference data must be switched to
turned "on" and the Report Headings must be re-entered any time you reload
or update the LUNAR software from diskette.
G. Print Manager - A separate but identical Print Manager exists in the

ORTHOPED software package . . The printer type must be reset any time
you reload or update the LUNAR software from diskette.
H. Exit To DOS - Permits user to leave the ORTHOPED software.

This document contains confidential or proprlotMy Infonnatloo of Lunar Corp. netthor the document nor tho Infonnatloo Is to be reproduced, distributed, uaed or
dl.ck>sed. elthef" In whole or In part. except as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
DOCUMENT 10: DXAP0013 REV: 0 DATE: 10/22197 co: 4494
I I
DPX-Series Scan Mode Selection for AP
Spine and Femur Scans (modepicbsd - Rev. 0 - ECO
1650)
yes Use previous

scan mode
oPXIDPX-A
Use the FAST Use the MEDIUM

3000uA Mode 750uAMode Use the MEDIUM
750uA Mode
Hi-Res. - 10 Only Hi-Res. - 10 Only
DEFINITIONS:
Use the MEDIUM
describes patient thickness in scan region
3000uA Mode Use the SLOW
750uA Mode
Hi-Res. - 10 Only
THIN = 12 -15cm
@LARGE= 22 - 30cm
&LARGE =
24 - 28cm
=
-NORMAL 15 - 22cm
#NORMAL = 12 - 24cm
Other factors may influence which scan mode will yield optimal results.
Please contact LUNAR Applications if you have questions.

This document contain. confidentJai 0( proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. neither the document nO( the InformatJon I. to be reproduced, dl.tributed, used or
disclosed, either In whole 0( In part, except a. specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
. ~
Appendix 6.M Responsibility For Administration Of Radiation To Human SubJects

) J
Appe dix 6.M

Responsibility For Administration Of
Radiation To Human Subjects ~~,
[DXAP0006] " ~. ~\
This appendix contains a statement of responsibility for the administ~~r~iation to human
subjects. _'\ .rt.~:~'W·~
~-' ~~~~
f l~~'"
The distributor is for ensuring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated documents.
Responsibi1ity For Administration Of Radiation To Human Subjects Appendix 6.M

TITLE: Responsibility For Administration Of Radiation To Human Subjects
DOCUMENT TYPE: Form
DOCUMENT OWNER: Applications WRIITEN BY: Scott Shropshire

DEPT. APPROVAL: QA APPROVAL 7 o;;?ep.
RESPONSIBILITY FOR ADMINISTRATION OF RADIATION TO
HUMAN SUBJECTS UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT

Before Using
Your Lunar instrument emits ionizing radiation and Federal and State law requires that it
only be used by or on the order of a licensed physician. The Lunar Applications Specialist
can NOT authorize the use of the device on human subjects. If you wish to scan patients
during the training session, please read the following statement and sign this document.
The undersigned licensed physician, accepts all responsibility for the administration of
radiation to human subjects with the indicated Lunar device.
Signature Date
Name (Please Print)
Address
City/State/Zip
Lunar Device System#
Applications Specialist

VERIFY LATEST REVISION BEFORE USE
Appendix 6. N High Voltage Repacking Procedure

I I
Appendix 6.N
High Voltage Repacking Procedure
Work Instructions [DXSEOOOO]
section of the document when performing this procedure. \tAP~~r3' .

,~~'/,~.. ~'
"
This appendix contains the latest work instructions for repacking the high '@It~nnectors of
a D~X system. Please carefully read ~nd fo.llow the steps described in ~'~CEDURESII
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of ~~~ of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual UPdatt:~r, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is su?ject .to ~hange. a.tif:;n
..Y ti '. ~1#;Ut notice. The LUNAf? ~ervice.
Department will penodlcally notIfy , ors of any changes and provIde copIes
of the latest revisions in futu~; [!j , pdates.
The distributor i s ' . Mensuring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with documents.
~~-------------------------------------
High Voltage Repacking Procedure Appendix 6. N

DOCUMENT ID: DXSEOOOO REV: B DATE: 517197 CO: 4148
TITLE: High Voltage Connection Repacking Procedure
qOCUMENT OWNER: Service WRITIEN BY: Scott Shropshire
DEPT APPROVAL: QA APPROVAL 7. ~¥-
PURPOSE
This procedure outlines how to repack the high voltage connections during a preventative
maintenance visit or when replacing the tube head, high voltage power supplies, or high
voltage cables. . .
APPLICATION Before Using
This document applies toward the repacking of all DEXA high voltage connections.
RESPONSIBILITY
Personnel who replace high voltage components ore perform preventative maintenance
visits on DEXA systems are responsible for following these work instructions.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS
Thorough Cleaning:
It is very important that all of the High Voltage connections be thoroughly cleaned. The
reason for repacking the connections is to assure that the entire joint between mating
connectors is filled with the special dielectric Insulating Compound. Any gaps, lint or
finger oil can be a site for moisture. Water is a polarized molecule that helps break down
the electric field through a spark discharge. Trapped air can be ionized by the large
potential. This corona discharge causes the insulation of the Tube Head and cable
connectors to deteriorate.
,- Protect the Scanner:

'. ' ~"
This operation must be performed around very sensitive circuitry. Move the scan arm
down to the foot end of the scanner, turn off and unplug the scanner. Be sure to spread
out the large absorbent pads supplied with the Repacking Kit underneath the Tube Head,
to cover the power entrance filter and power supplies.

Controlled Document
IWNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXSEOOOO REV: B DATE 5nl97 co: 4148
Connector Cross Threading:

The two inch diameter connectors at the Tube Head end are made of aluminum. These
connectors screw into the Tube Head enclosure which is also made of aluminum. Due to
the large diameter of the connector and the stiffness of the cable, it is difficult to line up the
threads properly, and cross-threading often results. Once the Tube Head or cable threads
are damaged, they must be replaced.
How to prevent cross threading:

Begin with very clean connector threads. Clean both sets of threads with clean alcohol
pads or equivalent.
Give yourself as much slack as possible in the cable to allow the cable to be straight away
from the connector. Position the connector ring so that it appears to be straight in line with
the Tube Head.
Begin threading with your fingers. Generally the first three or four revolutions, as the
connector screws into the Tube Head, may be accomplished with your fingers. If it begins
to turn hard, immediately back the connector out of the threads and try again .
Application of the Insulation Compound

Squeeze out a liberal coat of the Insulating Compound supplied in the syringe to the Tube
Head connector and power supply receptacles (as s'hown in the "High Voltage Grease
Detail" drawings on pages 7 and 8). This amount is enough to form an air free barrier
between the two mating surfaces, but not enough to prevent them from mating fully.
PROCEIJURES
1. Turn off the scanner main power switch on the bottom front panel at the foot end of
the table. Disconnect the scanner from the wall or outlet strip.
2. Grasp the upright column of the arm assembly and pull the scan arm down to the
foot end of the scanner.
3. Unlock and lower the front door. Unlock, drop, and slide off the foot end panel.
4. Observe how the cables are fastened to the cable mounting bracket beneath the
Tube Head : It will · b~e necessary to fasten these cables in the sarn~ way after the
repacking procedure. Use a di'agonal (iitters to cut the wire ties holding the cables
to the mounting bracket to insure that the high voltage cables are not cut or
damag ed . It is important to have these cables free during the cleaning procedure,
so that it is not necessary to bend the cables sharply.

Controlled Document
'......R· DOCUMENT 10: DXSEOOOO I REV: B I DATE 517197 ICO: 4148
5. Begin to remove the High Voltage Cable connector from the Tube Head using the
special wrench (LUNAR part number 0283). Insert this wrench into two of the holes
I I
in the connector ring. Viewing the connector ring underneath the Tube Head, rotate
the ring counter-clockwise to loosen. When the ring falls lose, the connector can
be-removed. It may require considerable force to pull the connector loose if the old
Insulating Compound still forms a good seal. Break this seal by tilting the
connector first to one side and then to the other, slowly wiggling the connector
loose.
IMMEDIATELY GROUND THE CENTER CONDUCTOR OF THE HIGH VOLTAGE

CABLE BY TOUCHING IT TO THE TUBE HEAD ENCLOSURE. The power
supplies bleed off the charge stored in the capacitance of the cable, BUT DO NOT
ASSUME THIS!
6. Disconnect the ground wires from the High Voltage Cable connectors at the High
Voltage Power Supplies located near the head end of the scanner. Remove the
cable connector from the power supply by twisting the outer ring counter-clockwise
until loose. Once the ring is loose, pullout the connector.
7. Use the "lint-free towel supplied with the Repacking kit to remove all the old
Insulating Compound from both ends of the cable and the mating surfaces on the
power supplies and the Tube Head. Use the cotton swabs supplied with the
Repacking Kit to clean the hard to reach areas (e.g., the brass center sockets on
the Tube Head connectors, and the inside of the connectors on the Hi~~h Voltage
Power Supplies). Next clean the cable ends and the receptacles with alcohol pads.
DO NOT TOUCH THE CONNECTORS OR RECEPTACLES AFTER GLEANING.
8. Inspect all of the connector surfaces for any signs of arc tracks. Arc tracks will be
black or brown streaks or burned areas. IF ARC TRACKS ARE PRESENT, THE.
CONNECTION WILL EVENTUALLY ARC AGAIN. Superficial arc tracks may be
removed by carefully excising the discolored piece of rubber from the plug. An arc
track on a Tube Head receptacle will necessitate eventual replacement of the Tube
Head.
9. Put on new plastic gloves (do not use powder coated gloves).
" 1b., Inject 1.5 to 2.0 cc into the inside end of each High Voltage Power Supply
connector as shown in figure 1.
11. Insert the cable connector into the High Voltage Power Supply. Slowly rotate each
plug as it pushes into place. The rotation will help to evenly spread the Insulating
Compound as it extrudes up the sides of the connector. Once the insertion of the
plug is started, do not back the plug out or remove it from the connector or air will
be introduced into the connection .

Controlled Document
IWIIAI~ DOCUMENT ID: DXSEOOOO DATE 5/7/97 co: 4148
12. Reconnect the grounding system between the chassis, the power supplies and the
cable connectors.
13. Squeeze approximately 2cc of insulation compound onto the tip of each tube head
connector as in figure 2. Also, fill the tube head receptacles with 3cc of insulation
compound.
14. Insert each connector into the tube head, n1ake sure the polarity is correct. Slowly
rotat~~the plug as it pushes into place. Once the insertion of the plug is started, do
not back the plug out or remove it from the connector or air will be introduced into
the connection.
15. Tighten the connector ring into the Tube Head with your fingers. It should be
poss!ble to turn the ring three full turns with the fingers before it is necessary to use
the tube head wrench. If this is not possible, the connector ring may be cross
threaded.
16. Replace the 6-32 o-ring sealing screw into the connector after the excess Insulation
Compound is sq ueezed out.
17. Use two large wire ties to tie the cables to the cable bracket.
18. Wipe off any excess Insulating Compound from around each connector.

Controlled Document
IWIIAR· DOCUMENT 10: DXSEDDDD I REV: B I DATE 5nt97 I co: 4148
Back of High Voltage

Power Supply
I I
High Voltage Power

Supply Receptacle
1.5cc High Voltage grease

CLEAN-No Apply Grease only at the
bottom of the receptacle.
High Voltage Cable Plug:

High Voltage Power Supply Termination
High Voltage Power Supply Receptacle

Cut away view
Figure 1

Controlled Document
'Ii..... DOCUMENT 10: DXSEOOOO REV: B DATE 517197 co: 4148
High Voltage Grease:
High voltage cable plug:

Tube Head: termination
Tube Head High Voltage

Receptacle
J
Cut away view
Figure 2

Controlled Document
Appendix 6.0 Laser Replacement Procedure

LUNAR@ DPX-IQ Service Manual Hev. E (3/98)
, I
Appendix 6.0
Laser Replacement Procedure
Work Instructions [DXSE0001]
.'€;.,
This appendix contains the latest work instructions for replacing a laser PO<?i~i~~lease
carefully read .and f?lIow the steps described in the "PROCEDURES" s~OMne document
when performing thiS procedure. ...~~~.
•~~~~~ ":!'"
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as 9f ,~_ of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual UP~~ .:; ~~~er, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any ~i~~/H1out notice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically n.otify~ .' .~... : ors. of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in futu!fPilJ!lVTtJPdates.
The distributor is
are updated with "'. ~, '
Z.yb/~~nSUring
. nt documents.
that all copies of the SeNice Manual
------------:::::::::::--':' " .. :,
Laser Replacement Procedure Appendix 6.0

DOCUMENT tD: DXSE0001
'T ITLE: DEXA Laser Replacement Procedures
- DOCUMENT TYPE: Work Instructions

DOCUMENT OWNER: Service WRITTEN BY:
DEPT APPROVAL: QA APPROVAL-""'---- ~
PURPOSE Before Using
This procedure describes the method of replacing defective lasers in Lunar DEXA
scanners.
APPLICATION
This procedure applies to any employee involved in the servicing of Lunar scanners
equipped with lasers. The laser compliance procedure is referenced by this procedure
and is to be used as the means of testing the replacement laser.
RESPONSIBILITY
. Defective lasers are to be replaced by field service technicians. The entire assembly is
replaced with a new assembly.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT STARE INTO THE LASER BEAM at any time during the test or replacement of a
laser. The light reflected from the table top or shutter/collimator assembly should be
sufficient to determine if the laser is correctly operating.
PROCEDURES
1. Remove the foot end arm cover.
2.' Disconnect the two cables from the laser printed circuit board.
3. Remove the four screws from the laser printed circuit board. Raise the board until
the wires to the laser underneath the board are exposed. Pull gently on these
wires to slide the laser out of the holder.
4. Slide the new laser into the holder, and fasten the laser printed circuit board into
place with the four screws.

DOCUMENT ID: DXSE0001 REV:A DATE5~Offi6 ECO: 3408
5. Plug the connector from the front panel indicator lamp into the 'YIDEO OUT"
connection on the circuit board. Plug the cable from the upper cable bundle into
the 'Yin" connection on the circuit board.
6. Verify that the OINK board has a jumper wire across R25.
7. Test the operation of the laser according to procedure LAS_CMP1 using form
number LAS_CHK2. DO NOT LOOK DIRECTLY INTO THE BEAM.
8. Replace the foot end arm cover.
System Tests
1. Using the systems software, start an AP Spine scan. Verify the Laser is turned
on when the "Adjust Start Position" message is displayed.
2. Verify the LASER ON light (emission indicator) is illuITlinated.
3. Position the scan arm and press <Esc> to start the scan. Verify the Laser is
turned off and the emission indicator is no longer visible.
4. Using the systems software, start an AP Spine scan. Verify the Laser is turned
on when the "Adjust Start Position" message is displayed. Press the
Emergency Stop button and verify the laser is turned off.

I J
Appendix 6.P
DEXA Label Replacement
Work Instructions [DXSE0002] _
.~",
~~
This appendix contains work instructions for replacing labels for certified cQm~~.
.. . . . , ~~~~~~
NOTE: The revIsIon of thIs document IS current as of the fJme~se of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. Howe.~~~is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time wit~~e. The LUNAR Service
Department will ~rio~ica"y notify distrib~~,-\ilfny changes and provide copies
of the latest revisIOns In future Manu~~ff1s.
The distributor is responsibl . G"7tn~ that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the curren .o~ments.
DEXA Label Replacement Appendix 6. P

.~
Appendix 6. P DEXA Label Replacement

TITLE: DEXA Label Replacement
DOCUMENT OWNER: Service
DEPT. APPROVAL:
PURPOSE
This procedure is to ensure that labels for certified components are replaced on the foot
panel of a scanner at the time of the component replacement.
APPLICATION
This Procedure applies to all field personnel involved in component replacement.
0441 DPX Service Manual UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT
3939 DPX-IQ Service Manual Verify Latest Revision
. Before Using
PROCEDURE
Replace the label(s) on the foot panel with the extra label(s) provided when replacing any
of the following certified components:
Part Label Part Number Certified Component

Number
2288 3207 Tube Head
0311 3205 (Spellman) or 3564 . Negative High Voltage
(Bertan) Power Supply
0312 3205 (Spellman) or 3564 Positive High Voltage Power
(Bertan) Supply
2898 3206 Shutter/Collimator Assembly

DO NOT COpy WITHOUT QA AUTHORIZATION
Appendix 6.0 OINK Board Modification

I I
Appendix 6. Q
OINK Board Modification
'\.
. This appendix contains work instructions for replacing an OINK board in ttw>f~~'
~" '~'~
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the tim , .,' se of the last
SeNice Manual or Service Manual UPdate.~ H~~1, is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time wit liiice. The LUNAR SeNice
Department will periodically notify d"is~n
. 'b , ~ , " ' y ~hanges and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manual ,,' .
(: ;..
The distributor is responsibl,- A 'ng that all copies of the 8eNice Manual
are updated With the cur:enfIfJlI3·1fttnts.
OINK Board Modification Appendix 6.0

LUNAR®DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0003 REV: B DATE: 5/16/97 CO: 4159
TITLE: OINK Board Modification
DO,CUMENT OWNER: Service WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire
PURPOSE
This document addresses compatibility issues between the current OINK board and older
systems.
APPLICA TION Verify Latest Revision
Before Usi ng
This document applies to the DEXA series of bone densitometers.
RESPONSIBILITY
Lunar authorized personnel who replace an OINK board in the field are responsible for
following these instructions.
PROCEDURES
1. LASER POSITIONER VS. LED POSITIONER
A. For Revision E OINK boards and higher, the current limiting resistor required
for the original light emitting diode patient locating lamp is no longer required
with the laser positioning light. A jumper must be installed on JB2 in order
for the laser diode to operate correctly.
CAUTION: If the jumper is installed on a system with the light emitting diode patient
locator, the diode will be destroyed.
NOTE: Revision 02C OINK boards have a red jumper over R25 that must be
removed for use with systems with the LED positioning light.
2. OMI BOARD COMPATIBILITY

A. Revision E and higher of the OINK board require a modification to the OMI
board. R1 is not populated for new scanners with revision E or higher OINK
boards and must'be removed when used as a replacement with these
boards. Inversely, R1 must be populated for use with Revision 02C OINK
boards and lower. Service replacement parts will be shipped with R 1
populated.
Controlled Document
LUNAR® DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0003 DATE: 5/16/9i CO: 5/16/97
J1
+5VDC
SIGNAL Not Populate Jar..OINK
R2
Rev. E an Higher
GND 220
Figure 1 - OMI Board Schematic
LRC-OMI-01A
(c) 1987 J1 0 0 0
W R2
LUNAR CORP
-(=Hilllilf
+
o o o R1
Cut Here To Remove if OINK is Rev. E or Higher
Figure 2 - The OMI Board

Controlled Document
LUNAR®DOCUMENT 10: . DXSE0003 REV: 8 DATE: 5/16/97 co: 5/16/97
3. TRANSVERSE MOTOR COMPATIBILITY

I I A. There are three transverse motor types that can be used with OEXA
scanners. When replacing a transverse stepper motor, refer to the following
tables for proper motor configuration.
CAUTION: If a transverse stepper motor is not wired properly, it may stall or cause other
motion errors.
Wiring Configuration
Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior Motor

OINK - F Serial Serial Serial
V (N K ·~ J~ , )'51 jJ(
*The resjstor to be rdde.d is 47 kQ bE~tween pins 11 and 12 on the transverse Centent.
o ,[',)1: _ j. : :,.~ ~!
~~~' Ar:
ForSerialConfigu~ation
Centent Pi n # Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior I\notor

3 fFIJS(B; Red oR y,1\) t:: Red Red
4 !J Blue Yellow RedlWhite
5 v
/
....
Green Black Green
6 )) Black Orange GreenlWhite
For Parallel Configuration
Centent Pin # Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior Motor

5 Yellow Not Possible Not Possible

Controlled Document
Append\x-:6. R Transverse Motor Service Replacement

--- I I
Appendix 6.R
Transverse Motor Service Replacement
, $.
~,
This appendix contains work instructions for replacing transverse motor in #1~~
s, ':. ~~c 4:EJf
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the time - se of th€~ last
Hll'
i ,
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. e~. ~: .~ is an 'uncontrolled'

copy and is subject to change at any time wJt '" ~ . ~be. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distrib~~ y changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manu~fi!{tfes.
The distributor is responsibl '~nng that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the curren ,' p~~~ts.
Transverse Motor Service Replacement Appendix 6.R

WNAR DOCUMENT ID: DXSE0025 REV: A DATE: 5/16/97 co: 4185
TITLE: Transverse Motor Service Replacement
---- DOCUMENT OWNER: Service WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire

PURPOSE
To document the wiring requirements for transverse stepper motor field replacements
necessary for use with various OINK board revisions.
APPLICATION UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT

This document applies toward transverse motors replaced in the field. Before Using
RESPONSIBILITY
Lunar authorized personnel who replace transverse motors are responsible for following
these instructions.
PROCEDURES
There are three transverse motor types that can be used with DEXA scanners. When
replacing a transverse stepper motor, refer to the following tables for proper rnotor
config uration.
CAUTION: If a transverse stepper motor is not wired properly, it may stall or cause
other motion errors.
Wiring Configuration
Oriental Motor AMP Motor Superior Motor
OINK - F Serial Serial Serial
*The resistor to be added is 47 kQ between pins 11 and 12 on the transverse Centent.

Controlled Document
IWJIAR" DOCUMENT ID: DXSE0025I REV: A I DATE: 5/16/97 I CO: 4185
For Serial Configuration

. .. Sup~nor . Motor .··
3 Red Red Red
4 Blue Yellow RedlWhite
5 Green Black Green
6 Black Orange GreenlWhite
For Parallell Configuration
: e~htent: Pih?# ·:. /··..·\U!:!Qti~liti.ll:! M(jt6r n···:.·:··::·· .U~l\I.Ie· 1\II6t&t··.}:.·.·.< :.: .: • :•.•. :.• SijpgriptMptO~ .• o:...::

5 Yellow Not Possible Not Possible

Controlled Document
Appendix 6.S OM I Board Service Replacement

DPX-IQ Service Manual RE~V. E (3/98)
I I
Appendix 6.S
OMI Board Service Replacement
Work Instructions [DXSE0026] ~,
~i~;)
~.;,
This appendix contains work instructions for replacing an OMI board in t~a~l~:-;~
..~ 't"C~';':.....;.·~~
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the tim . . ~, se of th€~ last
• •. ~Io.,..
Service Manual or Service Manual UPdate .. ~ ~. ~8:. ,~, . I 'is an 'uncontrolled'

copy and is subject to change at any time 'lfJt . _., ,¥ e . The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distrib. 1fl. ~~
..-"",<. :..' Y changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manua/~res.
~~-~~'" ~.):I
';~~ ,
The distributor is responsibl , if" ~ffng that all copies of the ServiCf.~ Manual
are updated with the curren ..oc1iJ~nts.
~. ":;,,.
OMI Board Service Replacement Appendix 6.S

LUNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0026 REV: A DATE: 5/16/97 CO: 4185
TITLE: OMI Board Service Replacement
DOCUMENT OWNER: Service
, I
WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire
PURPOSE
To document modifications to the OMI board necessary for use with various OINK
board revisions.
- APPLICATION Verify Latest Revision
Before Using
This document applies toward OMI boards replaced in the field.
RESPONSIBILITY
Lunar authorized personnel who replace OMI boards are responsible for following these
instructions.
PROCEDURES
The OMI board is no longer compatible with all revisions of OINK boards. R1 is not
populated for new scanners with revision E or higher OINK boards and must be
removed on both transverse and longitudinal boards when used as replacements.
Inversely, R1 nlust be populated for both boards for use with Revision ·02C OINK
boards and lower. Service replacement OMI boards will be shipped with R1 populated.
J1
+5 VDC
Not Populate tor OINK
SIGNAL Rev. E an Higher
R2
220
GND
R1 :
10k
Figure 1 - OMI Board Schematic

Controlled Document
IiUNIR* DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0026 REV: A DATE: 5/16/97 co: 4185
LRC-OMI-01A ~
(C) 1987 Jl 0 0 0
LUNAR CORP
-ellill =r ~-- R2
+
o D 0
R1
Cut Here To Remove if OINK is Rev. E or Higher
Figure 2 - The OMI Board

Controlled Document
Appendix 6. T
System Change History Record
[SYS_HSTO]
This appendix contains the a system change history record. This record
each system worked on. ~~, ~'$
slil9~oPied for
~~ ~"j;.
, ..~;i>,."'~.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of '" release of th(3 last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. H(j~'tei:',' this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any ti·,m~~x.r,;f:HG!~~nn1~ir'l=J. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify di any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Ma tes.
The distributor is re5;f)O,nShO/a~0~ie~1S~ ring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with
System Change History Record Appendix 6.T

SYSTEM CHA GE HISTC)RY .- - - --- . -
UNCONTROLLEO DOCUME~T SYS_HSTO.DRW 14JAN92

. '
Verify Latest Revision ml~STEA 0
Before Us;ng
_._
ITEM SERIAL# DATE CHANGED B'I
.
~ ,
'--
Appendix 6.T System Change History Record

Appendix 6. U
DPX Certified Components
Specification [OXRAOOOO]
This appendix contains the DPX Certified Components list.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the timt;.~~se of the last
Service M~nua/.or Service Manual UP?ate ..f-!~.~e~.,;Af'4ftiJS is an 'uncontrolle?' .
copy and IS subject to change at any tIme 'l!ltfJ?!J/iiii#ce. The LUNAR ServIce
Department wiII.~rio~ically notify distrib"~;Wny changes and provide copies
of the latest revIsIons In future Manua/~tes.
~·~0·'\:'~
The distributoris responsib/~ &~n;that all copies of the Service Manual

are updated wIth the curren~ments.
DPX Certified Components Appendix 6.U

REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 ICO: 4511 --~.
TITLE: DPX Certified Components
DOCUMENT TYPE: Specification
DOCUMENT OWNER: Regulatory Affairs Randy Joswig
AUTHOR/MODIFIER APPROVAL: p,
PURPOSE
This listing specifies all certified components in the DPX-Series of x-ray bone
densitometers. This includes the .LUNAR DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-<x,), DPX-A,
DPX-SF and DPX-IQ. It is Lunar's policy to certify all x-ray controllers, bearn limiting
devices, high voltage power supplies, and tube housing assemblies. All such devices used
the in above mentioned bone densitometers shall be listed here.
APPLICATION
All personnel installing, servicing, and generating labeling for DPX Systems (Applications,
Service, Sales, Production, and Documentation) will follow this specification. This
specification applies to all Lunar DPX Series systems.
...
RESPONSIBILITY
The Regulatory Affairs Manager is responsible 'for ensuring this list of compatible
components is kept current and that all such components are certified, as necessary, with
the FDA through the Initial Report and Report of Model Change processes.
Personnel who install and service Lunar systems are responsible for being familiar with
this list and ensuring systems installed and serviced use components on this list.
Verify lates1 RI;,vision
Before Using

This docuneot c:ontains confidential Of proprietary infonnatiOn of l.I.ner Corp. Neither the doo..ment nor the Wonnation therein is to be repnxIuoed, distributed, IJSed Of disclosed,
either In wtlOIe Of In part, except as apedfally euthoriZed by l.La'lar Corp.
IWNAR" DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511
LUNAR DPX series COMPATIBLE COMPONENTS

Beam Limiting Device
COMPONENT LUNAR MODEL#
PART #
LUNAR DPX Collimator Assembly 2898 2898 /''J,l~! -'ILl( ('-,
1,....., -
LUNAR DPX Collimator Assembly 3008 3008
X-Ray Generator (High Voltage Power Supplies)

PART #
Bertan 1 Model 740A-50P (1 rnA) 5118 5118
Bertan 1 Model 740A-SON (1rnA) 5122 5122
Spellman2 Model PTV40P200X1728/PTV40P200X2112 (5mA) 0312 0312
Spellman 2 Model PTV40N200X1729/PTV40N200X2113 (5mA) 0311 0311
Bertan 1 Model 2411 AP (SmA) 0312
- - 0312
Bertan 1 Model 2411 AN (SmA) 0311 0311
Tube Head Assembly

COMPONENT LUNAR MODEL# I
PART #
Lunar X-Ray Tube Head AsserTibly (Brand) .., 2288 2288
Lunar X-Ray Tube Head Assembly (TnJ Focus) 1908 1908 I
1Bertan Associates, Inc., Hicksville, NY,

2Spellman High Voltage Electronics, Plainview, NY

This document contains confidential Of proprietary Information of l..lxlar Corp, Neither the docunent nor the Information therein Is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of disclosed,
either In whole Of in part, excep( as specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO I REV: U I DATE: 11/6/97 I CO: 4511
DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-a, DPX-A), DPX-SF
X-Ray Controller (18M 3 based, sorted b
PART #
3093 3093
043'7 . 0437
isk
el 35SX - 40MB Disk -
Model L40SX - 60MB - 20 M
Model40SX
40MB Disk - 20 MH
- 80MB Disk - 20 M
Model50z
- 30MB Disk
Model 60
- 44MB Disk 3105 3105
-70MB Disk 3106 31
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Pclge 3 of 13

This dO<:1JTT1ent contains confidential 0( propOet8fy infom'lation of lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the infOfTTlation therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used 0( disclosed,
either in wtlole Of in part, except as specifically authorized by lunar COfP.
IWNAR" DOCUMENT ID: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511

X-Ra Contlroller 18M 3 based, sorted , continued:
PART #
r-------------------------------------------~~
odel 70 - i486 -
- i486 - 120 B Dis
- 80MB - 20 MHz
- 160MB - 20 MHz
- 80MB - 25 MHz
- 160M MHz
Model 90
- 80MB - 25
33 z
Disk 20 MHz
- 160MB Dis 20 MHz
- 80MB - 25 Hz
- 1601V1B - 25 MHz
- 160MB - 33 MHz
- 400MB-
QUALllY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page 4 of 13

This document contains confidential or proprietary information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the information therein is to be reproduced , distributed, used or disdosed,
eilher in whole or in part, except as specifICally authorized by Lunar CO(1).
WNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 I CO: 4511
DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (OPX-a, DPX-A), DPX-SF
X-Ray Controller (De1l 4 based, sorted b Component):
PART #
Model P133GSM - 16MB - Windows 3.11 1759t; XRC1
Model 333/L - 80MB - 33 MHz 1633 1633
Model 433P
-100 - 100MB - 33 MHz
-200 - 200MB - 33 MHz
- 230MB - 33 MHz
- 80MB - 33 MH
Model 433/NP
- 120MB - 33 MHz 1684 1684
- 170MB - 33 MHz 1823 1823
- 210MB - 33 MHz 1899 1899
- 230MB - 33 MHz 1688
- 270MB - 33 MH 1780
33 MHz 2701 2701
Model 450/M - 500MB - 50 MHz 17003 17003
Model 450/MX
- 230MB - 50 MHz 1686
- 500MB - 50 MHz 1682
Mod I 466/MX- 230MB - 66 MHz 17034'
Model 466/LE
- 270MB, 4MB - 66 MHz
- 270MB, 8MB - 66 MHz
- 528MB, 4MB - 66 MHz
- 528MB, 8MB - 66 MHz
- 365MB, 8MB - 66 MHz
- 365MB, 4MB - 66 MHz
- 1GB, 4MB - 66 MHz
Model 466/MTE, 270 MB Tower - 66 MHz
Model 486P
-100 - 100MB - 33 MHz 1318 1318
-200 - 200MB - 33 MHz 1309 1309
Model G575 - 528MB, 8MB - 75 MHz 3808 3808

This document contains confidential 0( proprietary nonnation of Lunar Corp. Neither the document FlO( the infonnation therein is to be reprC>dc..o~, distributed, used Of di.:ldosed.
eithef in whole Of in part. except as SpecifICally authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWNARo DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511

X-Ray Controller (De1l 4 based, sorted by Component), continued:
PART #
Model 575(~M - Pentium .. 528MB, 16MB - 75 MHz 4085 4085
Model 590/XM ~_~_:
- Pentium - 270MB 17203 17203
- Pentium, 365MB, 8 MB 17316 17316
- Pentium, 365MB, 16 MB 17324 17324
- Pentium, 528MB, 8 MB 17329 17329
r----------~----~.------------------------~
Model 590XM
-1GB, 32 MB Ram 17456 17456
- 1.6 G HD, 16 MB Ram 17361 17361
- 528MB, 16 MB Ram 17380 17380
Model 41 OOCX Notebook 3249 3249
Model 590XM, Pentium, 1GB, 8MB 17384 17384
Model 5120GM
- 1 GB, 8 MB 17451 5120GM
-1 GB, 8 MB 17451 XRC1
-1GB, 16 MB 4075 5120GM
- 1GB, 16 MB 4075 XRC1
...
Model 5133GM
-1GB,8MB 17557 5133GM
-1GB,8MB 17557 XRC1
-1GB, 16MB 17559 5133GM
- 1GB, 16MB 17559 XRC1
- 2GB, 16MB 17567 5133GM
- 2GB, 16MB 17567 XRC1
- 2GB, 16MB wNVindows '95 4579 5133GM
- 2GB, 16MB wNVindows '95 4579 XRC1
Model Latitude XPi, 1.2GB, 8MB - 90 MHz w/ Desk Dock 4083 4083
DPX -IQ
X-Ray Controller (De1l 4 based, sorted by Component):
PART #
Model 51201XM, Pentium,, 1GM, 8MB -120 MHz 3828 3828
Model 5120/XM, Pentium, 1GM, 8MB.:120 MHz · 3828 . XRC1
Model 5120/GM - 1GB - 16MB 4075 4075
Model 5120/GM - 1GB - 16MB 4075 XRC1

This document contains confidential Of proprietary in1onnatioo of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the in1onnation therein is to be reproduced , distributed, used Of disclosed,
eithef- in whole Of in part, except as speciflCalty authorized by Lunar Corp.
WNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 I CO: 4511
DPX -IQ
X-Ra Controller (De1l 4 based, sorted by Component), continued:
PART #
Model 5133/GM
- 1GB, 8MB 4398 ·5133GM
-1GB, 8MB 4398 XRC1
-1GB, 16MB 4415 5133GM
-1GB, 16MB ·4415 XRC1
- 2GB, 16MB -133 Mh 4579 5133GM
- 2GB, 16MB - 133 Mhz 4579 XRC1
- 2GB, 32MB 4647 5133GM
- 2GB, 32MB 4647 XRC1
Model 590XM - 1GB - 32MB 17456 17456
M 528GB - 16MB 4085 575GM
Model 575GM - 528GB - 16MB 4085 XRC1
Model 5200GXM
- 2GB, 32MB w/1 0/1 00 Ether Card 4634- 5200GXM
- 2GB, 32MB w/1 0/1 00 Ether Card 4634- XRC1
- 2GB, 32MB 4724- 5200GXM
- 2GB, 32MB 4724- XRC1
Model 5200GXiM - 2GB - 32MB .. 4756 5200GXiM
Model 5200GXiM - 2GB - 32MB 4756i XRC1
Model P5MMX200/GXiM - 2GB, B XRC
Model P5MMX1 M - 2GB, 32MB 5475, XRC1
Model P133GsM
-2GB-16MB 4846 XRC1
- 2GB - 32MB 4769 XRC1
Model P166GsM - 2GB - 32MB - 166 MHz 8 XRC1

This dOOJment COfltains confidential ()( proprietary infonnation of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the infonnation therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used or disdosed,
either in w!ioIe ()( in part, except as specifICally authorized by Lunar Corp.
IWNAR· DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511
DPX -IQ -
X-Ray Controller ACER s based, sorted b
PART#
Model 2021 - 2 ,16MB - 166MHz
Model 2021 .- 2GB, 16MB - 166MHz
Model 2181 .- 6.4GB, 32MB - 233MHz
Model 2341
- 8MB RAM
- 8MB RAM
Model 2341+
- 16 WIB RAM
- 16 WIB RAM
- 1.6 B, 32MB - 1 MHz (blk)
- 1.6GB, 32MB - 133 MHz blk
Model 2731
- 2GB, 16MB - 166MHz 4928 XRC1
- 2GB, 32MB - 166MHz 4928 XRC1
Model 2831 .. 1.6GB, 16MB - 133MHz 4713 2831
M el2831 ,16MB - 133MHz 4713 XRC1
DPX, DPX-A, DPX -IQ .,

X-Ray Controller (CITUS based, sorted by Component): 6

PART #
(white) 1.2GB, 16MB - 100 MHz 4781 XRC1
(black) 2.1 GB, 16MB - 100 MHz 5016 XRC1
(black) 2.1 GB, 32MB - 166 MHz, Internal Jaz Drive 4957 XRC1
(black) 2.1GB, 32MB - 166 MHz, Internal Zip Drive 4967 XRC1
(black) 2.1 GB, 32MB - 200 MHz, Internal Zip Drive 4955 XRC1
(beige) 2.1GB, 32MB - 200 MHz, Internal Zip Drive 4969 XRC1
'Bertan Associates, Inc., Hicksville, NY
31ntemational Business Machines, Annonk, NY
4Dell Computer Corporation, Austin, TX
5ACER American, San Jose, CA
6CITUS (Granite Microsystems), Mequon, WI

This document conta ins confidential 0( proprietary infcxmation of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the infcxmation therein is to be reproduced. distributed, used 0( disclosed,
eilhef in whole 0( in part, except as specifteally authorized by Lunar Corp.
.
WNAR~ DOCUMENT ID: REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511
~·>··1
DXRAOOOO \
J
, DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-a, DPX-A), DPX-SF
X-Ray Controller (18M 3 based, sorted by Part #):
PART #
Model 70 - 60MB Disk - 16 MHz 0126 0126
Model 70 - 120MB Disk - 20 MHz 0127 ·01"27
Model 50z - 30MB Disk 0140 0140
Model 50z - 60MB Disk 0141 0141
Model 70 - 120MB Disk - 25 MHz 0157 . "0157
Model 55SX - 30MB Disk 0233 0233
Model 55SX - 60MB Disk 0234- 0234
Model 70 - 60MB Disk - 25 MHz 0235 0235
Model 70 - 60MB Disk - 20 MHz 0248 0248
Model 30 - 30MB Disk - 8 MHz 0425 0425
Model 25 - 30MB Disk - 10 MHz 0437 0437
Model 30 - 20MB Disk-10 MHz 0527 0527
Model 30 - 40MB Disk 0710 0710
Model 70 - i486 - 60MB Disk - 25 MHz 0711 0711
Model 70 - i486 - 120MB Disk - 25 MHz 0712 0712
Model 90XP - 80MB Disk - 20 MHz 0713 0713
Model 90XP - 160MB Disk - 20 MHz 0714 0714
"'---.
Model L40SX - 60MB - 20 MHz 0735 0735
~
...
Model 35SX - 40MB Disk - 20 MHz 0754 0754
Model 40SX - 40MB Disk - 20 MHz . 0755 0755
Model 57SX - 80MB Disk- 20 MHz 0757 0757
Model 57SX - 160MB Disk- 20 MHz 0758 0758
Model 70 - 80MB - 20 MHz 0759 0759
Model 70 - 160MB - 20 MHz 0760 0760
Model 70 - 80MB - 25 MHz 0761 0761
Model 70 - 160MB - 25 MHz 0762 0762
Model 90 - 80MB - 25 MHz 0800 0800
Model 90 - 320MB - 33 MHz 0801 0801
Model 95 - 160MB - 25 MHz 0802 0802
Model 95- 320MB - 25 MHz 0803 0803
Model 95- 320MB - 33 MHz 0804 0804
Model 95XP- 160MB - 20 MHz 0805 0805
Model 95XP - 400MB- 20 MHz 0806 0806
Model 90XP - 80MB - 25 MHz 1150 1150
Model 90XP - 160MB - 25 MHz 1151 1151

This document cootains conftdential ex proprietary infonnatioo of Lunar Corp. Neithef" the dorument nor the infonnatioo therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used ex disclosed,
either in whole ex in part, except as speciflCSlly authorized by Lunar Corp.
WNAR® DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO OATE: 11/6/97 CO: 4511
DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-o:, DPX-A), DPX-SF

X-Ray Controller (18M 3 based, sorted by Part#), continued:
PART #
Model 90XP - 160MB - 33 MHz 1174 1174
Model 90XP - 400MB - 33 MHz 1188 1188
Model 95XP- 80MB - 25 MHz 1189 1189
Model 95XP- 160MB - 25 MHz 1196 1196
. Model 56SLC - 80MB Disk- 20 MHz 1341 1341
Model 56SLC - 160MB Disk- 20 MHz 1342 1342
Model 325T(C20) - 80MB - 25 MHz 1611 1611
Model 325T(C40) - 170MB - 25 MHz 1644 1644
Model 6381 M30 - 120MB (486DX) - 33 MHz 1695 1695
Model 486/DX2Sp -80486-528MB - 33 MHz 2780 2780
AT-30 3093 3093
Model 60 - 44MB Disk 3105 3105
Model 60 - 70MB Disk 3106 3106
Model 6484-X4G, 100 MHz 80486 - 364 MB .. 3678 3678 I
Model 6576-35F, 75 MHz Pentium - 540 MB 3725 3725

~ ...
DPX, OPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-a, DPX-A), OPX-SF

X-Ray Controller (Oe1l 4 based, sorted by Part #):
PART #
Model 486P-200 - 200MB - 33 MHz 1309 1309
Model 433P-200 - 200MB - 33 MHz 1315 1315
Model 433P-1 00 - 100MB - 33 MHz 1317 1317
Model 486P-1 00 - 100MB - 33 MHz 1318 1318
Model 433/L - 230MB - 33 MHz 1517 1517
Model 433/L - 120MB - 33 MHz 1577 1577
Model 433/L - 80MB - 33 MHz 1632 1632
Model 333/L - 80MB - 33 MHz 1633 1633
Model 450/MX - 500MB - 50 MHz 1682 1682
Model 433/NP - 120MB - 33 MHz .' 1684 1684
Model 450/MX- 230MB - 50 MHz 1686 1686
Model 433/NP- 230MB - 33 MHz 1688 1688
Model 433/NP- 270MB - 33 MHz 1780 1780
Model 433/NP - 170MB - 33 MHz 1823 1823

This doo.Jment contains confidential Of proprietary infonnation of Lunar CQfp. Neither the document nor the infonnation therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of disclosed.
either in whole or in part, except as specifICally authorized by Lunar CQfp.
WNAR®DOCUMENT ID: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 CO: 4511
DPX, DPX-L DPX-ALPHA (DPX-u, DPX-A), DPX-SF

X-Ray Controller (De1l 4 based, sorted by Part #), continued·
PART #
Model 433/NP - 210MB - 33 MHz 1899 1899
Model 433/NP - - 528MB - 33 MHz 2701 2701
Model 466/LE - 270MB, 4MB - 66 MHz 2945 2945
Model 466/LE - 270MB, 8MB - 66 MHz 2947 2947
Model 41 OOCX Notebook 3249 3249
Model 466/MTE, 270 MB Tower - 66 MHz 3392 3392
Model 466/LE - 365MB, 8MB - 66 MHz 3490 3490
Model 466/LE - 365MB, 4MB - 66 MHz 3492 3492
Model 466/LE- 1GB, 4MB - 66 MHz 3518 3518
Model 466/LE - 528MB, 4MB - 66 MHz 3718 3718
Model 466/LE - 528MB, 8MB - 66 MHz 3720 3720
Model G575 - 528MB, 8MB - 75 MHz 3808 G575
Model G575 - 528MB, 8MB - 75 MHz 3808 XRC1
Model 5120/GM -1GB, 16MB 4075 5120GM
Model 5120/GM -1GB, 16MB 4075 XRC1
Model Latitude XPi, 1.2GB, 8MB - 90 MHz wI Desk Dock 4083 4083
Model 575/GM - Pentium - 528MB, 16MB - 75 MHz 4085 4085
Model 5133GM - 2GB, 16MB wlWindows '95
. 4579 5133GM
Model 5133GM - 2GB, 16MB wlWindows '95 4579 XRC1
..
Model 450/M - 500MB - 50 MHz 17003 17003
~
Model 466IXM - 230MB - 66 MHz 17034 17034

Model 590IXM - Pentium - 270MB 17203 17203
Model 590XM, Pentium, 365MB, 8 MB 17316 17316
Model 590XM, 1.6 G HD, 16 MB Ram 17361 17361
Model 590XM, 528MB, 16 MB Ram 17380 17380
Model 590XM, Pentium, 1GB, 8MB 17384 17384
Model 5120GM, 1GB, 8MB 17451 5120GM
Model 5120GM, 1GB, 8MB 17451 XRC1
Model 590XM - 1GB, 32MB 17456 17456
Model 5133GM -1GB, 8MB 17557 5133GM
Model 5133GM - 1GB, 8MB 17557 XRC1
Model 5133GM -1GB, 16MB 17559 5133GM
Model 5133GM - 2GB, 16MB 17567 5133GM
Model P133GSM - 16MB - Windows 3.11 17595 XRC1

This document contains coofldential Of proprietary information of Lunar COfl) Neither the document nor the information !herein is to be reproduced, distributed, used 0( disclosed,
either in whole Of in part, except as specifICally authorized by Lunar COfl'.
WNAR® DOCUMENT ID: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 CO: 4511
DPX -IQ
X - Ray C on t ro II er (D e 114 b ase d ,sorte dbIy Part #)
PART #
Model 5120/GM 3828 5120GM
Model 5120/GM 3828 XRC1
lodel5120/GM -1GB-16MB 4075 5120GM
Model 5120/GM -1GB-16MB 4075 XRC1
- -
Model 575GM-528GB-16MB ·085 575GM
Model 575GM-528GB-16MB 4085 XRC1
Model 5133/GM
- 1GB, 8MB 4398 5133GM
- 1GB, 8MB 4 398 X 1
- 1GB, 16MB 4415 5.133GM
1GB, 16 B 4415 XRC
- 2GB, 16MB 133 Mhz 4579 5133G
- 2GB, 16MB - 133 Mhz 4579 XRC1
Model 5200GXM - 2GB - 32MB w/1 0/1 00 Ether Card 4634 5200GXM
Model 5200GXM - 2GB - 32MB w/1 0/1 00 Ether Card 4634 XRC1
Model 5133/GM - 2GB, 2MB 4647 5133GM
Model 5133/GM - 2GB, 32MB 4647 XRC1
Model 5200GXM - 2GB - 32MB 4724 OOGXM
..
4
Model 5200GXM - 2GB - 32MB 4724 XRC1

Model 5200GXiM 2G - 32M ~
4756 5200GXiM
Model 5200GXiM - 2GB - 32MB 4756 XRC1
Model P133GSM - 2GB - 32M 4769 XRC1
- 2GB, 16MB wlWindows '95 4846 XRC1
Model P161 IGSM - 2GB - 32MB - 166 MHz 4838 XRC1
Model P5MMX200/GXiM - 2GB, 32MB 5473 XRC1
Model P5MMX166/GsM - 2GB, 32MB 5475 XRC1
Model 590XM - 1GB - 32MB 17456 17456

This document contains confidential or proprietary infonnatioo of Lunar Corp. Nei1her the docunent nor the infonnatioo therein is to be reproduced, distributed, used Of disclosed,
either in whole Of in part, except 8S specifICally authorized by Lunar Corp.
WNAR®DOCUMENT 10: DXRAOOOO REV: U DATE: 11/6/97 co: 4511
DPX -IQ
X-Ray Controller (ACER 5 based, sorted by Part #):
PART #
Model 2341+ - 16 MB RAM 4013 2341+
Model 2341+ - 16 MB RAM 4013 XRC1
Model 2341 - 8 MB RAM 4115 4115
Model 2341 - 8 MB RAM 4115 XRC1
Model 2341 + - 1.6GB, 32 MB RAM (blk) 4491 2341+
Model 2341 + - 1.6GB, 32 MB RAM (blk) 4491 XRC1
Model 2831 - 1.6GB, 16MB - 133MHz 4713 2831
Model 2831 - 1.6GB, 16MB - 133MHz 4713 XRC1
Model 2021 - 2GB, 16MB - 166MHz 4761 2021
Model 2021 - 2GB, 16MB - 166MHz 4761 XRC1
Model 2731
- 2GB, 16MB - 166MHz 4928 XRC1
- 2GB, 32MB - 166MHz 4928 XRC1
Model 2181 - 6.4GB, 32MB - 233MHz 5524 XRC1
DPX, DPX-A, DPX -IQ

X-Ray Controller (CITUS 6 based, sorted by Par; #):
COMPONENT '" LUNAR MODEL#
.. ~ . PART #
(white) 1.2GB, 16MB - 100 MHz 4781 XRC1
(beige) 2.1 GB, 32MB - 200 MHz, Internal Zip Drive 4969 XRC1
1Bertan Associates, Inc., Hicksville, NY
31ntemational Business Machines, Armonk, NY
4Dell Computer Corporation, Austin, TX
sACER American, San Jose, CA
6CITUS (Granite Microsystems), Mequon, WI
QUALITY SYSTEM DOCUMENT Page130f13

This dOOJment contains confidential 01" proprietary informatioo of Lunar Corp. Neither the dooJrnent nor the rlcxmatioo therein is to be reproduoed, distributed, used 01" disclo$ed.
either in whole 01" in part, except as speciflC8lly authorized by Lunar Corp.
Appendix 6. V ,"omega Drive Setup and Testing

NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the tim~~ftet§ase of the last
Service M~nua/.or Service Manual UP?ate. .JH . - ~ ''fflis is an 'uncontrolle?' ,
copy and IS subject to change at any ftm~s.w·1f ~~~, lIJiifdfJce. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distribll?~p ' ny changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manu~fJates.
The distributor is responsi ring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the Cu·~n~!U:\AI~''''1.Qn~C'
~--~----------------------------------
Iomega Drive Setup and-Testing Appendix 6.V

DOCUMENT ID: LUPC0001 CO: 4081
TITLE: Iomega Drive Setup and Test Procedures

DOCUMENT OWNER: Computer SetupfTesting WRITTEN BY: Dave Nelson
DEPT. APPROVAL: d . QA APPROVAL:
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the configuring and testing Iomega drives for the Expert and
DEXA imaging systems. UNCONTROLLED DOCUMENT
Before Using
APPLICA TION
This procedure applies to any employee involved in the final system setup or testing.
Electrical Production personnel and Quality Personnel will setup, inspect, and record
results of the final system check of LUNAR devices. The Quality Assurance Manager
will review all documents and tag systems as "Accepted" for release, if appropriate.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Production Manager is responsible for ensuring all Iomega drives are setup per this
procedure.
PROCEDURES
1. Setup Iomega Zip Drive
A. Load IQ software onto the PC to create AUTOEXEC.BAT and

CONFIG.SYS.
B. Unpack the Zip drive. Connect its cable to the parallel (printer) port. If
setting up with a printer, connect the printer to the Zip drive. Connect the
zip drive to its transformer and plug it in. Insert the supplied Zip Tools
disk into the drive.
C. Boot the computer to MS-DOS. Insert the supplied DOSlWindows setup

diskette. Follow the Iomega instructions supplied with the drive to load for
DOS. An AUTOEXEC.IOM and CONFIG.IOM will be created. Add the
lines from AUTOEXEC.IOM to the top of AUTOEXEC.BAT. Add the lines
from CONFIG.IOM to the bottom of both the [dos] and [dpx] sections in
CONFIG.SYS. Add nothing to the [common] section of CONFIG.SYS.

Controlled Document
LUNAR®DOCUMENT 10: LUPC0001 REV: 0 DATE: 417197 co: 4081
D. Reboot the computer to MS..DOS. The Zip drive should now be
recognized as drive 0:. Reboot again and enter Windows95. Follow the
. supplied Iomega instructions for loading software in Windows95. Again,
the Zip drive should be drive 0: (the CD-ROM should be drive E:).
E. Because LUNAR uses both DOS and Windows95, some cautions must be
used when starting either operating system.
I. For example, if Windows95 is started from the DOS prompt by

typing WIN [enter], the Zip drive DOS drivers will still be loaded.
Instead of drive 0: being the Zip in Windows95, it will now be drive
F:! And drive 0: will exist also as a generic 100MB floppy drive!
This is just an artifact of the DOS drivers being present when
Windows95 is started. If the system is restarted and Windows95 is
selected from the LUNAR menu at startup, then only the Zip drive
will appear as drive 0:.
II. The other scenario is exiting Windows95 to DOS. In this case, the
Zip drive will still be present as drive 0:, but the CD-ROM will not
be present. This is not critical as we do not require the CD-ROM in
DOS at all, but this too can be avoided by rebooting (or restarting)
the computer and choosing MS-DOS from the LUNAR menu.
III. Applications should train all users to reboot or restart the system to
change from DOS to Windows95, or vice-versa.
2. Setup Iomega Jaz Drive
A. First, obtain a Jaz Jet PCI SCSI card. Change the jumper from the MAC
to the PC position. PCI cards go into the smaller white adapter slots in
newer computers.
B. Upgrades for older PC's will use an ISA Jaz Jet card instead of aPC1
card. This should be specified on the Sales Order. The installation is the
same except the card is inserted into the first available ISA slot. The ISA
slots are usually black in color and are longer than the PCI slots. The Jaz
Jet ISA card is set to IRQ 11 by default, and so no changes need to be
made to its switch settings.
C. Setup the Acer or Dell computer first WITHOUT the Jaz Jet card installed.
Complete the onscreen setup of Windows 95 as is necessary.
D. Load IQ software. Reboot the computer to a DOS prompt. Power down,

and insert the Jaz Jet card. Power up and boot up to a DOS prompt.

Controlled Document
wNAR~ DOCUMENT 10: LUPC0001 DATE: 417197 co: 4081
E. Insert the supplied Windows/DOS Jaz Jet PCllnstall diskette, and type
A:INSTALL [enter]. Follow the instructions for an Express Setup. ' A
C:\IOMEGA directory will be created. At the end of the setup an
AUTOEXEC.IOM and a CONFIG.IOM file will be created with lines that
need to be added to AUTOEXEC.BAT and CONFIG.SYS. Those files
should be modified to look as below:
I. AUTOEXEC.BAT
PATH =C: \; C:\WI N DOWS; C:\WI N DOWS\COM MAN D; C: \LUNAR
@rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West Beltline Hwy, Madison, WI 53713.
(608) 274-2663
@rem File: autoexec.bat DOS version: 7.0
for Dell: c:\windows\command\mscdex.exe Id:mscd001

for Acer: c:\windows\command\mscdex.exe Id:CDIDE01
@SET SCSI_DRIVER=C:\IOMEGA
@SET SCSI_UTILlTY=C:\IOMEGA
@echo off
break off
prompt $p$g
goto %config%)
:dpx
:dos
Ih C:\windows\smartdrv 512
call C:\LUNAR\setdpx
for Dell: !h C:\mouse\mouse.exe 10
for Acer: Ih C:\dosdrvrs/mouse .exe
Ih C:\windows\command\doskey
if %config%==dos goto end
C:
cd \LUNAR
call dpx
goto end
:win
cal! C:\LUNAR\setdpx
win
:end
echo.
C:
cd \

Controlled Document
DOCUMENT 10: LUPC0001 REV: D DATE: 4/7/97 CO: 4081
II. CONFIG .SYS

rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West 8eltline Hwy, Madison, WI 53713.
-
(608) 274-2663
rem File: config .sys DOS version : 7.0
switches = If
[menu]
menuitem=dos,Start MS-DOS
menuitem=win,Start Windows 195
menuitem=dpx,Start Lunar DPX
menudefault=dpx,8
[common]
files = 50
buffers = 45
device=C:\windows\himem.sys Itestmem:off
device=C:\windows\emm386.exe noems
dos=high,umb
shell=C:\windows\command.com Ip
DEVICE=C:\IOMEGA\ADVASPI.SYS
DEVICE=C:\IOMEGA\SCSICFG.EXE N
DEVICE=C:\IOMEGA\SCSIDRVR.SYS
for Acer: device=c:\dosdrvrs\d91 Ov31 O.sys Id:CDIDE01
for Dell: device=C :\cdrom\nec_ide.sys Id:mscd001
[dos]
[dpx]
[win]
F. Reboot the system and return to the DOS prompt. Check that the Jaz
drive is drive D: in DOS and the CD-ROM is drive E: .
NOTE: CD-ROM drives are assigned names. In the examples above
the Dell CD-ROM is labeled MSCD001; in the Acer example it is called
CDIDE01. You may find other names for the CD-ROM on other computers.
This should not be a problem. The name stated in CONFIG.SYS must
match the name in AUTOEXEC.BAT (at the end of the MSCDEX.EXE line).
G. Reboot the system and select LUNAR DPX-IQ. Verify the Jaz drive and
CD-ROM drivers load successfully.
H. Reboot once again and start Windows 95. With the card installed and the
drive connected, Windows 95 will automatically detect the Jaz system.
You will have to insert the supplied Windows/DOS Jaz Jet PCllnstall
diskette when prompted.

Controlled Document
WNAR®DOCUMENT 10: LUPC0001 REV: 0 DATE: 4/7/97 CO: 4081
I. Next, use the supplied Installation Guide for IBM-Compatible PC's that
comes with the Jaz drive for setup instructions. You will need the
supplied Windows/DOS Jaz Install diskette, and the supplied 1.0GB Jaz
Tools disk. Follow the enclosed instructions at step 12.
The Jaz drive should be seen by Windows 95 as the 0: drive (the CO-
ROM drive will be moved to E:).
3. Expert I DOS-Windows 3.11 Computers
A. Use the supplied Installation Guide for IBM-Compatible PC's that

comes with the Jaz Jet SCSI card. You will need the supplied
Windows/DOS Jaz Jet PCllnstall diskette. Follow the DOS and
Windows 3.11 instructions.
B. Use the supplied Installation Guide for IBM-Compatible PC's that

comes with the Jaz drive for setup instructions. You will need the
supplied Windows/DOS Jaz Install diskette, and the supplied 1.0GB Jaz
Tools disk. Follow the DOS and Windows 3.11 instructions.
C. If computers are offered with CD-ROM drives, as with IQ computers,

make sure the Jaz drivers are in CONFIG.SYS BEFORE the CD-ROM
drivers so the Jaz drive is assigned letter 0:.
4. General Note
A. The Jaz Tools disk comes with the drive and IS NOT just a blank disk! It
contains useful programs for running the Jaz drive. That is why the Jaz
Drive Assy includes an extra disk for the customer to use for their data
while the Tools disk is set aside as the Jaz-software backup.
5. · Testing The Jaz Drive
A. Insert a scratch disk into the drive and copy files from the Iomega drive ·
(test file subdirectory) to the hard disk (use the C:\SCRATCH directory).
Verify the files have all copied and that the files s'izes are the same. Then
copy from C:\SCRATCH to the root directory of the Iomega drive (0:\).
Again, verify the files have all copied and that the files sizes are the same.
NOTE: The Tools disk comes with the drive and IS NOT just a blank disk! It
contains useful programs for running the Iomega drive. That is why the Drive
Assy includes an extra disk for the customer to use for their data while the Tools
disk is set aside as the Iomega-software backup.

Controlled Document
. ....--....
Appendix 6.W Limit Switch Adjustment

Appendix 6.W
Limit Switch Adjustment
[LUMA0004]
,~,
This appendix contains instructions for adjusting the collimator limit switc~h~: ~~~~~t~
~~ ~~.qg.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the time~ se
. .. ~~- " of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. H~O eo;~/~ is an 'uncontrolled' .
copy and is subject to change at any time wJt ''''f _ ,Y:ilJHce. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distrib~~< · ~ - y changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manu~l~fes.
The distributor/s responsiblfJiJ¥ &In;-

are updated with the curren!g!p.ments.
that all copies of the Service Manual
Limit Switch Adjustment Appendix 6.W

r.L~UN-~.-R=::1~qprD-O-C-U-M-EN-T-.-ID-:-L-U-M-A-0-O-04----r=-R-=E=-=V-:A~r-:'D::-A":""'::T~E~:--:-9/-1-2/-9-7---',r-"C-O-:-4-4-2-6 ~-.
r.T~I~T~L~E~:7L7im~it~S~w~it~c7h~A~d~ju-s~t-m-e-n~t--------~~----~------------~------------
rD=-=O-::C:-:-U-::M:-=E=N:-:=T-=TY~P=-=E=-:~W-:-:-o-:-rk-:'-n-:st~ru-c-:-:ti:-o-n- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -.".-
DOCUMENT OWNER: Production WRITTEN BY: Bob Schulz

f\ t\
DEPT. APPROVAL: i/ JfA". .. " QAAPPROVAL: »~
/f. (I ~rvv
v
fJ
PURPOSE
This procedure describes the process for adjusting limit switches which do not have some
external means of position adjustment.
APPLICATION
This work instruction applies to the adjustment of any limit switch which does not have some
external means of position adjustment.
RESPONSIBILITY
The Production Manager is responsible for ensuring that personnel adjust limit switches
according to these work instructions.
Verify latest Revision
Before Using

TN. docum.nt contaln. confidential or propriet&ty Information of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor thelnfocmatlon there(n ls to be reproduced., distributed, uaed or
chclOHd, eith« In whole or In part. except .. spedflcally euthorlzed by Lunar Corp.
LUNAR DOCUMENTID: LUMA0004 REV: A DATE: 9/12/97 co: 4426
PROCEDURES
Ideal Adjustment Positions
Start by finding the following angles:

1) touch angle
2) switch angle
These angles are the angle from center of actuator
wheel to the point on the wheel where the object
touches.
The Collimator or
Collimator or shutter
shutter slide slide ~
should strike the If 0 degrees .,
actuator at 0 '-----~\~·U V
degrees. This is
the touch angle.
Lin,it switch clicks and Collimator or shutter

switch changes state slide
at 45 degrees. This is
the switch angle.
Slide can move past limit switch

if necessary without causing Collimator or shutter slide
damage to the switch or
additional resistance to the
Collimator or shutter slide.

This document contain. conftdentfaJ or proprktary Informatjon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the lnfonnaUon theretn I. to be reprodu~ distributed, uHd or
dlac:lOHd, etthef' In whole or In p&rt. exc.pt . . apectfle&lly authorized by Lunar Coc'p.
LUNAR DOCUMENT 10: LUMA0004 REV: A DATE: 9/12/97 CO: 4426
"--' Bend .the actuator adjustment on the limit switch as noted in these diagrams:
To adjust the actuator, apply force in

two places to bend the lever.
One method is to use a needle nose

pliers.
Put one tip on top of the lever and one

tip below the lever. Carefully twist the
pliers.
Plier Tips
Page 3 of 3
Thtl document contains confldential or proprietary Infonnation of wnw Corp. ~ther the document nor the information thefwin II to be reproduced. distributed, used or
dlae$oaed, eHher in whote or In part. except .. apecH\cally authOfUed by Lunar Corp.
Appendix 6.X DPX Series Scanner Transit Tear Down Procedure

Appe dix 6.X

DPX Series .S canner Transit Tear Down
Procedure
[DXSE0027] i'~;:ic'
This appendix contains instructions for preparing a DPX series systen~s'ystem move .
.4\ > )~'t\ ~7'
DPX Series Scanner Transit Tear Down Procedure Appendix 6.X

REV: A DATE: 12/9/97 co: 4580
TITLE: DPX Series Scanner Transit Tear Down Procedure
DOCUMENT OWNER: Service WRITTEN BY: Jeff Franz
PURPOSE
This procedure covers the field tear down procedures for all DPX-Series. Teardown is the
disassembly of the scanner, to prepare the scanner for transit to another site.
APPLICATION
These procedures apply to the teardown of all DPX systems listed above. All personnel
moving any DPX system shall be trained on this procedure.
RESPONSIBILITY
Personnel who tear down DPX systems for system moves are responsible for following this
procedure.
DXAP0010 DPX-IQ Arm Slot Cover Installation
DXAP0003 DEXA Installation Work Instructions UNCONTROLLED OOCUMENT
DXAP0011 DPX-IQ Arm Grounding Brush Installation Verify Latest Revision
DXAP0001 DPX Arm Grounding Brush Installation Before Using
DXAP0002 DEXA External Options Installation
DXAP0012 DPX Arm Slot Cover Installation
DXAP0008 DEXA Installation Test Procedures
DXQC0022 Aluminum Spine Phantom Scan Procedure
DXAP0004 DEXA Installation Report
DXAP0005 DEXA Split Frame Installation Procedure
DXAP0009 Source Detector Alignment Procedure

this document contaJns confidential Of' proprietIrY Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Neither the document nor the lnfonnatIon therein Is to ~ r.produc:ed, distributed. UMd or
dl~ elttter In whofe Of' In part. except .. apedftcalty authorized by Lunar Corp.
WNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0027 REV: A DATE: 1219/97 CO: 4580
PROCEDURE
1. PANEL I PMT REMOVAL
A. Power down the scanner
B. Remove side doors from scanner. Pull scanner out from wall if possible, be
careful not to damage customers floor. Placing pieces of cardboard under the
glides will allow you to slide the scanner on almost any surface. Remove table
top, Rear panel (if possible) and drop front access door. If the scanner is
equipped with an Ann slot Cover remove it as well (see procedure DXAP0010).
C. For 10 systems remove the upper front panel rail (3 Phillips head screws) and
then the front panel (two bolts through frame).
For non-I a systems remove the front panel (two bolts through frame)
D. For 10 systems remove the lower arm shroud (8 bolts) be careful not to
puncture the plastic film in the window of the shroud and be careful for the
panel ground in the back of the shroud.
For non-IO systems remove the three bolts that hold the bJack upper ann
access door closed and open the hatch.
E. Remove the PMT from arm, and wrap PMT in foam, place in phantom tub.
F. Stuff a small roll of foam in place of PMT so that the lead ring does not come
out or remove lead ring and place in phantom tub.
G. For 10 units replace the lower ann shroud.
For Non-IO units lower the black top back down into position between both
hoods. Use three bolts to screw black top back in place.
NOTE: Leave out fourth bolt on backside of hood, which would be on the inside
of the arm column. All steps are the same on the DPX-a.
2. REMOVAL OF LOWER ARM PARTS
A. Slide arm all the way to the foot end of the scanner.
B. Disconnect cable clamps located on either carriage using 5/32" Allen wrench.
There is a small hole on the front side of the scanner frame where the Allen
wrench must be inserted to loosen the front carriage plate from the cables.
C. Remove optical interrupt bracket from the underside of front carriage using a
1/8-inch Allen wrench. Place bracket in 5 x 5 cleaJ plastic zip lock bag with
scan ner keys and place in phantom tub.
D. Clip wire ties holding the tube head harness and optical interrupt wire lead to
the H.V. cable trough.

TIn document contaIn. c:onftdentJal « propNtary information of Lunar Corp. Netther the document nor the Infonnation ~ Is to be ~ distributed, UMd or
dlsdoMd, either tn wtlofe or In part, except as ~/y ~ by Lunar Corp.
REV: A DATE: 12/9/97 co: 4580
E. Disconnect the 11 wires going to the centent located on H.V. cable trough
using a small straight blade screwdriver.
F. Unplug the three connectors and unscrew ground wire (replace screw) located
on the rear longitude carriage bracket. Wire tie a bag around these.
G. For DPX-IQ, DPX-Alpha, and DPX-SF, the cable track is attached to the rear
longitudinal carriage bracket with (2) 10-32 x 3/8 SHeS in the bottom of the
track remove these and replace screws into longitudinal carriage.
For non IQ systems: Remove the 5/16 x 3-1/2-inch bolt locknut holding the
cable track to rear longitudinal carriage using a 1/2 inch socket. Wrth the cable
track disconnected from the carriage, replace the 3-112 inch bolt and locknut on
the carriage.
H. Remove the longitudinal belt from the timing pulley and fold five times, then
wire tie. Place one loop over transverse cable pulley.
I. Remove four bolts holding H.V. cable trough in place using 5/32" Allen wrench.
There are two on the small carriage in front and two on the rear longitudinal
carriage. While in the front of the machine, loosen the three bolts that are
holding the lower extrusion to front carriage and remove the transverse bett
from the pulleys. Fold transverse bett and wire tie to the bottom of the tube
head carriage.
J. Slide arm to the head end of scanner so tube head can be removed.
r
Rear
Electronics Mounting Panel
DPX
la/
CJ ~PX_ r;t
AC
Entrance
tI pexmex-I ~
SBe !
Front
Figure 1
K. Unmount the Tube Head Mounting bracket from the storage position. Place a
piece of foam (1/2 x 2 x 5) in slot under tube head mounting bracket.
L. To mount the tube head bracket, use four 114 x 28 x 1/2 inch sockethead botts,
four 1/4" flat washers, and four 1/4 x 28 inch kep nuts. Mount in place as
shown in Figure 1.

This doc:ument coot.ina confidential or Pf'OPC'1etAry Infonnatlon of LuMr Corp. Neither the document not" the Information tMreln Is to be ~ distributed, UMd 0(
dlscloHd. efther In whole 0( In part. except .. specifically authorized by Lunar Corp.
WNAR DOCUMENT 10: DXSE0027 REV: A DATE: 12/9/97 CO: 4580
3. TUBE HEAD DISMOUNTING
A. Disconnect the collimator Molex connector. Remove the collimator and pack it
in foam and place in phantom tub. Replace the lead shield and collimator
mounting hardware onto the tube head.
B. Use a 7/16-inch socket with a 6-inch extension. Remove lower two tube head
mounting nuts. While holding tube head with left hand, remove the third nut
from topside of tube head. Using both hands, flip the tube head 112 a turn
straight back, then 1/4 tum so the bolts are aligned with bracket. DO NOT lose
Bellville Washers on upper mounting stud. Place foam under the tube head
being careful of all wires. Be careful not to damage the tube head stud and
collimator mounting clasps when mounting the tube head onto the shipping
bracket. Slide tube head into the bracket. Replace all three nuts. Tighten top
two nuts until snug, and then an additional 112 tum. DO NOT over tighten the
nuts or the tube head bolts could break. Tighten bottom nut so the washers on
the backside just come together. DO NOT compress washers. (See figure 2.)
TUBE HEAD
washers (5)..- .. Washers

Not compressed
Loctdng ~nling Bracket
" Upper Mounting Bolt

(bottom of bracket)
High Voltage Cable

Harness
Figure 2
4. CABLES
A. Connect the end of the cable track to the 26-volt power supply using a wire tie.
Push the Lema plugs from the plastic bag between the 26-volt power supply
and the frame. Separate wires on the transverse motor control cable to avoid
electrical damage during installation.
This document contains con1IdentJa/ or proprletaty Infonnatlon of Lunar Corp. Netther the document nor the Information therefn Is to be reproduced. distributed, used or
dlsclond. either In whole or In part, except .. specffic&l1y authoriz1td by Lunar Corp.
REV: A DATE: 12/9/97 co: 4580
B. Disconnect I/O cable from controller. Retrieve the end of the I/O cable through
the exit hole in the scanner. Coil the remainder of the cable and wire tie to the
top of the HVPS.
C. Retrieve power cable and either remove from systems where it attaches at
bottom, or pull cable inside of scanner, coil neatly, wire tie and place in front
access door. ~
5. REMOVAL OF ARM
A. ~ Wire tie the transverse belt to the tube head carriage. Wire tie the optical
interrupt wire and remaining centent cable to the longitudinal carriage.
B. Move scanner arm to head end of table.
C. Remove the bottom two wheels (eccentric V-wheels) on rear carriage, using
7/16" socket. Be sure to remove the washers with the wheels on the back side
of the carriage as well, they have a tendency to stick in place, but will fall off if
they are not removed.
D. Remove the arm grounding brush mounted on the arm as shown in DXAP0011
for 10 systems or DXAP0001 for non 10 systems. Place grounding brush in
plastic bag with other parts. The brush does not have to be disassembled. A
Chapman set works well for removing the two Phillips head screws.
E. Tape Longitudinal drive cables to frame neat the cut out at the head end of the
scanner so that they are out of the way for arm removal.
F. Remove the three bolts from lower extrusion that were loosened in step 2. I.
Holding the arm horizontally, move to the rear side of ann and support it from
there. Hold right arm under the two hoods and place left hand in the arm
column with a good grip.
E. Let the front of the arm tilt forward about 3 inches and then lift straight up and
out and down to cJear the back rail. After clear of the back rail and the scanner,
place the arm on its back on the floor, the extrusion should be pointing up. Use
a wood support for the column base on the DPX-A's. Be careful, as the tube
head carriage will move about freely on the arm. If it is not pushed to the back
of the arm it will free fall down the extrusion. Wire tie the tube head carriage to
the rear longitudinal carriage.
F. Re-assemble arm.
I. Rerrlove the carriage from front rail by pulling the carriage towaJd the
front of the scanner and the bottom inward.

Thb document contains c:onftdentlal Of proprietaty Infonnation of Lunar Ccxp. ~ the document nor the Infonnation tMreIn .. to be ~ dstrtbuted. used Of'
dlsdoMd, either In whoM Of In part. exupt .. IpKfftc.lty authoriDd by Lunar Ccxp.
DOCUMENT iD: DXSE0027 REV: A DATE: 12/9/97 CO: 4580
II. Put the front carriage onto the lower arm extrusion using the three
bolts, do not over tighten. If too tight, they will lock into the
aluminum rail. If any shims (if present) come free from the extrusion,
replace between extrusion and the carriage.
III. Replace the H.V. trough the same way as it was removed.
IV. Replace the two wheels and washers that were removed earlier.
6. REPLACE CASTERS
A. Jack up or lift and support the scanner by the frame and remove glides.
Replace glides with casters. Place glides in plastic bag with other parts.
B. If the scanner frame needs to be split, do it now according to procedure

DXAP0005.
7. REPLACE PANELS
A. Make sure the lip on back panel is outward and replace back panel.
B. Replace upper front panel and upper rail for IQ systems.
C. Replace Table top and bott down.
D. Replace side doors.
8. PACK CONTROLLER
A. Pack up all controller components in original packaging if available.
B. Anthro cart does not need to be disassembled.
System is ready to be shipped or moved.
If the scanner is to be re-installed in another location refer to procedure DXAP0003 DEXA

Installation work instructions. All moves are to be treated as a new installation.

Th!. document contain. conftdent1&l or proprietary Information of Lunar Corp. Ne«her tho document nor the Infonnation therein I. to be rwproduced, dlatrlbutod, uaed or
d1adoMd, eHher In whole or In part. except .. apec:fflc::ally authorized by Lunar Corp.
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
Chapter 7 Maintenance
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter contains brief discussions of the Preventative Maintenance procedure and Check
Sheet as well as a discussion on unusual sounds and the wire list and a listing of change orders
associated with the DPX-IQ scanner.
7.1 Preventative Maintenance ................................................ ~ ......................................7.-;1

7.2 Unusual Sounds .......................................................................................................7::.3
7.3 Change Orders (CO's) .............................................................................................7.-:5
Maintenance Chapter 7
-- 7.1 Preventative Maintenance
There are a number of items to be checked, cleaned and tested during a PM visit to a site. See
the DPX-IQ PM / Service Call Checklist in Appendix A.
QA History
An important aspect of the PM is checking the QA History (see section 8.14). This is important
because when a QA is run during the PM, it should be consistent with the past QA's. Copy the
DPXS.DBF file to a diskette and send to the LUNAR Customer Service Department.
Repacking the High Voltage Cable Connectors

The major work of a PM is the repacking of the High Voltage Cable connectors. See procedure
DXSEOOOO in chapter 6. It is VERY IMPORTANT that this procedure be understood completely
before performing it!
Wear
The scanner should also be checked for signs of wear. The Shutter/ Collimator Assembly
especially should be inspected. Wear on these parts can cause lead shavings to fall on the filter
in the x-ray beam. This can cause a drastic decline in Air Counts (see section 8.5), causing
QA's to fail.
Also check all the scanner's moving parts for signs of wear. This would include wheels, pulleys,
gears, bearings, belts, cables and,rnptor assemblies. INSPECT CAREFULLY cables that enter
the plastic cable track. These cable~ <are subjected to a good deal of motion and thus have the
potential for breakage! Also,' when performing the various tests listed below, listen for any
unusual noises that could be indications of wear (see section 7.2).
Cleaning
Cleaning thescanne(is important. Remove dust and any debris from the electronics mounting
chassis. Clean the transverse and longitudinal extrusions. Small bits of debris from the wheels
may accumulate and impede motion. Clean the Shutter/Collimator Assembly and the filter, if
necessary.
Inspection
Inspect the scanner internally and externally for obvious damage and loose connections. Check
all PCB's for tight mounting screws.
Tests
Run all other tests according to the DPX Series PM check sheet.
Preventative Maintenance 7-1

7-2 Preventative Maintenance

- - - - - - --- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - -
7.2 Unusual Sounds

A high pitched sound is normally heard when the scanner is in motion. This is caused by the
high frequency motor pulses being sent from the Centent Motor Controller to the Transverse
and Long.tudinal Motors.
If the high pitched sound only occurs during motor operation, check the optical interrupt disks
and verify that they are not rubbing against the black plastic transducer of the OMI board. The
disk should turn in the middle of the transducer's slot.
For other sounds of an apparent mechanical nature, check all appropriate gears and pulleys.
Verify that the set screws are tightened and that the gears and pulleys are not out of position.
With the scanner turned off, move the affected parts by hand to determine the exact source of
the sound. Also look for rusted or worn bearings and examine the V-wheels forwear. With age,
the longitudinal and transverse drive belts will dry out and start to cause noises. Treating these
belts with belt dressing is a short term solution until they can be replaced.
Clicking or clunking sounds made during motor operation can be caused by belts that are riding
up on their pulleys, or by a too tight bearing support. The bearing support is held to the carriage
by a set screw from the rear. If this set screw is so tight that the bearing and support have no
play (i.e. can be rocked 1-2 mm), it can cause a clunking sound during transverse motion. If this
screw is loosened, it should be secured with Lock·:Tite so it cannot work its way loose.
Pulleys that have become defective can also cause clicking and squeaking/squealing sounds.
Try to isolate the movement of individual pulleys to locate the defective part.
Scraping sounds can be caused by any of the moving carriages, cables or cable track rubbing
against an adjacent -panek ·Localize the sound and investigate the appropriate areas .
. . ..> . •
Unusual Sounds 7-3

7-4 Unusual Sounds

7.3 Change Orders {CO's}
CO 3536
Serial Number(s) DPXIQ240 (White) 1052+

DPXIQ240 (Black) 4046+
DPXIQ180 (White) 20032+
Implemented August 15, 1996
Field Modification NO
This CO changes the length of the return flange on the back of the column and decreases the
width of the column cover plate to match it.
CO 3557

DP)(IQ240 (Black) 4042+
DPXIQ180:(White) 20024+
'DPXIQ180 (Black) 30024+
,:',:,
Implemented '
,August 15,1996
Field Modification ' NO
This ECO changes the revision of Spellman high voltage power supplies from N to N 1. This
change will increase the life of the power supplies.
CO 3671

Implemented 2/17/97
Change Orders 7-5

This CO changes the length of the leg posts on the scanner and the routing of the power cable.
This will lower the scanner table height at installation.
CO 3690
Serial Number(s) DPXIQ240 (White)

DPXIQ240 (Black)
DPXIQ180 (White)
DPXI Q 180 (Black)
Implemented 1/15/97
This CO revises Spellman power supplies from revision J3 to J4 to prevent discrepancies .

between the voltage monitor and the output.
CO 3805

DPXIQ180(Black) 30112+
. ..
Implemented .. .' . 1212/96
. This CO adds two bolts to the corner of the tube head cover to add strength.
CO 3937

DPXIQ240 (Black)
DPXIQ180 (White)
DPXIQ180 (Black)
Implemented
This CO changes the mounting hardware for the front transverse limit switch to allow a greater
range of movement.
7-6 Change Orders

CO 3978

DPXIQ240 (Black)
DPXIQ180 (Black)
Implemented 2/14/97
This CO changes the tissue equivalent material from Delrin to Acetron to improve durability.
CO 4005

DPXIQ180 (White)
DPXIQ180 (Black)
Implemented 3/11/97
This CO adds an 10megaZip drive to all IQ systems.
CO 4054

DPXIQ240 (Black)
. DPXIQ180 (White)
DPXIQ 180 (Black)
Implemented 5/21/97
This CO creates IQ NET product as an additional purchase option.
CO 4111
Change Orders 7-7

Implemented 5/19/97
This CO adds new Dell P166 computers to be standard controllers for white IQ systems.
CO 4097
DPXIQ180 (White)
Implemented 5/6/97
This CO adds new Dell P133 GSM computers to replace Dell P133 GM computers.
CO 4171 ....
Serial Number(s)
Implemented 8/14/97
This CO creates part kit for field replacement of the transverse shaft. Simplify field replacement
of transverse shaft and associated parts.
CO 4232
Serial t':Jumber(s)
,.
DPXIQ180 (Black)
Implemented 6/20/97
7-8 Change Orders

I Field Modification I NO
This CO changes the standard controller for black systems from Acer to Citus with internal
Iomega Zip drives.
Change Orders 7-9

. ...-.....
/ . ...--...,
7-10 Change Orders

DPX-IQ Service Manual I~ev. E (3/98)
Appendix 7.A
DPX Series Preventative Maintenance
Quality Record [DXSE0012]
This appendix contains the DPX-IQ Preventative Maintenance Check Sheet.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the time of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. However, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time without notice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distributors of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manual Updates.
The distributor is responsiblefor ensuring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the current documents.
DPX Series Preventative Maintenance Appendix 7.A

W NAR®DOCUMENT 10: DXSEOO12 REV: B I DATE: 5/14/97 I CO: 4147
TITLE: DEXA PM Checklist
DOCUMENT TYPE: Quality Record
DOCUMENT OWNER: Service WRITTEN BY: Scott Shropshire

DEPT. APPROVAL:David ~chlack QA APPROVAL:J. Ra!:kob
. UNCONT~OLLED ~DOCUME~T
, Veri~lat?si: ~~vislon ...
.',.' ·., c~h:~;~~2I~::Y~!~~ ::_~:;~.~·_: ::
CHECKLIST , .
VISIT ·T OSYSTEM #: DATE:
BY: LOCATION:
THINGS TO DO:
o Review the QA history. Verify that the Detector has not lost significant resolution
by checking that the high and low energy air counts have not decreased by more
than 10 % • Verify that the air ratio has not changed by more than .02. Copy the
QA database file (C:\LUNAR\ANC\DPXS.DBF) to disk and send it to Lunar.
y
0 Review the error log. Contact Lunar Service Department if any hardware errors
are discovered.
0 Delete contents of C:\SCRATCH and C:\PRNTMNGR directories. Delete *.CHK
files in C:\ directory.
0 Run SCANDISK and DEFRAG.
0 Run CHKDSK and verify the "total bytes memory" = 655,360.
0 Scan the hard drive for viruses.
0 Verify operation of the computer, keyboard, monitor, and printer (and any
optional peripherals).
0 Clean scanner interior, inspect mechanical parts and cables for WHar and
breakage, and verify all electrical connections.
0 Repack High Voltage Connections.
0 Peak Detector; Adjust if necessary to 500 units ±25.
PMT High Voltage @ SBC TP18=_ _ __
0 Run the AGS wedge test and verify that it passes.
0 Verify Limit Switches; Be certain Home Position is consistent with the tabletop
silk-screen.
0 Run a Daily QA and verify that it passes. Make sure the four indicator lamps all
are functioning.
DXSE0012 DATE: 2/18/97 CO: 3972
o Perform an AP Spine scan of the aluminum phantom.

The L2-L4 result should be within 2%
of the expected value for the individual phantom.
0/0 Fat result in water should be within 4 to 5%
o Verify that the Patient Positioning Switches and the Patient Locator Laser are
functioning.
o Verify Shutter / Collimator Operation. Exercise each device 100 times. Inspect
the error log and verify that it is free of shutter and collimation errors.
o Run Air Matrix and verify that it passes.
o Verify 76 kV @ 750 J.1A and 4750 IJA
Test Point kV rnA Limits Actual

1 76 750 0.74 - 0.76
5
1 3000 2.97 - 3.03
5
1 4750 4.70 - 4.80
5
2 3.76 - 3.84
6
Comments on any problems, adjustments made, parts replaced, etc.:
"" .

THIS PAGE ,LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
\ '
Appendix 7.A DPX Sedes Preventative Maintenance

Appendix 7.B
DPX-IQ Wire List
This appendix contains the wires of a DPX-IQ system.
NOTE: The revision of this document is current as of the time of release of the last
Service Manual or Service Manual Update. However, this is an 'uncontrolled'
copy and is subject to change at any time without notice. The LUNAR Service
Department will periodically notify distributors of any changes and provide copies
of the latest revisions in future Manual Updates.
The distributor is responsible for ensuring that all copies of the Service Manual
are updated with the current documents.
DPX-IQ Wire List Appendix 7.B

7.8 Wire List
Board and Pin # Color Goes To Part #

Connector
AGS J2 1 Yellow Terminals 15-19 of Terminal Block 2416
3 Green Terminals 1-7 of Terminal Block
5 Red Terminals 10-14 of Terminal Block
AGS J3 1 White AGS DCA J2 Pin 1 2423
2 Black AGS DCA J2 Pin 2
AGSJ4 1 Red DPX DCA J1 Pin 5 2398
3 Green DPX DCA J1 Pin 3
4 Orange DPX DCA J 1 Pin 2·
5 Yellow DPX DCA J1 Pin 1
AGS J7 1 Red AGS DCA J1 Pin 5 2602
3 Green AGS DCA J1 Pin 3
4 .Orange AGS DCA J1 Pin 2
5 Yellow AGS DCA J1 Pin 1
AGS J8 1 Black AGS DCA J3 Pin 4 2406
2 Red AGS DCA J3 Pin 3
3 Black AGS DCA J3 Pin 2
4 White AGS DCA J3 Pin 1

,
A~SJ9 1 Red OINK J3 Pin 1 2417
2 Black OINK J3 Pin 2
AGS J10 1 White Terminals 20-23 of Terminal Block 2421
2 Black Terminals 24-27 of Terminal Block
AGS J11 Yellow LEMO Bulk Head Yellow LEMO 2499
AGS DCA J1 1 Yellow AGS J4 Pin 5 2398
Wire List 78-1

'Board and Pin # Color Goes To Part #

Connector
2 Orange AGS J4 Pin 4
3 Green AGS J4 Pin 3
5 Red AGS J4 Pin 1
AGS DCA J2 1 White AGS J3 Pin 1 2423
2 Black AGS J3 Pin 2
AGS DCAJ3 1 White AGS J8 Pin 4 2406
3 Red AGS J8 Pin 2
AMP J1 1 Red PMTPower Supply P1 Pin 1 1994
2 Black PMT Power Supply P1 Pin 2
3 White PMT Power Supply P1 Pin 3
AMPJ3 YellowLEMO Yellow LEMO at the Bulk Head 6079
Bulk Head #1 1 White X-ray On Light Pin 1 1095
, II
\
,\( 1 White OINK J8 Pin 2 1094
""
,
';' " . "-
)( \\ _:;,' ';" 3 Brown Power On Light Pin 2 1095
-' \''\~ 3 Brown OlNKJ5 Pin 2 1094
5 Black Shutter Open Light Pin 1 1095
" ,
5 Black OINK J8 Pin 4 1094
'"
7 Yellow Emergency Stop Button 1095
7 Yellow OINK J17 Pin 2 1094
8 Yellow Laser Board VI N Pin 1 1938

,
8 Purple OINK J8 Pin 6 1094
9 Orange X-ray On Light Pin 2 1095
78-2 Wire List


Connector
9 Orange OINK J8 Pin 1 1094
11 Green Power On Light Pin 1 1095

. J~--\ *~~
~~ .
11 Green OINK J5 Pin 1 1094
13 Red Shutter Open Light Pin 1 1095
13 Red OINK J8 Pin 3 1094
15 Blue Emergency Stop Button 1095
15 Grey OINK J17 Pin 1 1094
16 Brown Laser Board VI N Pin 2 1938
16 Blue OINK J8 Pin 5 1094
Bulk Head #2 2 Black limit-SWitch #3 2400
2 Black SBC J5 Pin 1 2697

.
3 Green Limit Switch #3 and #4 2400
, ',
. ~~D
rc:;J \ .''.
,\Y<> \. -('\~ . 3 Green SBC J5 Pin 3 2697
~rl
.~ " I
t'r\ 4 -Black OINK J12 Pin 6 1094

7Jf.>
A Black Head End Pin of Longitudinal Control 1095
5 Green OINK J12 Pin 1 1094
5 Green Middle Pins of the Position Controls 1095
6 White SBe J19 Pin 2 1927
6 White PMT PS P2 Pin5 1938
7 Blue Terminal 9 of the Terminal Block 1094
7 Black PMT PS PS Pin 2 1937
8 Brown SBe J19 Pin 1 1927
8 Green PMT PS P2 Pin4 1938
10 Red Limit Switch #4 2400
Wire List 78-3

Board and Pin# Color Goes To Part #

Connector
10 Red SBC J5 Pin 2 2697
~
~;~
12 Red OINK J12 Pin 4 1094
12 Red Bottom Pin of Transverse Control 1095

~~
13 White OINK J12 Pin 3 1094
13 White Top Pin of Transverse Control 1095
14 Brown OINK J12 Pin 5 1094
14 Yellow Foot End Pin of Longitudinal Control 1095
15 Yellow F8 of Terminal Block 1094
16 Orange F7 of Terminal Block 1094
DPX DCA J1 1 Yellow AGS J7 Pin 5 2602
2 Orange AGS J7 Pin 4

..... ,.
3 Green AGS J7 Pin 3
5 Red AGS J7 Pin 1
DPX DCAJ2 1 White Terminals 20-23 of Terminal Block 2422
2 Black Terminals 24-27 of Terminal Block
DPX DCAJ3 1 White SBC J2 Pin 1 6081
2 Black SBC J2 Pin 2
3 Red SSC J2 Pin 3
4 Black SBC J2 Pin 4
Laser Board 1 Yellow Bulk Head #1 Pin 8 .'

1938
Vin
2 Brown Bulk Head #1 Pin 16
Laser Board 1 Black Laser Indicator Light Pin 1 1498

Video Out
78-4 Wire List


Connector
2 Red Laser Indicator Light Pin 2
MAXJ1 1 Orange Terminal 30 of Terminal Block 2249
-2 Green Terminals 1-7 of Terminal Block
MAXJ2 White LEMO XORB J19 2493
MAXJ3 1 Red Terminals 11-13 of Terminal Block 0372
3 Yellow Terminals 16-18 of Terminal Block
MAXJ4 1 Blue XORB J8 Pin 1 2685
2 Red XORB J8 Pin2
3 Black XORBJ8Pin 3
4 Green XORB J8 Pin 4
5 Shield XORB J8 Pin 5
MAXJ5 BlueLEMO SBC J17 2492
MAXJ6 Green LEMO SBC J15 2495
MAXJ7 Yellow LEMO XORB J27 0314
·OINK J1 Ribbon Cable SBC J3 6077
OlNKJ2 Ribbon Cable SBCJ6 2696

..
Oink J3 1 Red AGS J9 Pin 1 2417
OlNKJ4 1 Violet Terminal 35 of Terminal Block 2202
OINK J5 1 Green Bulk Head #1 Pin 11 1094
OINK J6 1 Green Transverse Centent Terminal 1 2699
Wire List 78-5


Connector
2 Blue Transverse Centent Terminal 2
- ~~ 3 White Transverse Centent Terminal 9
~~~' ilY\ 4 Orange Transverse Centent Terminal 8 J); (l.ffr J O')~l

~ \)\ 5 Red Transverse Centent Terminal 11
,\0
~~
6 Black Transverse Centent Terminal 12
0:}
8 Red! Black Transverse Centent Terminal 10
OlNKJ7 ~. 1 Green Longitudinal Centent Terminal 1 ~fJ ~1()J /.iff' ~14700

l'/
qf-'S'f' 2 Blue Longitudinal Centent Terminal
I~~
""j 3 White Longitudinal Centent Terminal
\
4 Orange Longitudinal Centent Terminal
5 Red Longitudinal Centent Terminal
6 Black Longitudinal Centent Terminal

H
"
,
8 " RedlBlack Longitudinal Centent Terminal

" -
1'
OlNKJ8 ~ , Orange Bulk Head #1 Pin 9 1094
,"
'2 White Bulk Head #1 Pin 1
3 Red Bulk Head #1 Pin 13
4 Black Bulk Head #1 Pin 5
5 Blue Bulk Head #1 Pin 16
6 Purple Bulk Head #1 Pin 8
OINK J11 1 Orange XORB J2 Pin 1 2706
2 Black XORB J2 Pin 2
3 White'- XORB J2 Pin 3 .
4 Blue XORB J2 Pin 4
5 Green XORB J2 Pin 5

,:
t78-6 W re List

Connector
6 Red XORB J2 Pin 6
OINK J12 1 Green Bulk Head #2 Pin 5 1094
3 White Bulk Head #2 Pin 13
OINK J13 1 Red Longitudinal OMI Board Pin 1 2446
2 Black Longitudinal OMI Board Pin 2
3 Green Longitudinal OMI Board Pin 3
OINK J14 1 Red TransverseOMI Board Pin 1 2445
2 Black 'Transverse OMI Board Pin 2
3 Green Transverse OMI Board Pin 3
OlNKJ15 1 Black XORB J6 Pin 2 2707
2. Red XORB J6 Pin 1
OINK J16 '1 Red or Black Relay Terminal 4 0373
2 Black or Red Relay Terminal 3
OINK J17 1 Grey Bulk Head #1 Pin 15 1094
2 Yellow Bulk Head #1 Pin 7
OINK J18 Ribbon Cable SBC J18 2559
OINK J19 Red LEMO SBCJ7 2489
OINK J20 1 Blue Terminal 9 of Terminal Block 2201
2 Green Terminal 1-7 of Terminal Block

-
OINK J22 1 Red Bell 2788
2 Black Bell
Wire List 78-7


Connector
OINK J23 1 Yellow Tube Head Fan 2753
2 Violet Tube Head Fan
OINK J24 1 White Terminal 20-23 of Terminal Block 2570
2 Black Terminal 24-27 of Terminal Block
PMT PS P1 1 . Red AMP J1 Pin 1 1994
2 Black AMP J1 Pin 2
3 White AMP J1 Pin 3
PMT PS P2 1 Black Bulk Head #2 Pin 15 1937
2 Black Bulk Head#2Pin 7
4 Green Bulk Head #2 Pin 8 1938
..
5 White .. : Bulk Head #2 Pin 6
SBC J1 Unused
SBC J2 1 White DPX DCA J3 Pin 1 6081

0.· ..
2 Black DPX DCA J3 Pin 2
3 Red DPX DCA J3 Pin 3
4 Black DPX DCA J3 Pin 4
SBC J3 Ribbon Cable OINK J1 6077
SBCJ4 1 Black Limit Switch 2 6952
2 Red Limit Switch 1
3 Green Limit Switch 1 and 2

~
SBC J5 1 Black Bulk Head #2 Pin 2 2697
3 Green Bulk Head #2 Pin 10
78-8 Wire List

-
Connector
SBe J6 Ribbon Cable OlNKJ2 2696
" - , '"
sse J7 Red LEMO OINK J19 2489
sse J8 1 White Terminal 20-23 of Terminal Block 2322
2 Black Terminal 24-27 of Terminal Block
sse J9 1 Red Terminal 11-13 of Terminal Block 2348
2 Green Terminal 1-7 of Terminal Block
3 Yellow Terminal 16-18 of Terminal Block
sse J10 Unused
SBe J11 Unused
SBe J12 Unused
SBe J13 Unused

'-.--,
sse J14 Grey LEMO XORB J15 2490
SBe J15 Green LEMO MAXJ6 2495
SBe J16 .. .. Orange LEMO XORB J21 2491

. '
. .,
sse J17 Blue LEMO MAXJ5 2492
SBe J18 Ribbon Cable OlNKJ18 2559
sse J19 1 Brown Bulk Head #2 Pin 8 1927
2 White Bulk Head #2 Pin 6
4 Unused
5 Unused
6 Green Or White Shield
SBe J20 Orange LEMO XORB J13 2409
SBe J21 1 Yellow XORB J4 Pin 1 2705
2 Red XORB J4 Pin 2
3 Braid XORB J4 Pin 3
Wire List 78-9

DPX-IQ Service Manual f\ Rev. E (3/98)
,.", n
il} ~ v \ ~-*U
Board and
Connector
Pin # Color Goes To ,:>
\IL __-
t~r1
- .~ e~ ~
:j Part #
SiAl 1~~~ tflJ

IS>'
Cbl'11 V'''1
XORB J1 1 Orange Collimator Terminal 2 2753
5LtJ--- J.~-V
2 Black Collimator Terminal 1 w;fl}Ay(Jf
:iW ~- ,
";.W, Ti
U Ul
- ).I V
...,.. 3 White Collimator Terminal 3 J
"V SOi.(TjOI C!J-
..
4 Blue Collimator Terminal 4 51f(/lm l(Z,JL
SOtE})OI jJt: {)l>
5
,
Green Collimator Terminal 6 [f) /in')I(J) if) Lf2JV
I
CDrt]v/Y\ fi>leno Id·t,

~ 6 Red Collimator Terminal 5
XORB J2 1 Orange OINK J11 Pin 1 2706
3 White OINK J11 Pin 3
4 Blue OINK J11 Pin 4

I ,~
5 Green OINK J11 Pin 5

\,
6 Red OINK J11 Pin 6
XORB J3 1 Yellow Tube Head Control Cable Connector H 2494

.'
2 :.. Hed Tube Head Control Cable Connector G
3 Braid Tube Head Control Cable Connector F
XORB J4 1 Yellow SBC J21 Connector 1 2705
2 Red SBC J21 Connector 2
3 Braid SBC J21 Connector 3
XORB J5 1 Green Tube Head Control Cable Connector A 2494
2 Orange Tube Head Control Cable Connector B
3 Blue Tube Head Control Cable Connector C
4 Red Tube Head Control Cable Connector E
5 Black Tube Head Control Cable Connector J
6 Shield Tube Head Control Cable Shield
78-10 Wire List


Connector
XORB J6 1 Red .- OINK J15 Pin 2 2707
XORB J8 1 Blue MAX J4 Pin 1 2685
2 Red MAX J4 Pin 2
3 Black MAX J4 Pin 3

..
4 Green MAX J4 Pin 4
5 Shield MAX J4 Pin 5
XORB J9 Black Negative Power Supply --'J-1p. mOn 2819

I
XORB J12 Black Negative Power Supply - J<"V ~OY] 2819
XORB J13 Orange LEMO SBCJ20 2717

I ··
XORB J14 Black Negative Power Supply - jeY 070g 2819
XORB J15 GreyLEMO . . . . . SBCJ14 f"l1)u"l (t)(-) 2490

...
XORB J16 Black Negative Power Supply - -H"PS Ef'lIDL.£ 2819
XORB J18 Black Positive Power Supply +111 "" 0'1\ .

/
2819
. .
XORB J19 White LEMO MAXJ2 2493
XORB J20 Black Positive Power Supply +'r<V yYioY1 2819
XORB J21 Orange LEMO SBC J16 2491
XORB J22 Black Positive Power Supply t K\J f1WG; 2819
XORB J24 Black Positive Power Supply ~ p\VPS I;Nl\BL-E 2819
XORB J27 Yellow LEMO MAXJ7 0314
'--- .
Wire List 78-11

Wire List
78-12
Chapter 8
Troubleshooting
This chapter contains troubleshooting techniques for diagnostic failures, failing quality
assurance tests, mechanical failures and imaging problems.
8.1 Diagnostic Failure Codes .........................................................................................871

8.2 Failing Quality Assurance Test ................................................................................ 8:-5
8.3 Standard Positioning Problems .............................................................................. 8=-15
8.4 Electrical Noise ...................................................................................................... 8:-21
8.5 Air Counts ............................................................................................................... 8723
8.5.1 Unstable Counts ..............................................................................................8~23
8.5.2 No Counts ....................................................................................................... B:-23
8.5.3 Decreasing Air Count~ .....................................................................................8:-27
8.6 Arcing ....................................................................................................................8-:29
8.7 Mechanical Failures ...............................................................................................8-:31
8.7.1 Transverse Motion Failure ............................................................................... 8:-31
8.7.2 Longitudinal Motion Failures ........................................................................... B.-32
8.7.3 Limit Switch Tripped During Scan ....................................................................8-34
8.8 Imaging Problems ..................................................................................................8-:35
8.9 FemurScanProblems ...........................................................................................8-:39
8.10 Failing Air Matrix Results .......................................................................................8~ 1
8.11 Indicator Failures ................................................................................................8-:43
8.12 Communications Failures ...................................................................................... 8~5
8.13 Start Up Software ...................................................................................................8-:47
8.14 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends .........................................................................8-51
Troubleshooting Chapter 8
Chapter 8 Troubleshooting
8.1 Diagnostic Failure Codes

The following conditions halt the operations of the scanner, and generate a diagnostic failure
message which is displayed on the monitor screen:
• transverse motion interruption,
• longitudinal motion interruption,
• Emergency Stop Button actuation,
• excessive x-ray source temperature, and
• loss of 28 volt power supply.
The following error codes are meaningful:
Diagnostic Failure # 15-4 - Transverse Motion failure

The message "Diagnostic Failure #15-4" should occur quickly after the transverse motion
ceases during a patient scan. A slotted disk at the end of the arm rotates through an infrared
beam, and pulses are sent to the OINK board when there is transverse motion. Therefore,
either the motion is stopping during a patient scan, or the electronics of the motion detection
system are not functioning.
If the transverse motion stops during. the scan, see section 8.7. In Total Body scanning, a
defect in the transverse mechanics may cause one of the transverse limit switches to be closed.
Closure of a limit switch prevents further operation of the motor. The shutter will close, the
shutter open lamp will go out and the end of exposure alarm will sound. Seconds later the error
message will appear on the screen. For further information, see section 8.7.
The transverse and longitudinal motion detection system is only operational during patient
scans. If the problem occurs during a quality assurance scan, for instance, then it is probable
that the high voltagesystem is arcing.
If the error occurs consistently on the first line of a patient scan, and the scanner is moving in
the transverse direction, then check the following:
Remove the table top and the front panel. Verify that the slotted disk at the front of the lower
arm rail is in the middle of the slot between the photo diode and photo transistor. The slotted
disk must be completely flat and remain in the center of the sensor slot during its entire rotation.
If the slotted disk has been in contact with the optical sensor, disassemble this mechanism, and
clean the sensor and the slots of the disk.
Diagnostic Failure Codes 8-1

The pulses that normally enter the OINK board at J14 (the black yvire at the center of the
connector) may have stopped. These pulses are necessary to keep the OINK board from
sending an interrupt to the SSC. These pulses can be seen with an oscilloscope (see figure 1).
Use a voltmeter to measure the voltage on the positive side of C16 (33 ~f capacitor). This
voltage should never approach 2 Volts DC during a scan if the pulses are present to reset
U11A. If this voltage stays well below 2VDC during the scan, but the error 15 still occurs, the
interrupt was invalid. Check for arcing in the high voltage system or replace the OINK and SSC.
~Stopped: 5 Acquisitions
[-J
+
T
t
.. +i ... .
T
T
-t . ...
T
I
. .L .
m-+-H-+-f-t-H-t-I-+-++-<-I-+-I-+-t-T-I-+++-I-+++-++H-++-~~-l-'-;-r~
"
"
. .
··f ' · . . ... .
T
. . . . . . .. . ..
!:
+
.. . ...L .. . .. ... .
±
• . • • • . . . -1- . . • • • • .•
.!.
Diagnostic Failure # ~3-3 - Longitudinal Motion failure

The pulses that normally enter the OINK board at J13 (the black wire at the center of the
connector) may have stopped. These pulses are necessary to keep the OINK board from
sending an interrupt to the SSG. These pulses can be seen with an oscilloscope (see figure 2).
Use a voltmeter to measure the voltage on the positive side of C17 (1 000 ~f capacitor). This
voltage should never approach 2 Volts DC during a scan if the pulses are present to reset
U11 S. If this voltage stays well below 2VDC during the scan, but the error 23 still occurs, the
interrupt was invaJid.Check for arcing in the high voltage system or replace the OINK and SSC.
£J T-i
~
t·
1
.i.
. . . .. ..L .
t ... .....
If the longitudinal motion stops in the middle of the scan, see "Longitudinal Motion Failure" in
section 8.7.
8-2 Diagnostic Failure Codes

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev . E (3/98)
Diagnostic Failure # 27-2 - Failure of the 28V power supply

Measure the output of the 28VDC power supply, and verify that it remains constant during the
voltage ramping and scanning operations.
This supply is turned on by the X-ray Relay, so verify that the Relay is closing. If not, then either
the Relay is bad or it is not receiving the signal from the SBC via the OINK (see section 4.5) .
The Tube Head Thermostat is wired in series with the Relay, so if it has opened, the Relay will
not be able to close . (see Failure #30 below)
The 28VDC should also be measured at the Terminal Block. If not, check the continuity of the
wiring and refasten all connections. Also, check the wire tie-downs for excess tension they may
be putting on the wires .
It may be necessary to check the wiring from the Terminal Block to the MAX board and to the
High Voltage Power Supplies .
Diagnostic Failure # 29-1 - Emergency Stop Button is engaged

Verify that the emergency stop button is out. If it has been pressed in, press it again to release
it. If 26VDC can be measured on both pins of OINK connector J17, the Emergency Stop Switch
and the wires connecting it to the OINK board are good and the OINK board should be
replaced.
Diagnostic Failure # 30-0 - Tube Head Thermostat

There is a thermostat inside the Tube Head. This thermostat is normally closed, but opens
when the Tube Head temperature is too high. The thermostat will close again automatically
after a cool down period of usually ,less than 30 minutes. If 0 VDC is measured on both pins of
OINK connector J15, the Thermostat and the wires connecting it to the OINK board are good
and the OINK boardsh~uldbe replaced.
Diagnostic Failure "#O or # 255 - Communication Error or Corrupt Monitor

The computerisnot communicating with the SBC board (see section 8.12). Download the
latest version of the Monitor program again (see section 5.1). If this is unsuccessful, verify that
the I/O cable from the computer to the SBC Board is secure. Also, verfiy that the serial port is
set to SERIAL_2. If all fails, the SSC or computer serial port is defective.
Other Diagnostic Failure Codes

Multiple error codes are possible. These will be displayed one after the other, but the first one
displayed is probably the problem. The others are generated as a result of the first failure.
Reasons For Invalid Diagnostic Failures

Arcing of the x-ray high voltage system releases a large amount of electromagnetic energy. This
energy creates noise in the electronic circuits and may cause the SBC to do unpredictable
things, such as give invalid diagnostic errors. Arcing is usually accompanied by white, blue or
black lines across patient scans (See Arcing, section 8.6).
Diagnostic Failure Codes 8-3

8-4 Diagnostic Failure Codes

8.2 Failing Quality Assurance Test

See the chapter in the Operator's Manual, "Running the Quality Assurance Tests", for
explanations of the various tests that are performed during the running of the Daily Quality
Assurance.
If any of the QA test results fail, none of the results are considered valid. The results will be
stored in the Quality Assurance History file (typically C:\LUNAR\ANC\OPXS.DBF), but these
values will not be averaged with the other results for calibration purposes. In addition, after two
days the operator will find messages appearing on the screen warning that no valid Quality
Assurance Test has been run within the last 48 hours. After two weeks without a valid Quality
Assurance Test, the software will prevent patient scans. Recent valid QA's are necessary for
accurate results.
{ill£~QJeL(}P1f~IIQJn
Just before the QA begins, the operator is asked if the Shutter Open, X-Ray On, and Power-On
lights are illuminated. If the Green Power-On light has burned out and yet the other two lights
are lit, it is recommended to ignore the Green light and answer "yes", allowing the QA to pass.
Answering "no" will fail the QA regardless of all the other tests passing, and failed QA's are not
stored in the database.
However, it is not recommended that scanner operation be continued if the X-ray On light fails,
and the scanner will not operate if the Shutter Open light fails. These LED's are the only
indicator of exposure to x-rays and must be replaced as soon as possible.
~ ea ~. ~lRiIP
1:;a~to~;rs will note slight fluctuations in the Peak Setting, but only a shift of >50 units in
consecutive QA's will give a "fail" evaluation. Drift in the Peak setting should be monitored by
the customer.
t._ iimltQrtl1
The background test will fail if other sources of radiation are located in the room or nearby on
the other side of walls.
Verify that the lead cup is installed immediately underneath the PMT and that other sources of
radiation are not causing the failure. Any other sources of radiation in the vicinity of the scanner
which causes failure of this background measurement must be removed for proper operation of
the scanner.
eam op on test verifies the ability of the lead shutter to atten'uate x-rays from the
tube head by verifying that the Background counts when the shutter is closed are lower than
counts taken through the brass piece with the shutter open.
Failing Quality Assurance Test 8-5

I~ e in the Spillover percentage over time is an indication that the PMT is losing
resolution, even if the Spillover test does not fail. Trends in excess of those specified on in
section 8.15 indicate service is required. A large change in the Spillover can be explained in
some cases by standard positioning (or a small change in the home position of the scanner). If
the beam is not fully eclipsed by the brass piece during the Spillover test, the Spillover value
increases dramatically (see section 8.3)
IS is a stat stical test to measure the spread of the Air Count data. Under normal conditions,
the number of counts obtained in a large number of samples should form a Gaussian
distribution. The Chi Square test is a measure of how the data fits to a Gaussian distribution,
based on a certain confidence factor. There is a small statistical probability that this test will fail
even though there is no problem. Rare failure of this test parameter should not cause concern .
. .J. ,. [0
~ '~-Tne 'os'portant numbers are the High and Low channel Air Counts and the Air Ratio.
J ,.
During this test the baseline is established which will later be used for comparing with the values
obtained during the scan of the standard. The High and Low Air Count numbers should be
checked against the Quality Assurance history to verify that the numbers are close to numbers
obtained in the past. Care should be taken that t~e x-ray beam is not missing the standard, nor
being obstructed by the brass piece on the standard during the High and Low Air Count test.
The Air Ratio value should remain very constant over time. Check to see that the Air Ratio has
not varied from the value at the time ofinstallation by +0.02 or greater. So if the Air Ratio was
0.59 at installation, then 0.58 and 0.60 are also acceptable, but 0.61 or 0.57 would be a cause
for concern. .
Version 4.2a and higher software revisions have an additional test for air counts called "True Air
Ratio". ThisJestmoves the beam off the standard block and into unobstructed air, collects data,
and calculates the count ratio. The normal air count ratio is sensitive to rollunder but not
. rollover. The True Air Ratio is sensitive to rollover but not rollunder. The combination of the two
should detect any problems with the AGS system.
(~f ~ '" ~¥ .~,' .

If the Air Ratio printed on the Quality Assurance Test printout changes by 0.02 or more, it is a
sign that the scanner requires service. The ratio of High to Low Channel Air Counts is perhaps
the most important parameter, because the bone density measurement is based on the
changes in the ratio of High to Low Channel counts. The Air Ratio should remain constant as
long as the x-ray beam quality and the resolution of the detector remain constant. Figure 1
shows the effect of changing detector resolution on the Air Ratio of the scanner. The last points
on this graph indicate the Air Ratio of the scanner after replacement of the Scintillation Detector.
8-6 . Falling Quality Assurance Test

OP X 6201 AIR RATIO
Unfortunately, Air Ratio changes are usually not noticed until the test results fail, and sometimes
the customer will not even notice the problem until they are warned that no valid Quality
Assurance Test has been run within the last 48 hours. Therefore, it is important that the Quality
Assurance trends be inspected during each service visit (see section 8.15).
It is not possible to view the Air Ratio trends in the Quality Assurance History file, but it is
possible to view the Low Channel Air .Counts. A change in the Low Channel Air Counts will
usually be accompanied by a change in Air Ratio (see "Decreasing Air Counts" in section 8.5).
If the graph of the Low Channel Air Counts shows a trend, view the Quality Assurance History,
and calculate the initial and final Air Ratio by dividing HIGH by LOW. Compare these two
values to determine if the Air Ratio has changed 0.02 or more.
N ';': 6::01 LuW AIR COUNTS
... -:

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3198)
The problems which could cause a change in air ratio are:

• deterioration of the resolution of the Scintillation Detector (PMT)
• current leakage through the transorbs on the XORB board
• a faulty High Voltage Power Supply (kV unstable over time)
• changes to the x-ray tube insert
These are very difficult to diagnose by a method other than substitution of new components until
the Air Ratio returns to normal. The Scintillation Detector deterioration or unstable High Voltage
Power Supply, will usually cause the Air Matrix Scan (see section 5.1) to fail. The specification
for XORB Board transorbs is that they must allow less than 0.5 micro amperes reverse bias
current. At LUNAR, each transorb is measured by applying a 5 Volt reverse bias to the transorb
and a 100 kQ 1% resistor connected in series. The voltage measured across the 100 kQ
resistor must then be less than 50 mV.
Homing Problem
The scanner may not be finding the correct "Home" position. The correct "Home" position
aligns the center of the x-ray beam with the center of the Brass Piece when the Standard is
correctly positioned. The Air Counts must be obtained through the plastic part of the Standard
next to the Brass Piece. If the Air Counts are obtained with the x-ray beam passing through the
Brass Piece or missing the standard entirely, the Quality Assurance Scan will fail. For additional
information on these symptoms, see "Standard Positioning Problems", section 8.3.
~ :\ - , .~... U Ilt1lt~§
Failure of this test is caused by one ormore of the follo~ing:
• Incorrect Limit Switch positioning
• Defective .Limit Switch
• A mechanical constraint
• A defective Motor
• A defective Centent Motor Controller
The values recorded for these tests should remain fairly constant over time. Variations between
QA's of under 25 steps should not be a cause for concern as 1 transverse step = 0.05 mm and
1 longitudinal step = 0.1 mm, so the actual variation is only a few millimeters.
If the number of steps continually increases from QA to QA, this could indicate an impediment to
the scanner's motion and should be rectified.
'~ ::..if1J " - ,~

-' The tissue value should not be the sole failing parameter. The failure of this test is usually
accompanied by problems with Bone Mineral values (see below) or Air Ratio trends (see
above). If this is failing alone it is probably a problem with the counting system (Detector, AGS
or DCA's).
8-8 . Failing Quality Assurance Test

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev . E (3/98)
Bone Mineral of the Standard Chambers

There are two messages which can be displayed below the table at the bottom of the Quality
Assurance Results printout. The software contains values which it expects the scanner to
measure for the scan of each chamber. If the mean of the BM measurements made for the
chamber does not fall within the predefined software limits the message "Mean standard value
deviates from expected" will occur. If the percent coefficient of variance is over 2%, the
message "Variability in standard results is high" will appear. These messages will always occur
if the Air Counts or Air Ratio test has deviated severely from normal results. However if the Air
Count results look normal, and the values are approximately equal to the numbers obtained
during the scanner installation, then the counts may be unstable.
Another cause of falling %CV can be arcing during the QA. This can be detected by examining
the QA History graphically and looking for variation of the Large BM values (see Figures 1 and 2
below). Note the few data points that vary. These are the early signs of arcing.
OBS·L·MASS
f" ! "
--~
--1i
...!
0
--i
-1i
This will also be apparent (but not obvious) on the QA Results printout. The arc occurred in the
third standard scan line and elevated the BM values. If a customer reports a failing QA because
of a %CV being too high, be aware that this could be an early warning of arcing. Obtain from
the site the DPXS.DBF file for analysis. Look for variation of the Large BM values. Arcs of
greater magnitude can also affect more than one line of the standard scan.
It is very important to notice these early warning signs of arcing so that the system can be re-
greased before any damage is done to the high voltage cable connectors or the tube head.

Limits
Test Lower Limit Upper Limit

:!)::: I L: -- I l j !
Peak Setting -50 from last QA +50 from last QA
Background (low keV) 0 50
(High keV) 0 50
Beam Stop Actio,n -

~.~." .~,~{~.. <'r ::~'~.··': :~ ) 11 , (-j ! '.> t1
Percent Spillover 6.3 10.0 (9.0 to 10.0 is sub-
standard)
Chi Square 0 40
Air Counts (Low keV) 450,000 cps 900,000 cps
(High keV) 270,000 cps 630,000 cps

. c..;'~( i <.' ;; ' '~-:- . i, ": ,,:'.1 '~ / • ." ::~ , , \.~) ,~ ~:>..:'.: T~_: ~ i
,r / '-j /' \ \"' , ....)..
AIr RatiO .
p~ ' "' .:'~:' .' , /
:--.50
• • / o'i .....,
.70
r---. I. ' . • ,.A,. t:
" I ,•. ' ,1( ' _ , I > , ,. ( ,' ';'U fl~'l .j,, ~; [ {,~~ ;. ; 1" \.,
Transverse Mechanics 12350 (DPX-IQ240) 12550 (DPX-IQ240)

. 10700 (DPX-IQ1BO) 10900 (DPX-IQ1BO)
Longitudinal Mechanics 19700 (DPX-IQ240) 19800 (DPX-IQ240)

13250 (DPX-IQ1BO) 13350 (DPX-IQ1BO)
;;)(.::-; ( .>:
_~f r,j ~:7 ' <:'/ ; !f
Tissue Value 1.302 1.320
.1~; , 5T~~ , ( \.! (X.!~~l -~ ~
,-/~ '_."
<.~ -l
Collimation Ratio 3.5 4.5
Ii ;,~ l"{ ~,/ .. )
~ •. ,1 /",
l i '> f. ~-)
,' ,
:j
%CV '.: ~~j" ~ ,~..'>' ~ 0.00 2.00
8-10 , Failing Quality Assurance Test

-
RESULTADOS DO CONTROLO DE QUALIDADE
TensFo do Raio-X (kVp) 76.0 Data 04.02.09

Corrente do Raio-X (~A) 150.0 Sistema 2908
DETECTOR
c AHPL I F I CAOOR CONT AGEH CONTAGEH

o CONFIGURACAO keY BAIXO keY ALTO
N
T 450 38311 656
A 500 34509 2 189
S 550 28835 93 12
600 30554 22330
650 31382 33616
100 40915 31113 2
150 31210 32141
800 25869 2662 1
850 15211 29053
I I I I I I I 900 8013 36029
AJUSTE DO AMPLIFICADOR 950 3946 40301
PROCEDIMENTO VALOR AVAL IAe; I~o
Luzes Passou
Ajuste de Pico 695 unidades Pas sou
Fundo(keV Baixo) 3 cps
(keV Alto) 3 cps Passou
AC9FO de paragem do feixe Pas sou
Percentagem excedente 8.67 % Passou-Bom
Qui Quadrado 1 Passou
Contagem do ar(keV Baixo) 402266 cps Falhou
(keV Alto) 245468 cps Falhou
Taxa de ar 0.61 Pas sou
Mecanica transversal 10822/10824 passos Pas sou
Mecanica longitudinal 13293/13294 passos Pas sou
Valor do Tecido 1.315 Passou
Taxa de Colima9Fo 4.093 Passou
1 2 3 4 5 MEDIA SD %CV
BM GRANDE 286.6 276.8 278.7 280.4 275.9 279.7 3.78 1.35

LARGURA 501 498 500 497 498 499 1.47 0.29
BM MEDIO 211.7 211.2 208.9 212.4 207.8 210.4 1.76 0.84
LARGURA 434 437 431 438 432 434 2.73 0.63
BM PEQUENO 149.9 150.2 147.6 148.0 147.6 148.6 1.16 0.78
LARGURA 366 368 366 362 362 365 2.40 0.66
IFor Service Use: Spine Phantom
St~condary Quality Assurance Test
Revised 4/99B
Part Number: 0222
NOTE: For EXPERT, follow the instructions in the Operator's Manual.
The aluminum spine phantom is used during service site visits; it may also be used for
troubleshooting. This phantom is supplied with a plastic water container. Read
through these instructions before you perform a phantom measurement for the first
time.
The phantom represents the typical density range and size of a normal human spine.
The spine phantom (Figure 1) approximates vertebrae L 1 through L4. Parts of
vertebrae T 12 and L5 are landmarks used by the program during analysis.
T12
L1
L2
L3
L4
L5
Figure 1. Spine phantom
1. Put 15 cm of water in the plastic container.
2. Secure the lid to the top of the container and place the water bath on the scanner table.
3. Remove the lid from the container.
4. Put the aluminum phantom in the middle of the plastic container bottom. Position the
phantom so TI2 is toward the head of the scanner table.
For Service Use: Spine Phantom Secondary Quality Assurance Test 1
I"
5. measurement. Have you l1'lP~~H'I"Pr1
.. - select it from the list. Continue with 7.
continue with 6 to record information for the
6. Record the information that follows:
First Name:
Last Name: Phantom

Record the current
Birth Date:
Sex: Male
Ethnic \Vhite
.... ~~'. . . . . . . . . T ID: on the
7. Select the measurement seu:mj.!;s. For use 15 cm Select the mode:
- DPX-MD: Medium 750 mode.
Hi Res Medium 750 mode.
"'1/'/>/"/117'1" Standard mode.
8. Position the laser in the 0 middle of L5 and in the @ center of the
2. Localizer
2 For Service Use: Phantom .3e(':onaaJ'1' v·"",U £ v Assurance Test

C
Lunar Static Cosunter - csomresultador 10/24/200 ~
Operating Voltage 76.0 Samples per Second 64

Tube Current 3000 Number of Samples 128
Collimation MEDIUM Number of Repeats 2Q
Data Corrections OFF Dead Low Channel 0.00000075
Spillover % 7.90 Dead High Channel 0.00000075
REPEAT # Low High Ratio Time
1 6980 78043 11.181 11:03:04

2 7128 77590 10.885 11:03:06
3 7085 78345 11.058 11:03:09
4 7143 77698 10.878 11:03:11
5 7133 77708 10.894 11:03:13
6 7104 78225 11.011 11:03:16
7 7224 77400 10.714 11:03:18
8 7158 77703 10.855 11:03:20
9 7204 77364 10.739 11:03:22
10 7004 77857 11.116 11:03:25
11 7101 78134 11.003 11:03:27
12 7301 77895 10.669 11:03:29
13 7268 77389 10.648 11:03:32
14 7130 78167 10.963 11:03:34
15 7167 77996 10.883 11:03:36
16 7216 77546 10.746 11:03:39
17 7140 78110 10.940 11:03:41
18 7314 77528 10.600 11:03:43
19 7339 77530 10.564 11:03:46
20 7230 77448 10.712 11:03:48
STATISTICS Low High Ratio

MEAN: 7168 77784 10.853
STD: 95 312 0.174
NOTE: It would be prudent in both of these cases to take a positive and negative power
supply, AND a tube head. Also, the XORB test points may look normal
(indicating 76 KV) in each case as well. This usually occurs where the power
supplies are defective and so the monitor voltages returned to the XORB may not
show the true voltage. When the tube head a;cs causing the voltage to go too
high, then the XORB test points may indeed show the actual voltages.
The clearest indicators of these problems are the shape of the Peak, the Air Counts, and Air
Ratio. Note how these differ from cases where the standard block is positioned incorrectly (see
section 8.3).
Figure 4 was run at 72 kV; Figure 5 was run at 80 kV.

-
Lunar Static Counter 02/10/2009
Operating Voltage 76.0 Samples per Second 64

Tube Current 750 Number of Samples 20
Collimation MEDIUM Number of Repeats 50
Data Corrections OFF Dead Low Channel 0.00000075
Spillover % 8.15 Dead High Channel 0.00000075
REPEAT # Low High Ratio Time
1 361 3780 10.471 11:24:04

2 323 3689 11.421 11:24:05
3 329 3669 11.152 11:24:05
4 338 3660 10.828 11:24:06
5 330 3711 11.245 11:24:07
6 319 3730 11.693 11:24:07
7 296 3666 12.385 11:24:08
8 297 3710 12.492 11:24:08
9 306 3714 12.137 11:24:09
10 305 3747 12.285 11:24:09
11 361 3598 9.967 11:24:10
12 314 3666 11.675 11:24:11
13 318 3690 11.604 11:24:11
14 321 3885 12.103 11:24:12
15 332 3689 11.111 11:24:13
16 314 3712 11.822 11:24:13
17 320 3691 11.534 11:24:14
18 326 3585 10.997 11:24:15
19 329 3682 11.191 11:24:15
20 325 3712 11.422 11:24:16
21 331 3700 11.178 11:24:17
22 312 3554 11.391 11:24:17
23 347 3791 10.925 11:24:18
24 318 3676 11.560 11:24:19
25 320 3755 11.734 11:24:19
26 319 3704 11.611 11:24:20
27 314 3680 11.720 11:24:21
28 348 3636 10.448 11:24:21
29 332 3722 11.211 11:24:22
30 310 3678 11.865 11:24:23
31 320 3748 11.713 11:24:23
32 299 3586 11.993 11:24:24
33 317 3672 11.584 11:24:25
34 322 3762 11.683 11:24:25
35 303 3701 12.215 11:24:26
STATISTICS Low High Ratio

MEAN: 322 3696 11.496
STD: 16 62 0.559
AIR MATRIX RESULTS
File: XM8530MO .01B Voltage: 76 .0 Stabilizer : On Motion: Yes Lines: 40

Date: 121 71107 Current: 300 Collimator: 0.84 Points: 204
Low keV Statistics
Mean Low High SD %CV

2391 1 3012 954 39.91
Distribution of Points
Observed Expected
Class Interval Frequency Frequency
-2857 to -1903 0 0.0

-1902 to -949 0 1.6
-948 to 6 1085 49.0
7 to 960 36 494.5
961 to 1914 24 1972.3
1915 to 2868 6475 3125.3
2869 to 3822 540 1972.3
3823 to 4776 0 494.5
4777 to 5730 0 49.0
5731 to 6684 0 1.6
6685 to 7638 0 0.0
Chi 2 = 29450 FAIL Skew = -l. 84 Kurtosis = 2.07
High keV Statistics
Mean Low High SD %CV

2476 1 3147 989 39.93
Distribution of Points
Observed Expected
Class Interval Frequency Frequency
-2962 to -1973 0 0.0

-1972 to -984 0 1.6
-983 to 4 1085 49.0
5 to 993 34 494.5
994 to 1982 27 1972.3
1983 to 2971 6485 3125.3
2972 to 3959 529 1972.3
3960 to 4948 0 494.5
4949 to 5937 0 49.0
5938 to 6926 0 1.6
6927 to 7914 0 0.0
Chi 2 = 29486 FAIL Skew = -l. 85 Kurtosis = 2.08

Symptoms of High and Low KV

It has been noted in a small number of cases that defective high voltage power supplies, or an .
arcing tube head may produce a voltage other than 76 kV. This is possible because once
ramping is complete, the sse does not adjust the kV any further.
In the first example of low kV (see Figure 4), defective power supplies are most likely
responsible.
QUALITY ASSURANCE RESULTS
X-Ray Voltage (kVp) 76.0 Date 02/0

X-Ray Current (rnA) 150.0
I DETECTOR
I
C I AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS
0 /t-\ , SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
I I \ /
U I I \ I
N ".- .... _/1 I \ / 250 29555 390
I \ /
T
I 300 39718 554
/'''1', \ /1 350 40026 1312
S / I '\ 400 36234 6506
/ I \ 450 48899 22634
/ I \, 500 67661 38630
I
I " "- , 550
600
68608
49011
41050
34429
650 26595 42352
700 11142 60496
AMPLIFIER SETIING 750 4269 70912
PROCEDURE VALUE EVALUATION

Lights - Pass
Peak Setting 535 units Pass
Background 1LowkeV} 1 cps Pass
(High keV) o cps Pass
Beam Stop Act.ion Pass
Percent Spillover 8.56% Pass
Chi Square 4 Pass
Air Counts (Low keV) 732592 cps Pass
(High keV) 279669 cps Pass
Air Ratio 0.38 Fail
Transverse Mechanics 12399/12401 steps Pass
Longitudinal Mechanics 19755 /19754 ~ae~s
Tissue Value 1.305 Pass
Collimation Ratio 3.784 Pass
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN
LARGE BM260.9 264.0 262.4 259.5260.1 261.41.640.63
WIDTH 503 507 507 498 503 504 3.320.66
MEDIUM BM192.7 194.6 193.7194.6194.3 194.00.730.37
WIDTH 437 437 436 433 434 435 1.620.37
SMALL BM137 . 7 13 8 . 5 13 9 . 6 13 7 . 5 138 . 6 138. 4 0 . 73 0 . 53
WIDTH 370 370 374 369 369 370 1.850.50

In the case of high voltage (Figure 5), an arcing tube head is the most likely cause although
defective power supplies could cause this as well.

I DETECTOR
I
/'l AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS
C ,
0 I
""'-,
'J/ I '\ / ..j. \
I
/
SETI"ING LOWkeV HIGH keV
U / , \ I
I I I
I ,.,.. 250 87594 1747
N I \
I 300 97331 2522
T I I \ 350 78506 9101
/ \
S / I , 400 54877 34186
I I " 450 59094 75590
... / I " 500 76557 96291
I 550 78016 80230
I 600 55782 53878
650 31110 53238
700 13338 72266
AMPLIFIER SETTING 750 4963 80477
Lights Pass
Peak Setting 500.units Pass
Background (Low keV) 2 cps Pass
Beam Stop Action Pass
Chi Square 2 Pass
(High keV) 692936 cps Fail
Air Ratio 0.85 Fail
Longitudinal Mechanics 19752 /19754 13ar.B~S
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN
LARGE BM2 61 . 0 261. 6 261. 9 263 . 6262 . 5 262 .1 0 . 870.33
WIDTH 493 495 495 495 494 494 0.800.16
MED IUM BM1 9 6 . 1 1 9 5 . 4 1 9 6 . 9 1 95 . 0 1 95 . 2 195. 7 0 . 71 0 . 3 6
WIDTH 425 423 427 425 424 425 1.330.31
SMALL BM140.7 139.4 139.5 140.0139.3 139.80.530.38
WIDTH 362 358 359 360 358 359 1.500.42
8-12 Failing Quality Assurance Test

8.3 Standard Positioning Problems

Problems with failing Daily Quality Assurance (QA) Tests can sometimes be associated with
improper placement of the standard block. The following QA results printouts illustrate various
positions of the standard:
Example 1
Figure 1is a normal passing QA with the standard block properly placed.

X-Ray Current (mA) 150.0
DETECTOR
C /1'\ ,,- AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS

o / '\,
/- 1/" \ / SETIING LOW keV HIGH keV
u
II 1\\ /
j '/j I \\ /
N / I \.-/ 250 57094 819
/ I \ 300 66867 1197
T / I \ 350 55651 4448
S / I \. 400 44925 21091
/ I " 450 55571 47504
,,-/ I " 500 74150 65117
I 550 72234 57322
I 600 49440 43568
650 24787 50211
700 10848 68470
Lights Pass
Background (Low keV) 1 cps Pass
Beam Stop Ac~ion Pass
Chi Square 6 Pass
Air Ratio 0.58 Pass
Longitudinal Mechanics 19755 /19755 ~ar.a~s
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN
LARGE BM264.6 265.2 265.4264.4264.7264.90.350.13
WIDTH 499 502 505 500 502 502 2.060.41
MED I UM BM1 9 9 . 3 197. 5 196. 8 1 9 5 . 8 197 . 0 1 9 7 . 3 1 . 13 0 . 57
WIDTH 432 430 428 428 428 429 1.600.37
SMALL BM142.7 140.4 140.0141.3142.0141.30.980.70
WIDTH 364 362 361 364 364 363 1.260.35
8-15
Standard Positioning Problems
Example 2
Figure 2 is a QA in which the standard was not on the table. Note the errant Spillover value and
Air Counts (the Low KeV counts indicates the counters rolled over). In this case Spillover will
usually be approximately 1100/0. However, this is unpredictable as individual AGS boards try to
handle the superimposed signals from the unattenuated x-ray beam.
X-Ray Voltage 76.0 Date

X-Ray Current ~~~) 150.0
02/05/9
Sys
I DETECTOR
.+" -,
C /I \ // \ AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS
0
/ .l-" \ / SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
,.., / / I "\./
U / ,_/ / I \
N / I \ 250 283312 46448
/ I \ 300 293533 62419
T / I \ 350 261792 107250
S / I \ 400 281987 190755
/ I \ 450 352064 273731
/ I \ 500 374781 287616
/
I \ 550 311120 259901
- ... /
I
\
...... 600
650
700
204298
116512
64794
276326
344339
380410
Lights Pass
Background \Low keV) 2 cps Pass
Beam Stop Accion Pass
Percent Spillover 129.64% Fail
Chi Square 6 Pass
Air Counts (Low keV) 14087 cps Fail
Air Ratio . 255.10 Fail
Transverse Mechan~cs 12398/12401 steps Pass
Longitudinal Mechanics 19755 /19755 st6rnffis
Tissue Value 3.350 Fail
Collimation Ratio 2.119 Fail
2 3 4 1 5 MEAN S
---- ---- ---- ----
LARGE BM 61.7 44.6 90.0 35.6 70.4 60.519.2131.79
WIDTH 53 61 85 62 70 6610.8316.36
MEDIUM BM 6.5 49.2 35.1 38.7 27.5 31.414.2645.44
WIDTH 42 71 47 42 65 5~12.2122.8~
SMALL BM 47.7 1.3 38.2 78.5 33.3 39.24.8462.3
WIDTH 42 42 58 112 43 5926.9945.44
1 - Mean standard value deviates fro~ expected.

2 2 Variability in standard results 1S h1gh.
8-16 Standard Positioning Problems

Example 3
Figure 3 is a QA run with the standard upside down and backwards. Spillover was measured
through the white delrin plastic plug and Tissue Value was measured through the brass
Spillover piece.
X-Ray Voltage (kVp) 76.0 Date 02/05£~

DETECTOR
C / ....... \ AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS

-, / I \ / SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
o / , / /T' \ /
U '_// 1 ' , \ //
N / I \- 250 58074 925
/ I \ 300 66726 1315
T / I \ 350 55702 4397
S / I \ 400 45568 21466
/ I \ 450 56755 50368
.../ I \ 500 73466 65661
I \ 550 71539 57549
I ' 600 48643 42989
650 24173 50483
700 9754 68138
AMPLIFIER SmlNG 750 3837 74n1

Lights - Pass
Background (Low keV) o cps Pass
Beam Stop Act.ion Pass
Chi Square 5 Pass
. . (High keV) 455003 cps Pass
Al.r Ratl.o 3.17 Fail
Longitudinal Mechanics 19755 /19754 s~
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN
LARGE BML974. 41986.71968.41966.0.983.21975.1fl 8.10 0.41
WIDTH 385 390 379 383 382 384 3.66 0.95
MEDIUM BM2357. 72362.02359.02343. ~340 .12352.lt! 8.90 0.38
WIDTH 450 447 451 449 454 45~ 2.32 0.51
SMALL BM2 746 . 22755 . 52729 . 82741 . ~ 728 . 92742 . 3 8 . 44 0 . 3 1
WIDTH 526 523 518 520 519 521 2.93 0.56
1 - Mean standard value deviates from expected.
Standard Positioning Problems 8-17

Example 4
Misplacing the standard by approximately 1" toward the foot end will give results as in figure 4 .
Spillover is measured through the air and the Air Counts and Peak are measured through the
brass.
X-Ray Voltage (kVp) 76.0 Date 02/05/9

X-Ray Current (rnA) 150.0 Sys
DETECTOR
C AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS

o SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
U
N 250 2224 3
T -=-_c==1==~--==~- 300 2390 10
350 1523 144
S I 400 486 909
I 450 150 1824
I 500 173 2285
I 550 154 1996
I 600 80 678
650 70 240
700 26 176

Lights Pass
Background ILow keV) 1 cps Pass
Beam Stop AcEion Pass
Percent Spillover 129~84% Fail
Chi Square 3 Pass
(High keV)~ 14625 cps Fail
Air Ratio .. . 45.93 Fail
Transverse Mechah~cs 12399/12401 steps Pass
Longitudinal Mechanics 19754 /197~4 st~s
Tissue Value . -0.623 Fail
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN S
---- ---- ---- ----
LARGE BM 0.2 0.1 -0.4 1.6 4.1 1.1 1 . 61142.4~
WIDTH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.00
MEDIUM BM 0.2 0.1 -0.4 1.6 4.1 1.1 1.61142.4~
1 1 1 1 0.00 0.00
o .~ 0.00 0.00
WIDTH 1
SMALL BM 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
WIDTH -48 -40 -22 -13 -13 -2714.33 0.00
1 - Mean standard value deviates from e~ected.

2 - Variability in standard results is hlgh.
8-18 'Standard Positioning Problems

Example 5
The QA in figure 5 is what would happen in the rare instance that someone would inadvertently
remove the standard during the QA (after the Peak) and then replace it having realized the QA
was in progress (after the Tissue Value Test). Although the five lines are scanned across the
block as normal, the errant Air Counts will cause the 8M values and widths to deviate from
expected.
X-Ray Voltage ~~)) 76.0 Date 02/05/9

X-Ray Current 150.0 Sys
I DETECTOR
I
C /i'\ ",. AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS
/-
"- I /~ \ /
SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
0 /
"- ..... ,/ // I \ \ /
/
I I
U I \\ /
N I
I I "'-,/ 250 57565 768
I \
300 66736 1245
T I
I
\
I \ 350 56262 4445
S I I \ 400 44794 21453
/ I '- 450 56982 49398
",
/
I " ..... 500 75050 66630
I " 550 73011 57766
I 600 49197 43491
650 25197 50310
700 10186 69146

Lights - Pass
Background {Low keV) . 1 cps Pass
Chi Square 1 Pass
Air Ratio 11322.78 Fail
1 2 3 4 5 MEAN S
---- ---- ---- ---- ----
LARGE BM 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 10.9i
WIDTH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.00
MEDIUM BM 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 10.9i
WIDTH
SMALL BM
1
0.2
1
0.3
1
0.2
1
0.2
1
0.2 oj 0.00 0.00
0.2 10.9i
WIDTH 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.00 0.00
1 - Mean standard value deviates fro~ e~ected.

2 - Variability in standard results lS hlgh.
Standard Positioning Problems 8-19

Example 6
Placing the standard backwards with the brass piece toward the rear and the delrin plug
forward, yet both toward the foot end, will result in Spillover and Tissue Value being taken
through the black plastic of the block and Air Counts and Peak are taken through the delrin plug
(see figure 6). .
X-Ray Voltage 76.0

X-Ray Current ~~)) 150.0
Date 02/05/96
Syst
I DETECTOR
I
C I /'
AMPLIFIER COUNTS COUNTS
/'\ /
SETIING LOWkeV HIGH keV
' ' IIIIII \ ~_/' /
0 ".- /
/
U I ..... 1' I 250 40941 480
N {
I
\
\
T
I 300 47661 579
/ I \ 350 40710 2317
S I \
400 30253 13773
", .....
/ \
I I 450 34890 34957
-'"
".
I 500 44995 47395
I .....
.... 550 43933 40989
I 600 29830 29962
650 14794 31216
700 5702 41411

Lights - Pass
Background {Low keV) 1 cps Pass
Percent SDillover 115.22% Fail
Chi Square 2 Pass
Air Counts (LowkeV) 318 cps Fail
(High keY) . 316090 cps Pass
Air Ratio 992.74 Fail
1 3 4 5 2MEAN SD
---- ---- - - - - ----
LARGE BM 5.0 592.9 621. 3 -5.8 645.3 371.lJ304.3!B1.89
WIDTH 42 400 493 42 454 2 86 2 0 1 . 51>0 . 4 3
MEDIUM BM 12.0 717.8 657.3 687.4728.3 560.5275.43*9.15
WIDTH 42 501 485 502 533 4 1 ~ 185 . 9435 . 0 7
SMALL BM -0.2 898.3 109.3 95.0 55.2 231. 335.59.44. ~
WIDTH 42 608 94 76 46 173218.2$26.01
1 - Mean standard value deviates from e~ected.

2 - Variability in standard results is hlgh.
If a customer reports a QA failure on a scanner that seemed to be operating fine and showed no
signs of mechanical problems while running the QA, the QA results should be examined for
characteristics like the above examples. Ask the customer to check the position of the standard
if it is still on the table, or have them rerun the QA making sure the block is placed correctly.
8-20 'Standard Positioning Problems

DPX-lQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
8.4 Electrical Noise

If the Low Air Count numbers have suddenly increased or decreased by over 100,000 counts,
this may be the result of noise on the AMP-04 signal when it reaches the DCA. If the noise has
been amplified to the 1.25V needed to be counted as a Low Channel signal, each noise spike
will be counted in addition to the normal Low Air Counts. The possibility of noise problems in
the scanner has been virtually eliminated by placing the AMP-03 very close to the Scintillation
Detector. However, these symptoms could result from a broken or partially connected coaxial
cable in anyone of the coaxial cables between the Scintillation Detector and the AGS .
Check the signal at TP4 of the AGS board with an oscilloscope. Look for noise on the wave
form. This test-point is the input for the AGS , so noise here means a problem, somewhere
towards the PMT. Also, check TP19 on the AGS with an oscilloscope. This is the output of the
AGS and would be a good indication of the AGS board's condition. If a storage oscilloscope is
used to look at these wave forms, they will look similar to the channel 1 signal (see Figure 1). If
a normal oscilloscope is used , the signal will appear as a superimposed multitude of bipolar
signals with different amplitudes.
~ Stopped :
! I ,-+]
8 Acqui sitions
T~
.:> : 10 . 38).1S
@: -15 . 12).1S
r
l .... :
t -
i
~ .j i l il l ~~-~
r -
l
r'
i
f
If the TP19 wave form looks abnormal, replace either the AGS or the AGSDCA printed circuit
board assemblies. If the spare part is not immediately available, then disconnect J8 on the AGS
and run a calibration . This will run the signal through the AGS at unity gain. If normal results
reappear after this modification, the cause of the problem is confined to a defective AGS or
AGSDCA board.
-E-Ie-c-tr-ic-a-l-N-o-is-e-----------------------------;8;--2~f
8-22 Electrical Noise

8.5 Air Counts
8.5.1 · ·Unstable Counts

To examine the scanner's ability to count detector pulses consistently over longer periods of
time, run the Air Matrix option from the DIAGS program. If time permits, use the default
parameters and begin the scan. A smaller scan area can be done by selecting fewer Scan
Lines and Scan Points. (See "Performing an Air Matrix Test" in section 5.1 and "Failing Air
Matrix Results" in section 8.10.)
If the "End of Exposure Alarm" rings during the time the Air Matrix scan is running, see "Alarm
Pings During Scan" in section 8.11 . If the Shutter Open or the X-ray On lamps on the front
panel blink, during the test, see section 8.11 also.
While the Air Matrix scan is running, measure the voltage at test points 1, 2, 5 and 6 of the
XORS board. They should have approximately the following values respectively:
0.150VDC, 3.8VDC, 0.150VDC, and 3.8VDC. A pure DC voltage on an oscilloscope at test
point 1 and 5 of the XORB will verify that there is constant current through the filament of the X-
ray Insert. If there is AC ripple in excess of 0.2 Vpp, the power supplies should be replaced.
Start and stop the x-rays several times while observing the voltage at TP3 and TP7 of the
XORS board. This is the programming voltageJrom the SSC, and although this voltage is
dependent on the feedback information returned to the SSC, the voltages at the XORB board
test points should be approximatelythesame each time the x-rays are produced. The AC ripple
on this signal must be less thanO.2Vpp. Replace the SSC board ifthe proper control signal is
not present.
When the x-rays are off between scans, verify that the shutter and collimator slide apertures line
up with the aperture to the Tube Head beneath. Take some alignment pictures and verify that
the image is a bright, round image. If the image is slightly elliptical, the collimator, shutter and
Tube Head apertures are not aligned. Open and close the shutter and collimator to make sure
that they return to the same position each time. Turn the x-rays back on, and make sure that
you obtain nearly the same count rate each time the shutter is opened or the collimator is
cycled. Either the shutter or the collimator slide may be adjusted by loosening the set screw on
the solenoid mounting bracket and rotating the solenoid. Tighten the set screw after
adjustment.
8.5.2 No Counts
When the table to the right of the peak graph on the Quality Assurance Results printout is
entirely filled with zeros, use the Static Counter program in the Diagnostics (see section 5.1) to
create x-rays at 76 kV and 150 uA and open the Shutter for sampling. Then check the following
items:
Air Counts 8-23

I. Is the amber X-ray On LED illuminated?

A. If it is, skip to part II.
B. If not, the voltage or current ramping has probably failed . Are both the red and
green LED's on the MAX Board illuminated?
1. Voltage or Current Ramping Failures

If not, is the red LED illuminated?
a. X-ray Relay or OINK

If not, measure the output of the 28 Volt Power Supply. Check
the operation of the X-ray Relay or the OINK Board which controls
its operation. If all of the above are working, the red LED may be
defective.
b. MAX Board Fuse

If so, the fuse is blown on the MAX Board (see section 8.9).
2. If the red and green MAX Board LED's are illuminated, verify the following
test point voltages:
a. Current Ramping Failure

XORB TP1 is approximately 0.150 VDC . If incorrect, go to step d.
If this test point is correct, verify that XORB TP5 is also
approximately 0.150 VDC. If this voltage is incorrect, substitute a
newPositive High Voltage .Power Supply.
b. . Voltage Ramping Failure

XORB TP2 and XORB TP6 are approximately 3.8 VDC. If these
voltages are incorrect, verify that the voltages on XORB TP3 and
XORB TP7 are approximately 3.8 VDC . If TP3 and TP7 are not
equal the XORB jumper at J26 is set in the wrong position. If they
are equal but incorrect, test the cable from the SBC to XORB, or
substitute a new SBC Board.
c. X-ray On LED
Test the X-Ray On LED by inserting it into the Power On
receptacle. Replace if defective.
d. High Voltage System

Current ramping has failed. If TP1 and TP5 are zero and do not
change, check the polarity of the High Voltage Cables. The X-ray
Insert is essentially a diode, and will not conduct current from the
anode to the cathode .
If either of the test points is at 1.0 VDC, the High Voltage Power
Supply is delivering as much current as it possibly can, and has
automatically limited the voltage.
8-24 Air Counts

Check TP2 and TP6. If the voltage is approximately 3.8 VDC, the
voltage has been set properly.
Feel the heat sinks on the back of the High Voltage Power
Supplies. If one of the power supplies is 'cold, this is usually the
defective one . If one is warm and the other is hot, replace the hot
one. The best troubleshooting technique may be to substitute
power supplies.
If either TP2 or TP6 are incorrect, the possibility exists that one of
the High Voltage Cables or the Tube Head is shorted. The short
may be possible to find with an ohm meter, but often it takes
several kV to break down the defective component. It will be
difficult to troubleshoot this problem by any method other than part
substitution.
~
~! p pp
_C_A_U_T_I_O_N_:__D_o_n_o_t_att_e_m_p_tt_o_r_a_m_p_t_h_e__o_w_e_r_s_u__l_y_a_b_0_v_e_5_0_k_V_w_ith_o_u_t_a_ _
cable connected, or arcing will occur near the connector.
Ramping between 40 and 50 kV is a good way to determine

whether the power supplies are able to increase voltage from 0 to
50 kV.
II. Detection Electronics Problem

Are the yellow and green LED's on the AGS Board illuminated?
A. Defective DCA or SSC

If so, check the signals at DCA-TP3 (see channel 1 , figure 1) and at DCA-TP17
(see channel 2, figure 2). If neither signal is present, check the cable from the
AGS to the DCA. If the signal at TP3 is present but no signal is present at TP17,
replace the DCA. If both signals are correct, replace the SSC or the cable
connecting the DCA and SSC.
:' 1 T-i
... ... . ·t
A: 10 . 381..1S
~
[
± @: -15.12I..1s
r ' .. .
t T
.....
.
+.
I
[
f
L ... .. . .. ... ... ·f ..
t
f ±
.1
i Jl j
t
l) 1 1 I J
-; .
T
..
..f. .
I
t
.-f -.,
!
Air Counts 8-25

B. No AGS Yellow or Green LED's

If the AGS green and yellow LED's are out, turn off the scanner, and remove the
arm panel and the AMP enclosure. Set a voltmeter on the highest scale (at least
1000 VDC) and clip the positive lead onto AMP-TP1 . (It is recommended that a
voltmeter with clip on probes be used. If this test point is shorted to ground
during the measurement, AMP-U1 will be destroyed.)
CAUTION : Never disconnect any connectors from the AM P board when the
power is on, or AMP-U1 will be destroyed.
1. Defective AMP Board

If TP1 on the AMP board is between +600 to +900 VDC when the
scanner is turned on, then turn the power off, and remove the voltmeter
probes . Power up the scanner and begin sampling with the Diagnostic
program. Check the signal at AMP-TP6. This signal should be similar to
the Channel 1 signal in figure 2. If there is no signal, substitute the AMP
Board, detector, or the connecting cable. Usually a defective AMP Board
has a defective U1, and when these fail, they are usually hot enough to
it.
blister a finger.
WARNING: Do not touch U1 on a defective AMP board to avoid blistering.
~ Stopped: 8 ACQuisitions
:: '-+1 T-l
a: 10 .381Js
@: -IS .1 2IJS
.. . ......
.
+ .
~
t
~
If there is a signal, check the continuity of the coaxial cable with the
yellow strain reliefs. Remem.ber that this cable pas?es through a
connector at the Arm Bulkhead, and a poor connection there could be the
cause of the problem.
8-26 Air Counts

2. No PMT High Voltage

If TP1 is not in the +600 to +900 Volt range, check SBC-TP18 which is a
monitor output from the Bertan PMT-10A reading 1 mV for each Volt of
output. If it looks like the power supply output is correct, check the
coaxial cable with the orange strain relief for continuity. Remember that
this cable passes through a connector at the Arm Bulkhead and may
have a loose connection at this point. If SBC-TP18 is not in the range of
0.600 - 0.900 Volt, check TP20 on the SBC. If TP20 is not between 5 and
8 VDC, substitute the SBC. If Tp20 is between 5 and 8 VDC, substitute
the Bertan PMT-10A power supply and the connecting cable until the
defective part is discovered. .
8.5.3 Decreasing Air Counts

A long term, continuous decrease in the Air Counts unaccompanied by a change in Air Ratio is
a serious problem. A count rate of at least 500,000 Low Channel Air Counts is necessary to
maintain precision of results when scanning thick patients. Air Count values should change by
less than 10 % from the day of installation. The possible causes are:
I. Collimator/ShutterlTube Head Alignment

The Collimator and the Shutter, or the shutter aperture and the Tube Head opening may
be changing their positions relative to one another. The result would be a smaller beam
over time, and therefore, lower counts. Check this alignment as follows:
Mark the position of the large and small collimator apertures on the slide channel
edge. Then lift the Collimator, taking care not to damage the limit switch, and
mark the open and close position of the shutter aperture center. Lift the shutter
slide, taking care not to damage the limit switch, and visually determine if the
apertures above match up with the bottom aperture.
Take another picture with the alignment film holder. The x-ray image should be
round. If the image is even slightly elliptical, the apertures are not aligned.
Remove the Collimator assembly from the Tube Head, and hold it up to a light.
Look through the aperture with the Shutter open and closed and the Collimator in
each position.
II. Lead Filings - Shutter/Collimator Wear

-A rough edge around the shutter aperture may be wearing away the lead on the
" collimator slide above. The lead filings fall through the shutter aperture and gather on
the filter below, causing a reduction in x-rays over time. The collimator and shutter
slides may be rotated back (taking care not to damage the limit switches) in order to
perform an inspection. Any wear should be easily visible on the underside of the
collimator slide. If there is visible wear, the lead dust must be removed from the top of
the' filter. The Collimator assembly must be removed, the filter cleaned, and then the
Collimator assembly reinstalled and realigned.
Air Counts 8-27

III. A Change in Current Control Settings

Use the Static Counter option of the Diagnostic Program to produce x-rays. Select 76
kV and 750 ~A operation. Do not open the Shutter.
Verify that the SSC is properly controlling the current. TP11 of the MAX board should be
approximately 0.75 volts . This voltage is dependent on feedback information from the
power supplies, which makes it difficult to troubleshoot by any means other than SSC
substitution.
Check the current through the X-ray Insert. The absolute value of the voltage at'test points 1
and 5 on the XORB board is proportional to the current through the X-ray Insert. 1 millivolt is
equal to 1 micro-ampere of current. A current setting of 750 IJA should give a reading of 0.750
VDC at test points 1 and 5. If either of these voltages vary from the expected by more than 10
millivolts, the MAX board could be at fault. If TP1 and TP5 are more than 15 millivolts apart,
substitute new high voltage power supplies.
Air Counts
8-28
8~6 Arcing
The X-ray Tube Head Insert is an evacuated glass enclosure. An AC current is applied to the
filament inside the insert. It glows like the filament in a light bulb, and electrons are boiled off
into the evacuated space. A high voltage is applied between the anode and the cathode
causing electrons to rush toward the anode, striking it and creating x-rays. As long as the insert
is properly evacuated, there can be no internal arc. However, no insert can be totally evacuated
and impurities can be ionized creating a lightning like effect; arcing. During the arc the
resistance of the insert is dramatically decreased and a large amount of current flows.
The significant amounts of electromagnetic energy released inside the scanner can cause
problems with the electronics of the scanner system and may result in abnormal operations of
the scanner. An arcing scanner will have one or more of the following symptoms:
• complete lock up of the system requiring rebooting the computer,
• a diagnostic error code message which is undefined or inappropriate,
• receiving a screen that says an error has occurred refer to appendix I in the manual,
• a stripe or artifact in the image of the patient's scan, or
• 15-4 Transverse Motion Failure message.
To specifically locate the source of an arc,it is necessary to find out which high voltage power
supply provides the excessive current. This :may be done by recording the power supply current
. monitors at TP1 and TP5 of the XORB board with a storage oscilloscope. An arc typically
draws 1.5 mA from the power supply for about 1 ms. The trigger voltage should therefore be
set at 1.5V for TP1 and for TP5.
Arcing can also occur inside the high voltage connectors. This will usually result in a plainly
visible black or brown carbon track through the grease on the connector. In any case, once the
high voltage connectors have been removed from the Tube Head and the power supplies, they
should not beTe~connected without first being cleaned and regreased (see procedure
DXSV0002 in chapter 6 appendix).
After cleaning the old grease off of the connectors, they should be carefully inspected for carbon
tracks. Look for these tracks on both the rubber cable connectors and on the phenolic sockets
of the Tube Head. If such tracks are found after cleaning, the following are the options for
returning the scanner to service:
c lf ~arbontracks are found on the rubber cable connectors, they can be removed by excising the
dam~ged section with a sharp blade. Severe tracks can burn quite deep into the rubber, so
care must taken to remove all the damaged rubber. After the carbon tracks have been
removed, additional grease must be used when repacking the connection to fill in the volume of
the removed rubber.
If the above procedure requires too much rubber to be removed, or the carbon track looks very
severe, another option is to replace the high voltage cable.
---- Arcing 8-29

~'Arctracks will be impossible to see on the sockets in the Tube Head. Therefore, if arc tracks
are seen on the rubber cable connectors, the sockets should be sanded with emory cloth as a
precaution. After sanding the socket, remember to flush the socket with cleaning solution to
remove any particles.
If the tracking inside the socket is too severe or the carbon track cannot be removed, another
option is to replace the Tube Head.
IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO REMOVE ANY CARBON TRACKS ON THESE SURFACESl

Carbon tracks that are simply covered by grease or not completely removed will still provide a
path for arcs to follow.
'"
Arcing
8-30
8.7 Mechanical Failures
8.7.1 Transverse Motion Failure

'-urn off the power to the scanner and move the affected parts by hand: Feel the motion for
spots where the carriages are more difficult to move. Listen for unusual noises.
High Voltage Cable Routing

One of the most common problems is a failure of the Source and Detector to reach the rear
Limit Switch due to the Tube Head running into its own high voltage cables. These cables must
have a hump formed at the Rear Longitudinal Carriage that allows the lower portion of the Tube
Head to pass under the cables.
The High Voltage Cables can also impede transverse motion toward the front Limit Switch. This
is caused when the cables have been tied down without enough play for the Tube Head and
Detector to move all the way forward. These problems should be investigated by manually
tripping both Limit Switches while inspecting for cable conflicts, binding, or tension problems.
Gear And Pulley Positioning

Check all appropriate gears and pulleys. Verify that the set screws are tightened and the gears
and pulleys are not out of position.
Limit Switch Positioning

If the transverse motion seems to be acceptable, but the number of steps in the Quality
Assurance Test is failing, check the position of the Limit Switches.
On Total Body scans; a'limit switch out of position could allow the Source/Detector Carriages to
hit the frame or panels'b efore the Limit Switch is actuated.
Wiring
In rare instances, the wires from the Shutter Solenoid and/or Fans can snag on the bolts that
protrude through the frame on the foot end of the scanner. This is solved by properly tying
down these wires.
Transverse Motor
Check the Transverse Motor for a broken wire in one of the internal coils, or a bad electrical
connection to its Centent Motor Controller.
Transverse Centent
The Centent Motor Controller, if defective, will cause transverse motion problems. Sometimes
the controller works well enough to acquire some scans, but it will not provide enough torque to
complete every fast scan. The CURRENT SET voltage at terminal 11 on a properly operating
controller should be 14 to 16 VDC (transverse motor wired in parallel).
Mechanical Failures 8-31

Transverse Belt
The Transverse Belt should not be excessively tightened or this will cause excessive binding in
the transverse mechanism. It should be possible to deflect the belt by 4 cm when it is properly
tightened. Sometimes the spare belt material near the clamp on the Tube Head Carriage
comes into contact with the forward gear and prevents the scanner from going all the way to
Home position.
Drive Wheels
The wheels that support the Tube Head and Detector Carriages must be adjusted so that they
come into perfect contact with the Transverse Rails. These wheel are best inspected with the
table top, front panel and arm covers off so one can sight down the extrusions. However, it is
possible to test the wheels by preventing any wheel from turning and seeing if the carriage will
still move. By preventing any wheel from turning, you should be able to tell that it slides along
the extrusion while the others roll. This indicates that the wheel has not been excessively
tightened down. This is least likely to be the source of transverse motion problems, as it is
unlikely that the adjustment of the wheels would have become any tighter over time. They .
would be more likely to loosen over time and fail alignment tests (see Air Matrix Test, section
5.1). Adjustments can be made by loosening and rotating the eccentric bearings of any of the
lower wheels.
8.7.2 Longitudinal Motion Failures

Turn off the power to the scanner and move the affected parts by hand. Feel the motion for
spots where the arm is more difficult to move. Listen for unusual noises. NOTE: When moving
the arm longitudinally, only push on the arm column. Pushing on the forward parts of the arm
can ruin Tube Head/Detector alignment. .
Cable Track
The major impedimenttolongitudinal motion is the plastic Cable Track that runs through the
trough at the rear of the scanner.
This track is attached at two points: at the Rear Longitudinal Carriage and to the scanner frame
(low, rear and center) each spot by 4 bolts. Also, adequate slack must be left in the cables
inside the Cable Track or they will stop the arm from moving fully to the foot end.
Should the Cable Track detach from the scanner frame, it will slide freely in the trough and will
eventually cause trouble. This can allow the Cable Track to get in between the Rear
Longitudinal Carriage and the scanner frame on the foot end preventing the tripping of the limit
switch.
Tube Head Cable Routing

Problems at the head end of the scanner can be caused by a limit switch being out of position
(thus the arm, runs into the frame before the Limit Switch) or because the High Voltage Cables
are tied down 'Incorrectly where they snake around from the Rear Longitudinal Carriage to the
panel under the Tube Head (High Voltage Cable Trough). If the cables are tied down too far
toward the head end (at the point where the three tie downs are), they can run into the
Longitudinal Motor Assembly and hold the arm away from the head end Limit Switch.
8-32 Mechanical Failures

Slip Clutch
A slip clutch is part of the longitudinal motion system to limit torque. This is a feature to protect
the patient should he/she pinch an arm or leg between the back side of the scanner and the
Arm Column. If the Slip Clutch is set too loose, it will fail to move the belt and will just "slip" as
the motor turns. This may produce the following symptoms:
• failure of Quality Assurance 'scan Mechanics test
• compressed image in limited areas of the image
• a Diagnostic Failure #23-3
Gear and Pulley Positioning

Check all appropriate gears and pulleys. Verify that the set screws are tightened and the gears
and pulleys are not out of position.
Limit Switch Positioning

If the longitudinal motion seems to be acceptable, but the number of steps in the Quality
Assurance Test is failing, check the position of the Limit Switches.
On Total Body scans, a limit switch out of position could allow the Source/Detector Carriages to
hit the frame or panels of the scanner before the Limit Switch.
If the mechanical stop is reached before the Limit Switch is actuated, check carefully to see
which part of the Arm Assembly is in contact with the Table Assembly. The front part of the
Lower Transverse Extrusion is clamped to the Longitudinal Drive Cable at the front of the
scanner. If the Lower Transverse Extrusion is not clamped in such a way that it forms a 90
degree angle with the length ofthe table, the rollers at the front end of the Lower Transverse
Extrusion may strike the 'end of the scan table before the Limit Switch is actuated.
Longitudinal Motor,
Check the motor,for a broken wire in one of the internal coils, or a bad electrical connection to
the Centent 'Motor Controller.
Longitudinal Centent
The longitudinal Centent Motor Controller may be the cause of a failure. The current set voltage
should be roughly 9-11 volts at terminal 11 on a properly operating controller. If this voltage is
not correct, replace the Centent Controller.
Longitudinal Belt
The Longitudinal Belt should not be tightened too much or this will cause the brackets holding
the gears to deform at either end of the scanner. When the belt is properly tightened, it should
be possible to deflect the upper and lower sides of the belt so that they touch within 8 cm of the
gears at either end.
'--
Mechanical Failures 8-33
Drive Wheels
The rollers in front and the wheels in back that support the Arm must be adjusted so that they
come into perfect contact with the Longitudinal Rails. Test them by preventing any wheel from
turning and see if the carriage will still move. By preventing any wheel from turning, it should be
possible to slide the carriage along the rail with one wheel dragging while the others roll. This
indicates that the wheel has not been excessively tightened down. Adjustments can be made
by loosening and rotating the eccentric bearings of any of the lower wheels.
8.7.3 Limit Switch Tripped During Scan

If a Limit Switch is tripped during an install test, verify the Limit Switches' location with the Tools
Diskette. If this problem occurs any time after install, see the problem description below.
If the transverse mechanics of the scanner become imprecise, it may cause a Limit Switch to be
tripped during a scan. This will usually only happen during a total body scan or during an Air
Matrix test since both of these scans involve full-width scanning. Once the switch is closed, the
motors stop, the End-of-Exposure Alarm sounds, the amber SHUTfER OPEN lamp turns off
and after a few seconds a Diagnostic Failure #15-4 appears on the screen.
During full-width scanning, the Detector Carriage comes very close to the Limit Switches, so any
imprecision will cause a Limit Switch to be tripped and the scan will be aborted with a Diagnostic
Failure message for Transverse Motion Failure.
A cause of this problem is a loosening of the first drive Reduction Belt which connects the
Transverse Motor to the first Reduction Pulley. This loosening causes the belt to "walk" on the
pulleys causing enough imprecision inthe motion to trip a switch. To tighten the belt, first
remove the Pulley Shroud and loosen all four nuts that h"old the motor in place. Then, while
holding the motor such that the belt is pulled taught, tighten the nuts to secure the motor in
place. Replace the shroud and test the scanner (an Air Matrix test works well).
If the Tube Head cables come into contact with the cable bundle entering the cable track, it may
be impossible for the scanner to complete all of the necessary transverse steps away from the
operator. Consequently, on each scan line the detector will move closer to the front transverse
limit switch, and the switch may be eventually closed. Form the cable bundle exiting from the
cable track into an arch such that the Tube Head cables will move under the arch rather than
running into the bundle. This arch must not be too high. If it is, there will not be sufficient slack
in the Tube Head cable bundle to allow the Tube Head to move to the front transverse limit
switch. Also, if the arch is too small, it may cause too much slack when the Tube Head is at the
forward side of the table. This causes the Tube Head cable bundle to rub against the inside of
the front panel causing a scraping noise to be heard. If the above does not solve the problem
then check the other mechanical components. Electrical components that could cause such a
failure are the Centent Motor Controller, the Transverse Motor, the OINK board or the SBC
board.
8-34 Mechanical Failures

8.8 Imaging Problems
White, Blue, or Grey in the first or second scan line:

The software is not perfect in its ability to determine the correct grey level of the entire scan
based on the first line of data. Sometimes the grey levels will be set incorrectly during
acquisition. During analysis the grey level is easily adjusted to give a good image, and the
results are not affected by this imaging problem. This problem is most often found on very thin
patients. Adding extra tissue equivalent material (rice bag or saline solution) to a very thin
patient may be all that is necessary to cure the symptom.
Femur Scan Problems

Most image discontinuity problems occur in femur images performed at 3 mA on thin or
osteoporotic subjects. These lines usually occur in the trochanter area where the x-ray beam is
least attenuated by tissue.
These lines are caused by Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS) trying to adjust the input signal
which is at an excessively high count rate. However, the AGS is not at fault, and the correct
action is for the customer to attenuate the x-ray beam. For an x-ray beam generated at 3 mA
the tissue areas need to be the equivalent of 12 cm. If the patient does not have 12 cm of
tissue, the operator must make up the difference with rice. Lunar normally recommends placing
a rice bag (on its side to create 12 cm of rice in the x-ray beam) along the side of the patient's
thigh for thin or osteoporotic patients:
AP-Spine Image Problems: Probable causes

• the shutter closes (causes blue lines, the shutter open lamp to go out, and the End of
Exposure Alarm to sound).
• increase or reduction of high voltage to the detector (causes white and blue speckles).
• lossef the signal from the detector (this causes white and blue speckles)
• 10sseLcurrent to the x-ray insert filament (causes blue lines, the orange lamp to go out,
and the End of Exposure Alarm to sound).
• bad x-ray relay contacts (providing power to tube head power supplies)
• reduction in AC Line voltage
• loss of proper high voltage on the x-ray tube
• faulty operation of the AGS system (white lines are short and found only where scan
lines move from air into tissue).
• arcing (may cause either white or blue points or lines)
Imaging Problems 8-35

Example of Imaging problems

It is possible to duplicate AGS imaging problems in the following manner: Start a fast AP-Spine
scan of the aluminum phantom in 15 cm of water at 750~ . After a few lines remove the
phantom and water from the table top. The image will show all white lines for a few lines, and
then some blue lines. When the phantom and the water are inserted back into position, the
lines turn back to white with no image of the phantom . When the scan is analyzed, blue lines
are found in the area where the phantom had been removed, but the image is correct both
before and after. These symptoms are caused by rollover in the AGS when insufficient material
is in the x-ray beam.
Offset Image in the Middle of a Scan

Although image offset from one line to the next is usually due to patient movement, it may also
be due to hesitation of the motor during the transverse motion. This would cause the image to
be offset thereafter. When using the Auto Width feature, the transverse scan range should be
offset with the image. The problem is usually reproduced more readily by scanning in the fast
mode. If the scanner has problems with hesitations or improper transverse motion, see
Transverse Motion Failures.
AGS Resolution Problem

White lines in 3 mA scans are often caused by AGS problems. Service action is to 1) analyze
the condition of the detector and replace it if necessary, or 2) perform the AGS test and
adjustment found in section 6.2. The adjustment is accomplished by adjusting the
potentiometer nearest to AGSDCA-T 4 until the low channel counts produced with an 150 ~ x-
ray beam are stable to ±5000 counts and are greater than the high channel counts. When the
aluminum wedge is inserted into the beam , both counts should decrease.
In the case the last test fails, perhaps the voltage at AGSDCA-T4 needs to be increased 10 or
20 mV. Check the rollover at AGS-T12 with an oscilloscope and an x-ray beam at 150 ~ to
verify that there ·is no roll,;.over or roll-under when this voltage is increased. If stability can not be
maintained in air at 150 ~ and in 5-18 cm of water at 3 mA then it will be necessary to replace
some parts to determine which item is causing the instability. The following items can cause
this stability problem : detector, AGS board, both DCA boards, and the AMP-03 board.
Trouble-shooting AGS Resolution Problems

If the problem occurs often enough, use an oscilloscope to monitor the bipolar AM P-03 signal at
the input (TP4), and the output (TP19) of the AGS board. If the amplitude at TP19 changes
suddenly while the amplitude at TP4 remains constant, and at the same time a white line
appears in the scan image, the problem is due to faulty gain stabilization. The cause is either
the AGS or AGSDCA boards.
If the signal changes suddenly at AGS-TP4, the cause must be the circuitry that controls the
high voltage to the Scintillation Detector, the Scintillation Detector itself, the circuitry on the
AMP-03, or the coaxial cables carrying the signals up the Scanner Arm . Measure the signal at
AGS-TP4, while taking voltage measurements at AMP-TP1 (the high voltage to the Scintillation
Detector) and SSC-TP20 (the control voltage from the SSC to the Bertan PMT-10A).
8-36 Imaging Problems

If the AMP-TP1 voltage changes at the same time the AGS-TP4 amplitude changes, but the
SBC-TP20 signal does not change, then the Bertan PMT-10A power supply or the coaxial cable
from the power supply to the AMP-03 must be faulty.
If the SBC-TP20 voltage changes at the same time the AGS-TP4 amplitude changes (AMP-TP1
will also change), replace the SBC.
Shutter Failures
Certain problems can cause the shutter to close intermittently completely attenuating the x-rays.
The shutter-open lamp should turn off and the end of exposure alarm will sound. A IIShutter
ll
Failure error message should appear on the monitor screen. Scanning should cease at this
moment, but if it does continue, blue lines should be expected in the image. Always ask the
operator if a "pingll sound (the end of exposure alarm) is heard, and whether the Shutter Open
or X-Ray On lamp turns off. In the case of a shutter problem, the Shutter Open' light will turn off.
The cause of these shutter failures could be:

• a faulty shutter solenoid,
• a broken wire in the shutter/collimator/fan cable assembly, or
• a broken wire or bad connection in the shutter lamp circuit.
Broken Signal Cable

The coaxial cables which carry the voltage to the detector and return the signal from the
amplifier are part of the upper and lower cable bundle assemblies. Any break or significant
pinch of the cable can cause reduction in counts in either or both channels. This could result in
either white or blue lines.
Loss of tube head current

The tube head control cable contains the wires which provide power to the filament transformer.
If the wire tothe :trahsformer center tap breaks, the x-rays will stop, the orange lamp will go off,
and the end-of-exposure alarm will sound. If either of the other two wires break, the MAX board
fuse will blow. Always ask the operator if a "pingll sound (the end of exposure alarm) is heard,
and whether the Shutter Open or X-Ray On lamp turns off. In the case of a tube head current
problem, the X-Ray On light will turn off.
X-Ray Relay Failure

The x-ray relay is the easiest item to inspect, because the transparent plastic cover allows you
to visibly inspect the contacts without disassembly.
Unstable AC Line
If the customer's AC line conditions are unstable, voltages below 95 VAC will begin to drop the
high voltage on the x-ray tube. The counts will drop significantly with only a change of a few kV.
However, this normally causes black or dark grey lines in the scan image.
Imaging Problems 8-37

Arcing
If the tube head is arcing, the arcs will be more likely to occur at the higher current settings.
-
Arcing generally also causes other strange symptoms such as:
• Scanner stops in the middle of a patient or QA scan with no error message or with
Diagnostic failure 15-4 or 31-6 message.
• Scanner stops during a QA scan with the error message "Print Buffer Error"
• The QA scan fails intermittently because the "Mean value deviates from expected" or
because there is "Excessive variation in standard values"
• The scanner periodically leaves the message on the screen "Starting X-rays Please
Wait" for a longer than normal period of time (more than 10 seconds)
If you see arcing symptoms, try the following service action:
1. View the Quality Assurance History (see section 8.15). In particular note the trend in
BM Values as discussed in the Failing QA's section of this chapter.
If there is evidence of failures in the mean 8M value:
2. Repack the high voltage connections as described in procedure HVC-1 in Chapter 6

appendix 6.G. Note if an arc track is visible in the insulation compound.
3. Replacement of the tube head if no arc tracks are discovered, or if the repacking of the
connectors does not eliminate all arcing symptoms.
Summary
Except for the x-ray relay, the cause of the problem will be difficult to 'find. Try to obtain some
additional information. If the customer is hearing the end-of-exposure alarm, or seeing the
yellow x-rayon lamp flickering, you can deduce the tube head control cable is bad. Likewise, it
is possible to decide on the shutter/collimator/fan cable. In the case of no alarm or lamp
_indications, orin the case where large deviations occur in the peak, the upper and lower cable
bundles should be replaced, as problems with the coaxial cable will be too expensive to
troubleshoot.
8-38 Imaging Problems

8.9 Femur Scan Problems

If the automatic width feature is not working properly, or unreasonable results are being
obtained, the patient may have unusually low bone mass, they may not have adequate tissue
around the femur or the scan may be goir1g out of the patient and into air.
Check the size of the trochanter, neck and Ward's areas and verify that the sizes are
reasonable. The software may not have correctly selected the baseline causing the bone edges
to be improperly fixed. This false baseline could be due to one or more of the following
problems:
• There are not enough lines below the pelvis and above the trochanter (>25 lines) for an
adequate baseline to be established. The Operator's manual recommends starting the
scan 5.1 cm below the trochanter, and verifying that there are 15-20 lines before the
ischium appears in the image.
• If the x-ray beam passes into air during the femur scan, the software will incorrectly set
the baseline. White lines on the edge of the image, or unreasonable bone areas are
indications that the beam has passed into air. If this happens, the patient must be
rescanned with a soft tissue equivalent material (such as bages of uncooked rice) placed
against their hip.
• New systems will be delivered with LUNAR Tissue Bags (pIn 0784). These bags are to
be used as described above. Extra bags may be ordered through the L.UNAR Customer
Service Department. .
• Be sure the customer places the ROI box near the pelvis end of the neck with nearly
equal amounts of soft tissue in each end of the box and none of the ischium or
trochanter. The software moves the box down the neck towards the trochanter during
the search for the Ward's Triangle area.
To insure proper baselines, Lunar recommends that tissue equivalent material (as mentioned
above) be placed along side of and on top of the hips of very thin or osteoporotic patients.
In the case of a patient having unusually low bone mass, the program may have difficulty in
locating bone edges as it scans. In this case the only option is to slow down to Slow or even
Detail mode, and the automatic width option may have to be changed to manual if the bone
edges are still not tracked properly.
If the white lines that occur in the image when the beam passes into air continue to be white
when the beam passes back into the patient's body, the Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS) may
not be properly adjusted. There is a test for proper AGS operation (see ASG Calibration Test).
If manual analysis is used, the ROI boxes must be inside bone image only to obtain a correct
BMD . Include no soft tissue points in manual ROI's.
Femur Scan Problems 8-39

Method of Determining Ward's Triangle

Ward's Trian!~le region is delineated by the square placed on the image with sides roughly equal
to one half of the width of the femoral neck (the actual anatomical region is triangular in shape,
thus Ward's Triangle. The Lunar software places the small square box around what it
determines to be that region). This square is placed along the centerline of the neck in an area
where we expect the minimum density. The bone mineral density is then calculated for the
square. Then the square is moved again slightly and the BMD is recalculated. This
repositioning and calculating continues until the position of lowest density is found. This lowest
density square is selected as the Ward's Triangle region.
8-40 Femur Scan Problems

'--' 8.10 Failing Air Matrix Results

The ~;x cat~gor;es (.Chi Squared, Skew and Kurtosis for each of the Low and High Channels) of
the Air Matrix scan In the Overall Results (see section 5.1) should all pass, but it failure is
acceptable if the value is close to the software limits. The service limits are as follows:
Category Limit
Chi Squared 45
Skew ±.O7
Kurtosis ±.O7
NOTE: All six categories MUST PASS during testing for new installations!
Chi Squared values ~45 that fail should be considered in the light that the Air Matrix test is a
$tatistical evaluation, and therefore, there is a statistical chance that a properly functioning
scanner could fail the Air Matrix test. Skew -and Kurtosis values will pass between -0.07 and
0.07. Anything outside of these limits is failing. These limits are valid only for scans made with
.1/4" (6 mm) of aluminum in the beam~ Limits for scans made with more or less aluminum have
not been determined. .
If the failing Air Matrix hasvaluesthat are close to passing (as described above), check the
Deviation Image (see below).Jf that looks good, run another Air Matrix (perhaps a shortened
test depending on 'time limits). The second test should pass. If not, a problem exists in the
scanner.
A misadjusted AGS DCA could be the cause of a failing Air Matrix. To determine if this is the
cause before parts SUbstitution is used to solve the problem, refer to the AGS Adjustment
Procedure in Section 6.2. NOTE: This test and adjustment procedure will not be of use.if the
PMT Detector is defective. Verify that the Detector is good by examining QA History trends in
%Spillover, Air Ratio and Air Counts (see Section 8.14).
Otherwise, the following parts should be substituted until passing Air Matrix results can be
obtained:
• ',' Scintillation Detector
'. Automatic Gain Stabilizer Board (AGS)
• AGS DCA
• DPX DCA
Failing Air Matrix Results 8-41

Deviation I.r rlage

The Deviation Image is a graphic illustration of the counts recorded during the Air Matrix scan.
A good image has a black field with evenly distributed grey dots and perhaps a few randomly
distributed dots of various colors (green or blue usually).
A poor Deviation Image will have colored lines, streaks or spots (indicating counts higher or
lower than expected). Colored lines or streaks going longitudinally in the image indicate an
alignment problem. Recheck the alignment of the scanner including the levelness of the
scanner. Also, check the scanner frame for any bending that may have occurred at the site or
during shipment.
Colored lines or streaks going transversely across the image indicate a problem with the AGS,
the AGS DCA or the DPX DCA (also see section 6.2). Again, replace parts until a passing Air
Matrix is obtained.
/' '
Failing Air Matrix Results

8-42
8.11 Indicator Failures
X-ray On LED Blinking

The amber X-RAY ON LED should glow steadily once it is illuminated, until the x-rays are
turned off. If the X-RAY ON LED blinks while the shutter is open for a patient scan, the End of
Exposure Alarm should sound.
The amber LED is controlled by a comparator on the OINK Board. This LED illuminates when
approximately 40~A (or greater) of current is passing through the X-ray Insert. On Spellman
system scanners the amber light may appear to fade out slowly when x-rays are ramped down.
This due to the Spellman power supplies bleeding off current and is not a problem.
If the voltage ramping fails, the High Voltage Power Supplies must be shut completely off before
a second ramping attempt is made. If the amber X-RAY ON LED turns on momentarily, then
turns off for a few seconds before coming on steadily, the system is having difficulty ramping the
high voltage. One of the High Voltage Power Supplies may be defective.
The SBC does not monitor the Insert current once the proper level has been reached.
Therefore, if the current to the Insert is interrupted, the SBCwili not recognize the problem and
will not alert the computer, or terminate the exposure.
If the X-RAY ON LED blinks once the x-ray high voltage has been set, there must be a problem
in one of the following areas:
• Tube Head Control Cable-The most likely cause of an intermittent problem in this
circuit is a broken wire in theTube Head Control Cable. The Red wire is most likely the
broken one, as a broken blue or black wire should blow the MAX Board Fuse. Turn the
scanner off ,and test for continuity between MAX Board test points TP4, TP5, and TP13.
• MAX "Board-The MAX Board may be operating intermittently. Verify that the wave
formson'T P4, and TP5 match the wave forms on page 9.17 and 9.18. Substitute a
replacement MAX Board.
• OINK Board-Noise may be present on the line extending from pin 3 of U5 to the SBC
board. This noise would cause the bell to ring after every scan line during Total Body
scans at 1500A current modes. Adding a 0.1 OF capacitor between pins 1 and 3 of U5
on the OINK Board should attenuate this noise (see section 7, ECO #1393).
Shutter Open LED Blinking

The amber Shutter Open LED is controlled by the Limit Switch on the Shutter/Collimator
Assembly. If the Limit Switch is defective or improperly adjusted, the Shutter Open LED may be
switched on and off. This will usually be accompanied by the sound of the End of Exposure
Alarm if an exposure is underway.
If the Shutter is actually opening and closing intermittently and uncontrollably, the problem is
either on the OINK, or a broken wire between the OINK and the Shutter/Collimator Assembly.
Remove connector J11 from the OINK Board and measure the resistance between pin 5 and
pin 6. This will be a measurement of the resistance of the Shutter Solenoid and the cable
Indicator Failures 8-43

through the Cable Track. If the problem occurs on every scan, run a scan while making this
continuity check. If the cable and solenoid seem to be working properly, substitute a new OINK
Board.
Shut1ter Not Operating

If the Shutter Solenoid will not open, the problem may be caused by one of the following:
• The Shutter Open LED-If the Shutter Open LED fails, a properly operating OINK board
will prevent operation of the Shutter Solenoid. Check the LED for continuity, replace it,
or substitute a working amber LED temporarily.
• Solenoid Cable-Remove J11 from the OINK Board and check continuity between pin 5
and 6 (see Shutter Open LED Blinking above).
• OINK Board-Replace the OINK Board.
End of Exposure Alarm During Scan

If the sharp "Ping" sound of the End of Exposure Alarm is heard during a scan, look at the
computer display to see if a Diagnostic Failure Code is being reported. If so, see section 8.1.
If no Diagnostic Failure Code is reported, the scanner may still be in motion continuing with the
scan. Abort the scan and remove the patient from the table. In any case, note the status of the
SHUn'ER OPEN light and the X-RAY ON light.
• Both the SHUTTER OPEN light and the X-RAY ON light are on and steady. This would
indicate a faulty OINK board. Replace it.
• The SHUTTER OPEN Iightis' off. This could indicate the following:
.. The LED becomes defective during the ,scan and since the shutter solenoid and this
light are wired in series, the Shutter closed and the Alarm sounded .
•, The cable lothe amber Shutter Open light broke during the scan with the same
result as above.
• The shutter solenoid failed and the Shutter closed followed by the Alarm sounding.
• The OINK is faulty.
• The SSC is faulty.
• The X-RAY ON light is off. This could indicate the following:
• X-ray production has halted. This turns off the Xray On light and sounds the Alarm.
8-44 Indicator Failures

OPX-/Q Service Manual Rev. E (3/98)
8.12 Communications Failures

Should the scanner and computer lose communications with each other, there are a number of
things to check:
Check the 110 cable connections at the serial port on the back of the computer and at the SSC.
Se sure both connections are tight and that the thumb screws are used to hold the connectors
firmly together. Also, inspect the 25 pin connector on the SSC. This connector is very fragile
and may have been damaged. Se very careful when connecting the I/O cable to the SSC.
If the ports are properly configured and communication still fails, then the probable causes are:
• A faulty 1/0 cable.
• A faulty SSC.
• A faulty system board async (serial) port.
Replacement of these parts is the best troubleshooting method. The system board async port is
a part of the computer's system board.
Another possibility is that the SSC has lost its firmware or the firmware has become corrupted.
This can be remedied by downloading the program again. See Monitor Directory, section 5.1,
for instructions.
Communications Failures 8-45

8-46 Communications Failures

8.13 Start Up Software

The following printouts are CONFIG.SYS, AUTOEXEC.BAT and MSDOS.SYS files created by
the DPX-IQ software at install. Each system may be slightly different dependant on any other
software installed on it. The first CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT are created for DOS
based installations while the second of each are created for a Windows '95 installation. The last
file, MSDOS.SYS, is for the Windows '95 installation. The DOS installation does not require a
MSDOS.SYS file.
DOS Installation
CONFIG.SYS
rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West Beltline Hwy, Madison, WI 53713. (608) 274-2663
rem File: config.sys DOS version: 6.20
files = 50
buffers = 45
stacks = 0,0
dos = high,umb
shell = C:\command.com C:\ IP le:900
device = C:\dos\himem.sys
device = C:\dos\emm386.exe 64 ram
AUTOEXEC.BAT
PATH=C:\;C:\DOS
@rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West 8eltline Hwy, Madison, WI 53713. (608) 274-2663
@rem File: autoexec.bat . DOS version: 6.20
@echo off
break off
prompt $p$g
C:\dos\smartdrv.exe 512
: - (check disk integrity and)
cis
echo RUNNING CHKDSK ON DRIVES
for %%f in (C:) do if EXIST %%f\nul chkdsk %%f IF
: - (Create a temporary timestamp file for todays date)
echo. I date> C:\defrag.tmp
:-- (Check to see if the official timestamp file exists)
if not exist C:\defrag.dat goto CheckDate
: - (A timestamp file exists, check if this is a new day by comparing files)
fc C:\defrag.tmp C:\defrag.dat I find "no differences encountered" > \nul
Start Up Software 8-4'7

if not errorlevel 1 goto DefragDone

:CheckDate
:-- (If this is a Monday, then a full defrag will be performed)
find "Mon" C:\dE~frag.tmp > \nul
if errorlevel 1 goto FastDefrag
defrag c: If
goto :CheckDefragStatus
:FastDefrag
defrag c: lu
:CheckDefragStatus
:-- (If defrag completed successfully, then update the timestamp)
if errorlevel1 goto DefragDone
copy/y C:\defrag.tmp C:\defrag.dat > \nul
:DefragDone
:-- (Remove the temporary timestamp file)
del C:\defrag.tmp
if exist c:\windows\win.com goto skip_fastopen
if exist c:\wfw\win.com goto skip_fastopen
loadhigh C:\dos\fastopen.exe c:=1 00
:skip_fastopen
loadhigh C:\dos\doskey
C:
cd \
Windows '95 Installation
CONFIG.SYS
rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West Beltline Hwy, Madison, WI' 53713. (608) 274-2663
rem File: config.sys DOS version: 7.0
switches = If
[menu]
menuitem=dos;Start MS-DOS
menuitem=win,Start Windows '95
menuitem=dpx,Start Lunar DPX
menudefault=dpx,8
[common]
files = 50
buffers = 45
device=C:\windows\himem.sys Itestmem:off
dos=high,umb
she!i=C:\windows\command.com Ip
[dos]
device=C:\windows\emm386.exe ram highscan noems
8-48 Start Up Software

device=C:\cdrom\necjde.sys /d:mscd001
[dpx]
[win]
AUTOEXEC.BAT
PATH=C:\;C:\WINDOWS;C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND;C:\LUNAR
@rem LUNAR Corporation, 313 West Beltline Hwy, Madison, WI 53713. (608) 274-2663
@rem File: autoexec.bat DOS version: 7.0
@echo off
break off
prompt $p$g
goto %config%
:dpx
:dos
Ih C:\windows\smartdrv 512
Ih C:\mouse\mouse.exe /0
Ih C:\windows\command\doskey
if %config%==dos goto end
C:
cd \LUNAR
call dpx
goto end
:win
win
:end
echo.
C: .
cd \
MSDOS.SYS
[Paths]
WinDir=C:\WINDOWS
Win BootDir=C:\WI N DOWS
HostWinBootDrv=C
[Options]
Logo=O
BootGUI=O
'---- .
Start Up Software 8-49

BootMulti=O
I
;The following lines are required for compatibility with other programs.
;Do not remove them (MSDOS.SYS needs to be >1024 bytes).
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxa
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxb
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxc
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxd
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxe
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxf
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxg
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxh
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxx:xxxxx:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxi
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxj
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxk
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxXxxxxxxxxxxxx I
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxm
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxn
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx 0
;xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxp
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxq
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxr
;xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxs
8-50 Start Up Software

~.
8.14 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends

DPX-IQ software includes the capability to view, print or graph data contained in the Quality
Assurance database (C:\LUNAR\ANC\DPXS.DBF). View and print display selected results of
many of the tests run during the Daily Quality Assurance in tabular form . The graph feature will
graph the results of only one of the Quality Assurance parameters. All features allow for the
user to select the time period to be examined.
To use these features press F4 at the Main Menu to select Database Utilities and then press F2
to select QA History.
The Quality Assurance History screen displays three columns of data results that are stored in
the database. The 11 highlighted categories are selected by default. Using thE~ arrow keys and
F4, F5 and F6 keys, the various categories can be selected or deselected depending on what
needs to be examined. Since only one category can be graphed at a time, simply move the
highlight to the item to be graphed and press F3.
Pressing F1, F2 or F3 selects View, Print or Graph and the next option is to enter the starting
and ending dates for the time period to be examined. Once that is done to view the data, press
[Esc] to start the printout or generate the graph.
When viewing the 11 default categories, or more, all the information will not fit on the screen.
Use the arrow keys to view the data off the screen to the right. All 11 default categories will fit
on one printed page. Printing more data will simply place the overflow on a separate page. In
graphing, it is possible to use the arrow, PgUp and PgDn keys to highlight a particular date's
QA. Note that the point on thegraphfor the highlighted date is also highlighted. The exact
value of the category is also displayed by the date.
What to Look forintheQAHistory

All categories should remain steady over time. Check the PASSED column for D's, meaning a
failed QA. If a failingQA is found, try to determine the cause, including operator error (see
section 8.2).
LUNAR tries to analyze every system's QA History database file (DPXS.DBF) in order to
discover systems in need of service. This database file is converted to a Lotus '1-2-3
spreadsheet so that the data can be easily analyzed. LUNAR has determined, through these
analyses, acceptable limits for the variability observed for three important factors: Low Channel
Air Counts, Air Ratio and % Spillover.
The acceptable limit of change for Low Channel Air Counts can be expressed three ways: 1) no
more than 1% change/month, 2) no more than 100/0 change from the value at install or 3) no
change greater than 300 counts/QA.
The limits for Air Ratio are: 1) no change greater than 0,002/month, 2) no more than 0.02
change from the value at install or 3) no more than 0.0001 change/QA.
The limits for % Spillover are: 1) no change greater than 0.05/month or 2) no more than 0.002
change/QA.
Viewing Quality Assurance Trends 8-51

The Peak setting normally drifts up or down. A long term upward trend is expected as the
Detector ages, but a downward trend is not unusual. The ideal operating peak is 500 units ±25.
However, Peaks between 400 and 600 units are acceptable. If the Peak is found to be further
from 500 than ±1 00 units, it should be adjusted (see section 6.1) until the Peak is 500 units
again (±25).
NOTE: The changes per month and per QA must be consistent over a three month
period or 63 QA's to be considered valid. Changes from time of install are invalid
if major parts were replaced since install, such as the Tube Head or PMT.
Changes should be compared to values after these replacements.
If any sudden jumps are noticed in the values of any of the categories, determine first if these
are due to service work such as a Tube Head replacement. If service work causes a shift in the
QA values, then compare present values to those obtained only after the service.
For complete analysis of the QA History database, Lunar suggests periodically sending a copy
of the DPXS.DBF file to the Lunar Customer Service Department.
8-52 Viewing Quality Assurance Trends

Appendix B.A
AGS Board Troubleshooting Appendix B.A

/'
',.

Appendix 8.A
B.A Automatic Gain Stabilizing System

The Automatic Gain Stabilizer system consists of two circuit boards, the AGS and the AGSDCA.
The AGS is connected between the AMP-03 and the DPX DCA, and all signals must pass
through this system before being discriminated by the DPX DCA. The AGS1s sole function is to
stabilize the amplitude of the bipolar pulse generated by the AMP. Only the 70KeV peak is
sensed during gain correction by the AGSDCA. The AGSDGA set up to bracket the 70KeV
peak. When the peak shifts low and falls in the window between 2.1 0 VDC and 2.30 VDC the
AGSDCA puts out a pulse telling the AGS to IIAMPLlFY. 11When the peak shifts high and falls in
the window between 2.50 VDC and 2.70VDC the AGSDCA puts out a pulse telling the AGS to
IIATIENUATE.II The system maintains an optimal 70KeV peak position around 2.40VDC. The
AGS has a gain correction range of 0.80 to 1.30, so the AGS can track and stabilize a signal as
long as peak does not shift below about 1.75V or above about 3.12V.
What to look for

• AMPLIFY and ATIENUATE LED1s should both illuminate equally. Should only one
Illockll on, it probably indicates a faulty or misadjusted AGSDCA.
• Complete scan lines of white may indicate a faulty AGS. A faulty AGS may stabilize at
the wrong level when crossing an interface where there is a large change in density.
(see section 6.2)
AGS Board
8A-2 AGS Board

Appendix 8.B
AMP Board Troubleshooting
AMP Board Troubleshooting Appendix 8.B

Appendix 8. B
8.B The AMP Board

This board is used to amplify the signal from the detector, shape the signal into a stable bipolar
pulse, and drive the pulse down a 5.1 meter 50 ohm coaxial cable.
It is located next to the Detector in a metal case in the arm assembly of the OPX-IQ.
What to look for

• Do not disconnect anything from the AMP while the scanner is on. DOing so will destroy
U1 on the AMP.
• Check to see that the Molex connector (±12VDC) is firmly in place.
• Do not force the Lemo's on or off with a screwdriver because this will loosen the Lemo
sockets on the board.
• The arm cover is very close to the housing on top, so be sure that they are not touching
to avoid scraping during motor motion.
• TP's 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 should have no DC offset voltage.
Electrical Tests
TP1 HIGH VOLTAGE to Detector.
TP2 INPUT SIGNAL
TP6 BIPOLAR AMP OUTPUT (peak amplitude of approximately 2.4V)
TP7 +12Vdc
TP8 -12Vdc
TP9 GND
-A-M-P-B-oa-r-d---------------------------8~8~-1'
88-2 AMP Board

Appendix 8. C
DCA Board Troubleshooting
DCA Board Troubleshooting Appendix 8.C

Appendix B.C
',.
DCA Board
8C-2
B.IC The [)ual Channel Analyzer (DCA)

Single Photon Transmission and Dual Photon Absorptiometry methods of BMC measurement
are employed in the scanner.
, In addition to a charge sensitive pre-amp/amplifier, a Dual Channel Analyzer (DCA) is used.

The DCA acts as dual channel window comparator to detect and discriminate between the low
and high photon energy levels after the x-rays have passed through the body. Each channel of
the DCA is functionally identical, but employs different window settings to sense the two
different energy levels.
There are two DCA PCBls in the DPX-IQ. The AGSDCA and the DPXDCA. The AGSDCA is
used in conjunction with the Automatic Gain Stabilizer (AGS) PCB to control the AMPLIFY and
ATTENUATE function of the AGS. The DPXDCA discriminates and detects the photon energy
levels for the SBC, where the actual event counting takes place.
The two DCAls are NOT interchangeable, although they share the same part number (2640) as
ADJUSTABLE DCA PCB. .
What to look for

On the DPX DCA:
• TP16: LOW CHANNEL COUNTS
• TP17: HIGH CHANNEL COUNTS
DCA Board 8C-1

Appendix 8.D
MAX Board Troubleshooting
MAX Board Troubleshooting Appendix 8.0

',-
Appendix 8.0
8.0 The MAX Board

The MAX board controls the current through the X-ray Insert in the Tube Head. DPX-IQ
scanners use MAX version 028 currently.
The current at a given kV across the insert is a function of insert filament temperature . The
MAX board adjusts the current by regulating the filament temperature to provide the proper
current as set by the S8C. The relationship is Insert IJA X 1000 = SBC input (in volts DC) , so
for an SSC input of 5VDC, Insert IJA = 5000.
The Positive High Voltage Power Supply has a current monitor output (mA MONITOR); the
voltage at this output is proportional to the current passing through the X-ray Insert. This
monitor voltage is connected to the MAX board as feedback (mA FEEDBACK).
What to look for

• Make sure that all connectors are fully seated.
• Check Lemo connectors for loose parts.
• Check for loose wires on the insulation displacement connectors.
• Check the position of the shorting jumpers on pin headers JB1, JB2, and JB3 for: Be
sure pins 1 and 2 are connec;;ted as indicated by silk screen.
• When the X-ray Relay is on, <both the red and green LED's on the MAX board should be
illuminated. If both are out, no power is getting to the MAX board. If only the red LED is
lit, then the MAX board fuse is burned out or missing.
Electrical tests
When the board is powered up, and x-rays are being generated, the following measurements
may be performed: '
1
With a VOM set on 200 VDC, you should measure about 18 to 21 VDC on (fP's 4, 13 and 5
referenced to TP3 (GND). - L. _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
NOTE: If an oscilloscope is available, you should see about 18 to 21 VDC on TP13.

However, TP 4 & 5 should have a 36 to 42 volt peak square wave. A VOM will
show the average value of the square wave, i.e. 18 to 21 VDC.
MAX Soard 80-1

To check the current setting, measure the voltage at TP8. At this test point, a to 1 volt
corresponds to a to 1000 uA (1 rnA). If the current is set to 750 uA (0.75 mA), you should
measure 0.750 VDC +/- 0.010 VDC at TP8.
Symptoms of possible MAX failure

mA ramping failure
Unusual high or low channel air counts
X-rayon light fails to illuminate when expected
"
80-2 MAX Board

Appendix B.E
OINK Board Troubleshooting
OINK Board Troubleshooting Appendix B.E

Appendix 8.E
8.E The OINK Board

The OINK is a multipurpose interface board designed for use with the DPX-IQ. Operation is
both analog and digital.
., DPX-IQ scanners use OINK board revisions 02C, E, and higher.
Optical isolation is used to isolate the +26VDC supply from the +5VDC and +12VDC (logic)
supplies, and eliminate interference between the motor circuits and the event (CH1, CH2)
signals.
What to look for

The test points on the OINK to check for motion control problems:
Test Point for Test Point for Rev. E Signal

Rev.02C and Higher
TP4 TP13 Motor Kill
TP5 TP17 Transverse Run/Hid
TP6 TP12 Transverse Pulse
TP9 TP18 Longitudinal Run/HId
TP10 TP11 Longitudinal Rev/Fwd
TP11 . TP10 Transverse Rev/Fwd
TP12 TP9 Longitudinal Pulse
TP13 TP8 Longitudinal Interrupt
TP14 TP7 Transverse Interrupt
TP17 TP6 Interrupt
--- .
OINK Board SE-'I

DPX-IQ Service Manual Rev. E (3/9S)
THrs PAGE LEFT BLANK rNTENTrONALLY
SE-2 OINK Board

Appen ixB.F
OMI Board Troubleshooting
OM I Board Troubleshooting Appendix 8.F

Appendix 8.F
8.F The OMI Board

The OMI board, being a rather uncomplicated device, has little in the way of things to watch for
in installation and use. There are two such boards, one on the Front Longitudinal Carriage
(transverse), the other is located at the foot of the scanner on the longitudinal idler shaft
(longitudinal).
What to look for

• Check the connector to each board for proper seating.
• Examine the area where the wires attach to the board itself; it is possible the may fray or
break.
• Insure that the interrupter disk does not rub against the plastic detector housing. If it
does, adjust by loosening the two machine screws that attach the plastic detector,
reposition the detector and re"7tighten the screws.
Electrical tests
The OMI has three wires connected to it:
• Red - +5 volts
• Green - Ground
• Black - Signal
The signal from the OMI board is nominally rectangular in shape. The signal is generated when
the Interrupter Disk alternately., passes and occludes a light beam between the two posts on the
photo-transducer. With the 'beam occluded by the disk, the output signal should be about 5
VDC (close counts). When the beam is allowed to pass through a slot in the disk, the Signal
output is near ground potential.
Symptoms of possible OMI failure

• Scanner shuts down at the beginning of a patient scan.
• Scanner shuts down unexpectedly during a scan.
• Either condition above should be accompanied by a Diagnostic Failure #15-4 or #23-3
(see section B.1).
OM I Board Troubleshooting BF-1

8F-2 OMI Board Troubleshooting

Appendix B.G
('
j
I
I
)
J)!J3 (
to ~~um flU! )
8R 9~22
:1
Appendix B.G
sse Board Troubleshooting
Appendix 8. G
8.G The Single Board Controller (SBC)

The SSC consists of a single circuit board that uses the 8032 microprocessor with a RS-232-C
interface and up to 56K of memory (8K EPROM, 8K EEPROM, 8K NVRAM, and 32K RAM).
The EEPROM is utilized to allow easy program modification and the NVRAM is used to retain
certain data during power loss.
The SSC-03 is located on the electronics pan in the front center.
What to look for

• If the green LED is on then you have +5VDC to the board.
• If the red LED is on then you have +12VDC to the board.
• If the amber LED is on then you have -12VDC to the board.
• R43 is used in adjusting the detector high voltage range and should have been adjusted
at Lunar for the individual detector in the scanner. Detector high voltage may be read at
TP18: 1000VDC at the Detector = 1.0VDC at TP18.
• The EEPROM should have the VER DPX 5.17 program or higher installed. This
program is reloaded into the EEPROM every time the Lunar software is reloaded (These
monitor programs are for software version 4.00. Future software releases may have
different monitor (?rog~~!ll~)';i See se~ti~n ?·1-/9.c..m~re inf9.ffT\atiC;Hlon the monitor
programs. C f2tPYCA.),,'A, · -t~A J)vJ,</J))i1::. / u/J) ,k0-...!..{) ;;Or; W0Jg:
• The SSC should have the proper EPROM chip installed. OPX-IQ scanners should have, '.' .r \ J
an EPROM labelled DPXBOOT 2.4. "

• When pluggingJnthecommunications cable do it very gently because the connector is
not bolted tothepCS. Also do not move the computer with the cable connected to the
SSC .or the .connector can be pulled out.
• Notethe.u1 is inserted in a Dallas OS 1213 "smart socket". This socket has an internal 1 '" ,l/
battery to maintain information stored in the memory when the scanner's power is off. )
• The reset button near the communications cable connector causes a reset signal at the
SSC microprocessor. If this switch is pressed, it will be necessary to exit the Lunar
software to DOS and then reenter the Lunar software to reestablish communication
between the scanner and computer for normal operation. Also, disconnecting the serial
cable will cause a reset state until the cable is re-attached and communications
reinstated.
SSC Soard 8G-1

8G-2 ::.: : <'....

SBe Board
Appendix B.H
XORB Board Troubleshooting
XORB Board Troubleshooting Appendix 8. H

.-~ "
~. ~ ,.-. ', ... ,- .
Appendix 8. H
_L_U_N_A_R_®_ _ _..,.,--...,.......,___----..,....D-P-'X--I-O-S-e-rv-ic-e-M_a_n_ua_1_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _. . :. R.:. :;. e v _~: _(~,'~:: 8)
S.H The XORB Board

The XORB board routes a number of important signals to the rest of the system and protr' Gt~;
the system from transients by shunting them to ground with transorbs.
OPX-/O will use the XORB-01 B only.
What to look for

• All connectors firmly seated.
• Check to see that all wires and cables are firmly affixed to their respective conne ctors,
Pay particular attention to Lemo connectors, since the jam nuts on the connectors are
prone to be loose.
• Check and tighten, if necessary, all mounting screws for the XORB board.
Electrica.l Tests
• Measure impedance between XORB ground plane and the electrical pan. It s~ c}, lk; bf'
less than an ohm.
• There should be no low impedance (less than 10 ohms) reading between any signal 0 1"
signal ground and chassis ground on the XORB when the associated signal connectors
are disconnected.
---,. - "\ • The following test points should have the following readings:
~" " ):
Test Point kV mA Limits

It f/1oY)
XORB TP1-f 76 750 0.74 - 0.76
1/ -N-f ~}"t1Q)11
XORB TP 51
XORB TP 1 3000 2.97 - 3.03
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 1 4750 4.70 - 4.80
XORB TP 5
XORB TP 2- ~Vrnol) 3.76 - 3.84
XORB TP 6 +KY '('t1) l}
TP3 and TP7 are the kV programs from the SSC and should climb to 3.8VDC +/- O.04VDC.
J;8 )9
v4l /' )-, f1 ~J
/
('"(j t1 Ie
----=---,-,-~-,.,;-"""':"-~-:-----.:.....------------------___;:;_;_T--~"
XORB Board 8H-1
Symptoms of a possible problem with the XORB

• Lack of response in any of the signals from the Tube Head.or High Voltage Power
Supplies such as problems with: r.'1f<rJi..;;":" '~.";_.,\, .
• kV or mA ramping.
• Solenoid operation failure.
• X-:-RAY ON Light failure.
• Thermostat or Thermocouple failure.
• Some transorbs begin to leak current after many hours of use. The symptoms of this
problem are:
• Change in Air Ratio (usually Low Channel Counts decrease and High Channel
Counts increase).
• Failure of Tissue Value test.
;' - .
r}.: f .
. r·· ·..
,. j r> .
~ J" \" '. ,~~, - i'
, .
zr l ~~; /' _ C.');-:
.:y
'~ ';:" . -
../ , ~,1\
k ' ...., ~. - • " .
... .... .... - ----------~- -' .. - ... .
8H-2 XORB Board

Lunar DPX1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Lunar DPX1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lunar DPX1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

I l

'\ READ THIS FIRST

Using This Manual

Read the Introduction, General Electronic Descriptions, and Mechanical Descriptions to

When a problem ~rises, ref~1;~i: ~heck

other Sections and pages of the manual as needed, so often

Infonnation Request 0-1

Information Requested By LUNAR

Date (DATE) '"i'.

1.1 General Safety ........................................................................

1.2 Emergency Stop Button

This eQutpm9nt CMlPlfes with

NOTE: DO NOT SJARE3IN::rCFTHE BEAM while the laser is operating.

1.4 X-RaY~$~4t"t~_t:'0pen Symbol

1.,5 Cautions, Warnings, and Notes

1.5.1 Caution Statements

1.5.2 Warning Statements

1.5.3 Note Statements

1.6 Safety Cp~c~~~ij~J"and

Safety Concerns and Labels

Keys should be removed after·

The arm mOVin~

The arm forms a pinch pOint as it

1.8 Leakage Radiation

1.9 Controlling Computer and Accessories

Tub. He.d J_..............

3S- 13- 0' 13- 3S­

.... IS" c' 20' 44'

2.8 System Detector Circuit ... .......... t~F~~'?jt ...............................................................2-3

System Overview Chapter 2

Chapter 2 System Overview

memory (SK EPROM, SK EEPROM, 8K NVRAM, and 3~~~;~~~~

System Overview 2-1

2i3 High Voltage Power Supplies

2 ~4 Tube Head and MAX Board

The two high voltage power supplies provide the anod~p:ntial

2.6 Audible X-RAY OFF Signal

2-2 System Overview

2j 7 X-Ray Collimator Subsystem

2.8 System ~+-ector Circuit

System Overview 2-3

component replacement of any kind it is recomm~at the tabletop be removed. Each

2-4 System Overview

F1 (+5, ±12VDC PS) 1.2SAL 0.63AL 5x20MM

F2 (+26VDC PS) 2.SAL 1.25AL 5x20MM

F3 (+5, ±12VDC PS) 1.25AL 0.63AL 5x20MM

F4 (+26VDC PS) 2.SAL 1.25AL 5x20MM

F5 (+28VDC PS) 0.63AL 0.63AL ~ ~?x20MM

*All Fuses are 2S0V, low breaking capacity (2SA min.)4t~f~}~~.0~

System Overview 2-5

AGSDCA ~ sac .+oJ

rvy'vcR X-RAY 3'"

,-",,,,c:R ?v3. :;:;-i.i,Ci-i1::3 ~-~~~'

~fAcI I MAIN I DPX-IQIIEC

System Overview 2-7

2-8 System Overview

.~:~:~:~:!:~~~:;~I~;t;:;:::;:;;:;;;:;:;;;~~~(}~~~~~%~~7:;::;;;;;;: : : ;:; ;: : ; ;:;:;:; ;:;:;:; ; !~!

Technk;al Soecifications Chaoter 3

3S- 13- 0' 13- 3S

memory (SK EPROM, SK EEPROM, 8K NVRAM, and 3~;~~

.~:~:~:~:!:~~~:;~I~;t;:;:::;:;;:;;;:;:;;;~(}~%7:;::;;;;;;: : : ;:; ;: : ; ;:;:;:; ;:;:;:; ; !~!